Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 490

Wireless Service Provider Solutions

BSS Parameter Dictionary


PE/DCL/DD/0124 13.04/EN Standard March 2002 4119001124

< 124 > : BSS Parameter Dictionary

Wireless Service Provider Solutions

BSS Parameter Dictionary


Document number: PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124 Document status: Standard Document issue: 13.04/EN Product release: GSM/BSS V13 Date: March 2002

Copyright 20002002 Nortel Networks, All Rights Reserved Printed in France


NORTEL NETWORKS CONFIDENTIAL: The information contained in this document is the property of Nortel Networks. Except as specifically authorized in writing by Nortel Networks, the holder of this document shall keep the information contained herein confidential and shall protect same in whole or in part from disclosure and dissemination to third parties and use for evaluation, operation and maintenance purposes only. You may not reproduce, represent, or download through any means, the information contained herein in any way or in any form without prior written consent of Nortel Networks. The following are trademarks of Nortel Networks: *NORTEL NETWORKS, the NORTEL NETWORKS corporate logo, the NORTEL Globemark, UNIFIED NETWORKS, DMS, DMSMSC, BSC6000, S2000, S4000, S8000. GSM is a trademark of France Telecom. Sun, Ultrastation are registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Sybase is a registered trademark of Sybase, Inc. Windows is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corp. All other brand and product names are trademarks or registred trademarks of their respective holders.

Nortel Networks Confidential

Publication History

iii

PUBLICATION HISTORY
System release : GSM/BSS V13
March 2002 Issue 13.04/EN Standard Answer to CR (Change Request) Q00181313 The following parameters were added: bscIPFirstAdr bscIPSecondAdr mainNetworkBand bsMsmtProcessingMode btsWithCavity network protocolUsed uplinkMappingMeasurementMode The following parameters were modified: geographicalCoordinates unequippedCircuit bscArchitecture networkIndicator errorCorrectionMethod transcoderArchitecture coderPoolConfig signallingTerminalNumber timeSlotNumber associatedTMUPosition cpueOccurrence concentric cell codingScheme operationalState positionInShelf

BSS Parameter Dictionary

iv

Publication History

Nortel Networks Confidential

interOmuEtherlinkOper CTU cable upgradeStatus lsaRc Reference port0X25Status The following parameters were deleted: bscIPAdr protocolUsed pwciHreqave rxLevNCellHreqaveBeg rxNCellHreqave rxQualDLIH rxQualHreqave rxQualULIH rxQualWtsList selfTuningObs lapdexists lsaPcmList hardwareSlotPosition Answer to CR (Change Request) Q00216666 Updated the following parameter: administrativeState for transceiverEquipment October 2001 Issue 13.03/EN Preliminary Update after internal review according to PE/DCL/GES/248 V01.01/EN October 2001 Issue 13.02/EN Draft The following parameters were added: Issue 13.02/EN Draft

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Publication History

executableSoftwareId executableSoftwareName relatedSoftwares configRefList bscList softwareLabel bsc2GEqptId tSCBNumber tSCBUse aLAIntState bsc3GEqptId bscReset bscLogId maxNbrConsMess transcoder2GEqptId transcoderAlarmList transcoderMatrix transcoderIntPcmIntState transcoder3GEqptId lapdLinkCallPLoad coderPoolList associatedTMUPosition atmRmId bscUsedAdr ccId cemId cnId iemId inId lsaRcId mmsId omuId

BSS Parameter Dictionary

vi

Publication History

Nortel Networks Confidential

protocolUsed sw8kRmId tmuId trmId September 2001 Issue 13.01/EN Draft The following parameters were added: administrativeState availabilityStatus operationalState upgradeStatus standbyStatus positionInShelf shelfNumber CTU cable lsaRc Reference NumberOfEnabledHDLCPorts lapdexists lsaPcmList privateMmsOmuRef mmsUsage portEthernetOperational portEthernetStatus X25Port0Operational X25Port1Operational port0X25Status port1X25Status

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Publication History

vii

System release : GSM/BSS V12


June 2001 Issue 12.09/EN Preliminary Answer to Service Requests:
SREE10379: SREE11026:

Updated the class value of cpueNumber parameter (btsSiteManager object), in Chapter 2 Updated the description of numberOfTCHFreeToEndCongestion parameter (bts object), in Chapter2 point and signallingLinkSet objects), in Chapter 2

SR30358404: Updated the value range of pointCode parameter (signalling

The following changes were made in individual chapters: Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
updated the description of maxNbrPDAAssig parameter (transceiver object) updated the description of maxNbrRLCEmptyBlock parameter (transceiver

object)
completed

the description parameter (bts object)

of

numberOfTCHFreeBeforeCongestion

V12.4 release update after internal review according to PE/DCL/GES/224 V01.01/FR April 2001 Issue 12.07/EN Draft Answer to Service Requests:
SREE10565: updated the value range of longTbfLossThroughput parameter

(bts object), in chapter 2


SREE00527:

updated the value range (HandOverControl object), in chapter 2

of

intracell

parameter

The following changes were made in individual chapters: Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
added the default value for several parameters completed the descritpion of reserved5 parameter (bts object)

BSS Parameter Dictionary

viii

Publication History

Nortel Networks Confidential

February 2001 Issue 12.06/EN Draft V12.4 release update after internal review according to PE/DCL/GES/217 V01.01/FR The following changes were made in individual chapters: Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
removed the table in the description of adjacentCellHandOver parameter removed the table in the description of adjacentCellReselection parameter updated the value range of endCounterThreshold changed the class of gprsTranscvLockBtsExtendedConf updated the value range of log parameter updated the value range of longTbfLossThroughput parameter explained the meaning of the value range of maxRACH parameter updated the value range of mdScanner parameter updated the value range of Observed object class parameter changed the class of reserved1 (pcu), reserved1 (transceiver), reserved2

(pcu), reserved2 (transceiver), reserved3 (pcu), reserved3 (transceiver), reserved4 (pcu), reserved4 (transceiver), reserved5 (pcu), reserved5 (transceiver) parameters
updated the value range of t3101 parameter

January 2001 Issue 12.05/EN Draft The following changes were made in individual chapters: Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
modified

bscMdInterfaceVersionNumber, backup manager addresses parameters type (DI, not DP)

completed the description of bsCvMax parameter added bsMsmtProcessingMode parameter completed the description of cellReselectHysteresis parameter updated the value range of circuitGroupBlock parameter following the

introduction of feature UF11691 Unequipped circuit and circuit group block (unblock)
completed the description of configRef parameter

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Publication History

ix

completed the description of drxTimerMax parameter following the

introduction of GPRS feature TF1220 TBF establishment improvements


completed the description of gprsCellActivation parameter completed the description of gprsPreemption parameter added hexa text parameter updated the value range of language parameter completed the description of checks of msTxPwrMaxCCH parameter completed

the description BeforeCongestion parameter

of

checks

of

numberOfTCHQueued

added Object Filter List parameter updated the value range of objects parameter completed the description of packetAckTime parameter according to feature

TF1220 TBF establishment improvements


completed the description of pan parameter completed the description of reserved3 (T3168) parameter completed the description of reserved4 (T3192) parameter completed the description of sigPReserved1 parameter according to feature

PM1251.1 BSC capacity control


changed the name of states parameter (now called system state) updated the value range of unequippedCircuit parameter according to the

introduction of feature UF11691 Unequipped circuit and circuit group block (unblock) Answer to Service Requests:
SR30315339: a note was added (in June 2000, in 12.03/EN release) in

btsDescription parameter (maximum configuration loaded on one of the BTSs)


GV00302 (clone 30340279): added the following parameters: exclusive

interval of codano, inclusive interval of codano, exclusive list of codano, inclusive list of codano
SR30068156 (master 30067821): completed the description of external

alarm configuration parameter and radioSiteMask parameter


SR30334467 (master 30320056): updated the value range of maxDwAsign

parameter
SR30331543 (30328124): updated the value range of maxRach parameter SR EE00499 (30340234): updated the description of checks and value range

of msTxPwrMax parameter

BSS Parameter Dictionary

Publication History

Nortel Networks Confidential

SR30315359 (30109408): changed the class of standard indicator Adj

parameter
SR30315346 (30136216): updated the value range of teiTranscoder

parameter
SREE00911: updated the value range of type parameter (new partition names)

(omc object) September 2000 Issue 12.04/EN Standard The following changes were made in individual chapters: Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
added additional unmasked users alarms parameter following the

introduction of the GSMR feature Additional external alarms on CBCF BTS FM1158
added additional supervised PCMn (n=0 to 5) parameters following the

introduction of the GSMR feature D&I PCM fault management FM1189


completed the description of gprsAvgParam parameter completed the description of gprsPermittedAccess parameter updated btsSensitivity parameter value range completed the description of longTbfLossThroughput parameter completed the description of maxDwAssign parameter completed the value range of reserved3 (bts) and reserved4 (bts) parameters updated t3101 parameter value range completed the description of unmasked users alarms parameter answer to Service Request:

EE00527: updated intraCell parameter value range June 2000 Issue 12.03/EN Preliminary V12.4 release update after internal review according to PE/DCL/GES/182 V01.01/FR The following changes were made in individual chapters: A note was added in btsDescription parameter (maximum configuration loaded on one of the BTSs), Chapter 2.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Publication History

xi

Answer to Service Requests: 30104649: Data14.4OnNoHoppingTs parameter added, Chapter 2 30127416: eMLPPThreshold parameter and preemptionAuthor parameter had their class changed (3 instead of 1), Chapter 2 EE00531: numberOfTCHFreeOfCongestion parameter value range update, Chapter 2 30315382: Uplink mapping rxLevUL value extension, Chapter 2 30315351: Timers T3168 and T3192, Chapter 2 30315352: Dualband cell and power control (new parameters: btsSensitivityInnerZone and maxBsTransmitPowerInnerZone), Chapter 2 30315354: processorLoadSupConf parameter value range update, Chapter 2 30320757: password and new password 1st try parameters definition update, Chapter 2 March 2000 Issue 12.02/EN Draft V12.4 release update The following changes were made in individual chapters: Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
added GPRS parameters added parameters related to feature TF995 Automatic cell tiering added parameters related to feature TF876 Uplink mapping

January 2000 Issue 12.01/EN Draft Creation: Chapter 1 Introduction contains the former Paragraphs 3.1.1 and 3.1.2 which were removed from NTP < 07 >. Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order contains the former Chapter 3 Dictionary of parameters which was removed from NTP < 07 >.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

xii

Publication History

Nortel Networks Confidential

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Table of contents

xiii

About this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Precautionary message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Related documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How this document is organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vocabulary conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

01
01 01 02 02 02 02 03

1
1.1 1.2 1.3

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network configuration objects and their parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The different types of configuration parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description of dictionary entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.1 1.3.2 Header line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main body of the entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11
11 16 17 17 18

Parameters listed in alphabetical order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


A ..................................................................... B ..................................................................... C ..................................................................... D ..................................................................... E ..................................................................... F ..................................................................... G ..................................................................... H ..................................................................... I ...................................................................... J ..................................................................... L ..................................................................... M ..................................................................... N ..................................................................... O ..................................................................... P ..................................................................... R ..................................................................... S ..................................................................... T ..................................................................... U .....................................................................

21
21 244 290 2139 2154 2175 2179 2185 2193 2203 2204 2219 2260 2275 2298 2322 2346 2377 2415

BSS Parameter Dictionary

xiv

Table of contents

Nortel Networks Confidential

V ..................................................................... W ..................................................................... X ..................................................................... Z .....................................................................

2423 2425 2426 2430

Appendix A
A.1 A.1.1 A.2 A.2.1 A.2.2

Objects and parameters evolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31
31 32 32 32 35

New V13 parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New V12 parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V12 parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New V12 parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameter updates linked to new feature introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix B

Configuration parameter list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

41

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

List of figures

xv

Figure 11 Figure 12 Figure 13 Figure 14 Figure 15 Figure 16

Object main tree structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . omc subtree objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . md subtree objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . network subtree objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menus in the OMCR browser window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Header line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11 12 13 14 15 18

BSS Parameter Dictionary

xvi

List of figures

Nortel Networks Confidential

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

About this document

01

ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT


This BSS Parameter Dictionary is a reference guide that describes all GSM BSS network element parameters that can be accessed through the OMCR.

Applicability
This document applies to the GSM900, GSM1800, and GSM1900 digital wireless systems. The present edition of the dictionary applies to V13 BSS operations by default. In V13 release, the OMCR manages V13, V12 and V11 BSSs with BSCs 6000, 12000, and 30000. Some differences or restrictions may apply when the OMCR manages V12 and V11 BSSs. The user is informed when it is necessary to refer to specific subsystem features. The BSS Parameter Dictionary is part of the BSS NTP Suite. It is closely associated to the following manuals: The BSS Operating Principles Manual (NTP < 07 >) describes general operating principles and explains the mechanisms that enable Man-Machine interface commands. The Observation Counter Dictionary (NTP < 125 >) describes all the observation counters used in performance management commands. The OMCR User Manual (NTPs < 128 > to < 130 >) is a user-oriented guide to performing Man-Machine interface commands. The BSS Operating Procedures Manual (NTP < 34 >) describes various procedures that help users operate or reconfigure a BSS.

Precautionary message
The following message:

CAUTION
GSMR specific Indicates that specific equipment and specific software (such as specific software in the BSC) dedicated to Railway application is used and that therefore the feature is not available for all standard GSM users.

GSMR specific parameters listed in this dictionary contain GSMR V12 in the Feature field.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

02

About this document

Nortel Networks Confidential

Audience
This document is intended for: OMCR administrators OMCR maintenance attendants GSM network engineers users who want to know more about OMCR

Prerequisites
Users must be familiar with networking principles. They must also be familiar with the following manuals: < 00 > : BSS Product Documentation Overview < 01 > < 06 > < 07 > < 16 > < 22 > < 32 > < 34 > : BSS Overview : OMCR Architecture and Reference Manual : BSS Operating Principles : TCU Reference Manual : BSC Reference Manual : OMCR Preventive and Corrective Maintenance Manual : BSS Operating procedures

< 125 > : Observation Counter Dictionary < 128 > : OMCR User Manual Volume 1 of 3: Object and Fault menus < 129 > : OMCR User Manual Volume 2 of 3: Configuration, Performance, and Maintenance menus < 130 > : OMCR User Manual Volume 3 of 3: Security, Administration, SMSCB, and Help menus

Related documents
The NTPs listed in the above paragraph are quoted in the document.

How this document is organized


Chapter 1 Introduction contains general information on BSS operating parameters. Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order describes all the operating parameters listed in alphabetical order, and explains their use.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

About this document

03

Vocabulary conventions
The glossary is presented in NTP < 00 >. To help users operate configuration objects and parameters, the items are identified according to the release of the BSSs managed on the OMCR. The following rule applies: Vn means that the item is only significant for a BSS of release n. Vn+ means that the item is only significant for a BSS of release n and above. Vn means that the item is only significant for a BSS of release n and under. No identification means that the item does not depend on a BSS release.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

04

About this document

Nortel Networks Confidential

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Introduction

11

INTRODUCTION
1.1 Network configuration objects and their parameters
This dictionary summarizes all the GSM BSS parameters used to define all the objects managed on the OMCR. An object model is used to describe each managed network element. Each object is defined in terms of its parameters (also called attributes), and its relationships with other objects. A containment tree is used to depict the relationships among these objects (see Figure 11 to Figure 14). For more information on objects and parameters, refer to NTP < 07 >, and NTP < 128 >.

root

md

network

omc

bscMdInterface

bsc

Figure 11

Object main tree structure

BSS Parameter Dictionary

12

Introduction

Nortel Networks Confidential

omc

userProfile terminalProfile jobResult

job

commandFile directory

userMessage

shortMessage machine

sessionLog

clearedAlarmLog

relay

notificationLog

currentAlarmList

alarmCriteria

Figure 12

omc subtree objects

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Introduction

13

md

mdScanner

callPathTrace

efd

log

mdWarning

bscMdInterface bsc

traceControl

executableSoftware

alarmRecord

stateChangeRecord

traceLogRecord mdScanReportRecord

traceFileReadyRecord

observationFileReadyRecord

: Referenced objects with no hierarchical relationship : Functional objects

Figure 13

md subtree objects

BSS Parameter Dictionary

14

Introduction

Nortel Networks Confidential

network pcusn bscMdInterface bsc

signallingPoint

xtp transcoder

pcmCircuit (Abis / Ater)

bsc 2G

bsc e3

pcu

signallingLinkSet

btsSiteManager

lapdLink

bscCounterList

software

signallingLink

bsc log

pcmCircuit (A)

transcoderBoard

tcu

tcu e3

software

software

tdti

cem

trm

lsaRc

iem : referenced objects with no hierarchical relationship : Functional objects

Figure 14

network subtree objects

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Introduction

15

Users can create, modify, and delete objects using commands and actions displayed in the menus of the OMCR Browser window (see Figure 15). Parameters are widely used in all commands and actions. For more information on commands, refer to NTPs < 128 > to < 130 >:
Described in Manual < 130 > Chapter 14

Described in Manual < 130 > Chapter 13

Described in Manual < 130 > Chapters 9 to 12

Described in Manual < 130 > Chapter 8 Described in Manual < 129 > Chapter 7 Described in Manual < 129 > Chapter 6 Described in Manual < 129 > Chapter 5

Described in Manual < 128 > Chapter 4 Described in Manual < 128 > Chapter 3

Figure 15

Menus in the OMCR browser window

BSS Parameter Dictionary

16

Introduction

Nortel Networks Confidential

1.2

The different types of configuration parameters


There are two types of configuration parameters: customer and manufacturer parameters. Customer parameters:
addressing parameters, which are relative to objects (for example: bsc

number)
design parameters, which are relative to contract characteristics (for example:

configRef, SiteName)
optimization parameters, which are relative to network tuning (for example:

cellReselectHysteresis)
operating parameters, which are relative to network operation (for example:

cellBarred) Manufacturer parameters:


system parameters, which can seriously affect system operation, and which

must be under the control of the manufacturer (for example: runPwrControl)


product parameters, which are incompatible with the current system release

(for example: sWVersionbackup) Configuration parameters are summarized in tables in Appendix A.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Introduction

17

1.3

Description of dictionary entries


Each parameter is described separately and arranged in alphabetical order. Dictionary entries fall into two parts: the header line the main body, composed of several fields

1.3.1

Header line The header line contains some or all of the following information (see following figure): the name of the OMCR parameter the class of the parameter (if any) the BSS version from which it applies

BSS Parameter Dictionary

18

Introduction

Nortel Networks Confidential

bssMapT20 Class 1

V8

Only DP parameters have a class. S S S S Class 0: the parameter can be set only before the application database of the parent BSC is built (bdaState: not built). Class 1: the parameter can be set only when the parent bsc object is locked (administrativeState: locked). Class 2: the parameter can be set only when the object is locked and the parent bsc object is unlocked. Class 3: the parameter can be set only when the parent bsc object is unlocked.

For more information, refer to NTP < 07 > .

parameter name S S Vn means the parameter applies from the Vn BSS version, that is to say Vn, Vn + 1 and so on. : when there is no version, it means that this parameter is applicable from the V7 BSS release which was the release where the Q3 model has been introduced.

Figure 16

Header line

1.3.2

Main body of the entries The main body contains up to nine fields: Description: parameter definition Value range: displayed in square brackets and the unit if any Example: [2 to 300] seconds Object: object name(s) in which the parameter is defined Default value: value wich allows to deactivate the function Type: parameter type. The five accepted values are the following:

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Introduction

19

type

meaning

is handled by the Con- is handled by any other figuration Management applications (4) application X X X (6) X (7) X X X (5)

DD DI DP DS Id

Dynamic data (1) Internal data (2) Static data Identifier

Permanent data (3) X

(1) : Dynamic parameters (DD) are not stored in databases. They are managed by the BSC applications, and they can be consulted on operator request. (2) : Internal parameters (DI) are stored in the OMCR operation database (BDE) and they cannot be modified by the operator. They supply additional information on how an object is configured at a given time, and they can be consulted on operator request. (3) : Permanent parameters (DP) are stored in the application database (BDA) and in the operation database (BDE). Most of them are mandatory and they are defined with the object that uses them. They are managed by the operator. (4) : Fault Management, Performance Management, Command Functions, etc. (5) : parameter displayed in command output (6) : parameter entered by users (7) : parameter which is either entered by users, or displayed in command output Condition: It indicates the necessary conditions in which the parameter can be used. Checks: Semantic checks performed by the OMCR are indicated with the Create [C], Set [M], Delete [D], or specific action [A] commands. Feature: Field introduced from V12. It indicates the reference of the Feature that impacts the parameter description. Restrictions: Applicable restrictions are indicated with the Create [C], Set [M], Delete [D], or specific action [A] commands. Remark: optional field containing comments.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

110

Introduction

Nortel Networks Confidential

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

21

PARAMETERS LISTED IN ALPHABETICAL ORDER A


abisSpy Class 3 Description : Whether measurement reports from the BTS and the mobiles are forwarded to the BSC in order to spy on the Abis Interface The number of measurement reports is limited to four (respectively eight) communications per SICD (respectively SICD8V) port. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Note : [in progress / not in progress] bts not in progress DP [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked. Allowing spying increases the BSC SICD(8V) board load.

absoluteRFChannelNo Class 2 Description : Radio frequency used in the network frequency band by a radio time slot that does not obey frequency hopping laws Setting this attribute forbids the radio time slot to obey frequency hopping laws. The frequency of the radio time slot that carries a cell BCCH in a TDMA frame (channelType = mainBCCH, mainBCCHCombined, or bcchSdcch4CBCH) is not managed by users. When the parent bts object is unlocked, the system automatically assigns the cell bCCHFrequency to the concerned channel object and updates it whenever it is changed. Value range : [1 to 124] (GSM 900 network / Extended GSM network), [0 to 1023] (GSMR), [512 to 885] (GSM 1800 network), [512 to 810] (GSM 1900 network) channel To define if the TDMA does not hop DP

Object : Condition : Type :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

22

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

Checks :

[C/M] : The attribute is undefined when the radio time slot is authorized to hop or its channelType is mainBCCH, mainBCCHCombined, or bcchSdcch4CBCH. [C/M] : The attribute is defined when the radio time slot is not authorized to hop and its channelType is tCHFull, sDCCH, sdcch8CBCH, or cCH. [C/M] : When defined, the frequency is one of those allotted to the parent bts object (cellAllocation list). [M] : Concentric cell: When defined, the frequency is not used by the channel objects related to the transceiver objects allotted to the other cell zone. [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked and the parent bts object is locked.

access time end Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : access time start Description : Value range : Type : Checks : Time of the day after which the user is allowed to log in [<time> (09:00)] DP [C/M] : access time start is before access time end. V9 Time of the day after which the user is not allowed to log in. It is after access time start. [<time> (18:00)] user profile DP [C/M] : access time end is after access time start.

accessClassCongestion Class 3 A1 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

List of access classes that are not authorized in a cell during TCH congestion phase (class 10 not included) [0 to 9] User classes [11 to 15] Operator classes bts DP [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

23

accessibilityState Description : Value range : MSC accessibility state [reachable / congested / unReachable] reachable . . . . . . . . The remote signaling point is within reach. congested . . . . . . . . 80% of the BSC pool of buffers handling outgoing MSC messages is full. unReachable . . . . . The remote signaling point is out of reach. signallingLinkSet DD

Object : Type : acknowledged by Description :

To select alarms acknowledged by a given user. Enter the users name as defined in the users profile. Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.

Value range : Object : Type :

[case sensitive] Alarm logs Filter DP

acknowledgment time Description : Value range : To select messages acknowledged at that time [<date>,<time>] Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Object : Type : Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Alarm logs Filter DP

BSS Parameter Dictionary

24

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

activationObject Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Identifier or name of the traced bsc object on the OMCR [1 to 255] callPathTrace DP [C]: The bsc object is created. [C]: The callPathTrace object is not created for the bsc object. The Call path tracing function is unique in a given BSS. [M]: This attribute cannot be modified.

Restrictions : activationObject Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

Identifier or name of the traced bsc object on the OMCR [1 to 255] traceControl DP [C]: The bsc object is created. [C]: The traceControl object is not created for the bsc object. The Call tracing function is unique in a given BSS. [M]: This attribute cannot be modified. V10

Restrictions :

active (passive) chain disk state Description : Value range : Object : Type : Note : Chain disk state

[Working, Degraded, Partially degraded, Not significant] bsc DD This parameter is only available for BSC 2G V10

active (passive) chain Dmux state Description : Value range : Object : Type : Note :

State of passive equipment of chain controlled by ECI board via alarm loops [working, fault] bsc DD This parameter is only available for BSC 2G

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

25

active (passive) chain ECI board state Description : Value range : Object : Type : Note : Chain ECI board state [working, fault] bsc DD This parameter is only available for BSC 2G

V10

active (passive) chain REM link state Description : Value range : Object : Type : Note : Used BSC/OMCR link state

V11

[Working / Degraded / Partially degraded / Not significant] bsc DD This parameter is only available for BSC 2G V10

active (passive) chain Sic board state Description : Value range : Object : Type : Note : Chain SIC chain state

[Number, card type (CCS7, SICD, SICX), internal state (working, fault)] bsc DD This parameter is only available for BSC 2G V10

active (passive) chain sic channels state Description : Value range : Object : Type : Note : Chain SIC channel state (LAPD and SS7 channel state) [working, fault] bsc DD This parameter is only available for BSC 2G

active (passive) chain sls board state Description : Value range : Object : Type : Note : SLS board state [working, fault] bsc DD This parameter is only available for BSC 2G

V10

BSS Parameter Dictionary

26

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

active (passive) chain state Description : Value range : Object : Type : Note : Chain state [nominal state, deteriorated state] bsc DD This parameter is only available for BSC 2G

V10

active (passive) chain switching capacity Description : Value range : Object : Type : Note : Chain switching capacity [working, fault] bsc DD This parameter is only available for BSC 2G

V10

active (passive) chain tcu accessibility Description : Value range : Object : Type : Note : Chain TCU state [working, fault] bsc DD This parameter is only available for BSC 2G

V10

active (passive) chain ute board state Description : Value range : Object : Type : Note : active rem link Description : Value range : Object : Type : Note : BSC/OMCR link used [rem link 0, rem link 1] bsc DD This parameter is only available for BSC 2G DDTI, BSCB, TSCB, and ALA board state [working, fault] bsc DD This parameter is only available for BSC 2G

V10

V10

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

27

activeChain Description : Value range : Object : Type : Note : Identifier of the BSC active chain [chainA / chainB] bsc DD This parameter is only available for BSC 2G V12

additional supervised PCM 0 Class 2 Description :

Configuration of a new alarm controlled by a BTS in Drop and Insert configuration. The alarm is sent when a level 1 transmission network link failure is detected by the BTS, and is caused by an odd PCM port connected with a physical PCM link on the Abis interface between the BSC and one of the following BTSs: S8000 BTS with BCF S8000 BTS with CBCF S8002 BTS with CBCF S2000 H/L BTS ecell

Value range :

[yes (the odd PCM link is supervised by the BTS) / no (the odd PCM link is not supervised by the BTS)] If PCM 0 belongs to the bscSitePCMList parameter the values YES or NO are equivalent (recommendation: NO) btsSiteManager GSMR V12 DP [M] The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsSiteManager object is locked.

Object : Feature : Type : Checks :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

28

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

additional supervised PCM 1 Class 2 Description :

V12

Configuration of a new alarm controlled by a BTS in Drop and Insert configuration. The alarm is sent when a level 1 transmission network link failure is detected by the BTS, and is caused by an odd PCM port connected with a physical PCM link on the Abis interface between the BSC and one of the following BTSs: S8000 BTS with BCF S8000 BTS with CBCF S8002 BTS with CBCF S2000 H/L BTS ecell

Value range :

[yes (the odd PCM link is supervised by the BTS) / no (the odd PCM link is not supervised by the BTS)] If PCM 1 belongs to the bscSitePCMList parameter the values YES or NO are equivalent (recommendation: NO) btsSiteManager GSMR V12 DP [M] The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsSiteManager object is locked. V12

Object : Feature : Type : Checks :

additional supervised PCM 2 Class 2 Description :

Configuration of a new alarm controlled by a BTS in Drop and Insert configuration. The alarm is sent when a level 1 transmission network link failure is detected by the BTS, and is caused by an odd PCM port connected with a physical PCM link on the Abis interface between the BSC and one of the following BTSs: S8000 BTS with BCF S8000 BTS with CBCF S8002 BTS with CBCF S2000 H/L BTS ecell

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

29

Value range :

[yes (the odd PCM link is supervised by the BTS) / no (the odd PCM link is not supervised by the BTS)] If PCM 2 belongs to the bscSitePCMList parameter the values YES or NO are equivalent (recommendation: NO) btsSiteManager GSMR V12 DP [M] The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsSiteManager object is locked. V12

Object : Feature : Type : Checks :

additional supervised PCM 3 Class 2 Description :

Configuration of a new alarm controlled by a BTS in Drop and Insert configuration. The alarm is sent when a level 1 transmission network link failure is detected by the BTS, and is caused by an odd PCM port connected with a physical PCM link on the Abis interface between the BSC and one of the following BTSs: S8000 BTS with BCF S8000 BTS with CBCF S8002 BTS with CBCF S2000 H/L BTS ecell

Value range :

[yes (the odd PCM link is supervised by the BTS) / no (the odd PCM link is not supervised by the BTS)] If PCM 3 belongs to the bscSitePCMList parameter the values YES or NO are equivalent (recommendation: NO) btsSiteManager GSMR V12 DP [M] The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsSiteManager object is locked.

Object : Feature : Type : Checks :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

210

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

additional supervised PCM 4 Class 2 Description :

V12

Configuration of a new alarm controlled by a BTS in Drop and Insert configuration. The alarm is sent when a level 1 transmission network link failure is detected by the BTS, and is caused by an odd PCM port connected with a physical PCM link on the Abis interface between the BSC and one of the following BTSs: S8000 BTS with BCF S8000 BTS with CBCF S8002 BTS with CBCF S2000 H/L BTS ecell

Value range :

[yes (the odd PCM link is supervised by the BTS) / no (the odd PCM link is not supervised by the BTS)] If PCM 4 belongs to the bscSitePCMList parameter the values YES or NO are equivalent (recommendation: NO) btsSiteManager GSMR V12 DP [M] The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsSiteManager object is locked. V12

Object : Feature : Type : Checks :

additional supervised PCM 5 Class 2 Description :

Configuration of a new alarm controlled by a BTS in Drop and Insert configuration. The alarm is sent when a level 1 transmission network link failure is detected by the BTS, and is caused by an odd PCM port connected with a physical PCM link on the Abis interface between the BSC and one of the following BTSs: S8000 BTS with BCF S8000 BTS with CBCF S8002 BTS with CBCF S2000 H/L BTS ecell

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

211

Value range :

[yes (the odd PCM link is supervised by the BTS) / no (the odd PCM link is not supervised by the BTS)] If PCM 5 belongs to the bscSitePCMList parameter the values YES or NO are equivalent (recommendation: NO) btsSiteManager GSMR V12 DP [M] The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsSiteManager object is locked. V12

Object : Feature : Type : Checks :

additional unmasked users alarms Class 2 Description :

Configuration of the new user (unprotected) external alarm loops controlled by the BTS (added to the already existing unprotected external alarms, see parameter unmasked users alarms). These additional alaarms are detected by the RECAL board of the main cabinet. When an alarm is unmasked, it means the relevant equipment is monitored by the BTS. There are 24 additional user (unprotected) alarms on the S8002 BTS, 14 alarms on the S8000 Outdoor BTS, and 20 alarms on the S8000 Indoor BTS. A user alarm is used when an external item of equipment is inserted in the BTS (a microwave terminal for instance) and does not require a new DLU.

Value range :

[All alarms masked Alarm 1 unmasked Alarms 1 to 2 unmasked Alarms 1 to 3 unmasked Alarms 1 to 4 unmasked Alarms 1 to 5 unmasked Alarms 1 to 6 unmasked Alarms 1 to 7 unmasked Alarms 1 to 8 unmasked Alarms 1 to 9 unmasked Alarms 1 to 10 unmasked Alarms 1 to 11 unmasked Alarms 1 to 12 unmasked Alarms 1 to 13 unmasked Alarms 1 to 14 unmasked Alarms 1 to 15 unmasked

BSS Parameter Dictionary

212

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

Object : Feature : Type : Checks :

Alarms 1 to 16 unmasked Alarms 1 to 17 unmasked Alarms 1 to 18 unmasked Alarms 1 to 19 unmasked Alarms 1 to 20 unmasked Alarms 1 to 21 unmasked Alarms 1 to 22 unmasked Alarms 1 to 23 unmasked Alarms 1 to 24 unmasked ] btsSiteManager GSMR V12 DP [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsSiteManager object is locked

addresses Description : Definition of the OMCR user(s) to whom the message is addressed Select the all option to send the message to all OMCR users. Select the users option to send the message to selected OMCR users. Enter their names as defined in their profiles [case sensitive], separated by the & character. user message Answer / New message DP V9

Object : Type :

adjacent cell umbrella ref Class 3 A2 Description :

Identifier of the adjacentCelHandOver object that describes the neighbor cell towards which a directed retry will be triggered in BSC mode [0 to 31] bts DP [C/M]: The preferential umbrella cell must refer to an existing adjacentCellHandOver object instance. [C/M]: When the function directed retry is made by interrogation of the BTS, the preferential umbrella cell must not be indicated. [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

213

adjacentCellHandOver Description :

V8

Identifier of an adjacentCellHandOver object that defines a neighbor cell of a serving cell for handover management purposes. A bts object may reference up to thirty-two objects of this type. [0 to 31] adjacentCellHandOver Id [C]: The associated bts object is created and the adjacentCellHandOver object is not created for that object. The number of adjacentCellHandOver objects created for a bts object is limited to maxAdjCHOARMPerBts (static configuration data).

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

[C]:

[C/M]: The (baseColourCode, bCCHFrequency, networkColourCode) combination is unique in the set including a serving cell and its neighbor cells. [C/D]: If the related BSC application database is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked. [M]: [D]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. If the application database of the related BSC is not built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command. No mdScanner object refers to the adjacentCellHandOver object (no observation is running on that object). At least one adjacentCellHandOver object should be created for the bts object. [M/D]: The adjacentCellHandOver object is created.

[D]:

[D]:

BSS Parameter Dictionary

214

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

adjacentCellReselection Description :

V8

Identifier of an adjacentCellReselection object that defines reselection management parameters for a serving cell. A bts object may reference up to thirty-two objects of this type. [0 to 31] adjacentCellReselection Id [C]: The bts object is created and the adjacentCellReselection object is not created for that object. [C]: The number of adjacentCellReselection objects created for a bts object is limited to maxAdjCHOARMPerBts (static configuration data). [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. [C/D]: If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked. [M/D]: The adjacentCellReselection object is created. [D]: If the application database of the related BSC is not built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command. V12

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

adjCHOReserved3 Class 3 A3 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Attribute reserved for future use [32768 to 32767] adjacentCellHandOver DP [M]:

The parent bsc object is unlocked. V12

adjCHOReserved4 Class 3 A4 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Attribute reserved for future use [32768 to 32767] adjacentCellHandOver DP [M]:

The parent bsc object is unlocked.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

215

administrativeState Description : Activation state of an alarm criteria An alarm criteria is created in unlocked state. The OMCR Fault Management function ignores the inactive criteria when processing notifications. Value range : Object : Type : [locked (inactive) / unlocked (active)] alarm criteria DP V13

administrativeState Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : ISO state [locked / unlocked] atmRm BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DP

administrativeState Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : ISO state [locked / unlocked] A bsc object is created in locked state. bsc DP [M]: If mobileCountryCode and mobileNetworkCode are defined for the bsc object, they match those of all dependent bts objects. The lapdLinkOMLRef attributes of all dependent transcoder objects refer to lapdLink objects using the same lapdTerminalNumber in the BSC.

[M]:

The following check is only performed when the bsc object is unlocked: The dependent software object is created and its sWVersionRunning attribute defines a software version downloaded to the BSC disk.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

216

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

administrativeState Description : Value range : ISO state [locked / unlocked] A bscMdInterface object is created in unlocked state. When the object is locked, the BSC involved in the BSS/OMCR link described by this object cannot communicate with the OMCR. bscMdInterface DP [M]: The concerned bsc object is unlocked.

Object : Type : Checks :

administrativeState Description : ISO state A bts object is created in locked state. When the object is unlocked, the described cell will be working if the carrier TDMA frame (or BCCH frame) is successfully configured in the BTS and at least <minNbOfTDMA> TDMA frames (including the carrier frame) are operating. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [locked / unlocked / shuttingDown (soft release)] bts DP [M]: [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. It is not possible to change from shuttingDown to unlocked or from locked to shuttingDown. It is not possible to change to shuttingDown if the application database of the related BSC is not built.

[M]:

The following checks are only performed when the bts object is unlocked: The associated handOverControl and powerControl objects are created for the bts object. The mobileCountryCode and mobileNetworkCode attributes match those of the parent bsc object when they are defined for that object.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

217

The frequencies in the cellAllocation list comply with the standardIndicator attribute value. The minNbOfTDMA attribute value is less than or equal to the number of transceiver objects created for the bts object. Cavity cell: The number of dependent transceiver objects equals the number of frequencies in the cellAllocation list. Eight channel objects are created for each dependent transceiver object if the cell works in normal mode, four channel objects are created for each dependent transceiver object if the cell works in extended mode. The following apply:
Only one of them has a channelType equal to

mainBCCH, mainBCCHCombined, bcchSdcch4CBCH.

or

If the smsCB attribute of the bts object is used, one of

them has a channelType equal to sdcc8CBCH or bcchSdcch4CBCH. Concentric cell:


Two transceiverZone objects are created for the bts

object.
Each

dependent transceiver object refers to a transceiverZone object (transceiver zone Ref is defined). common channels (channelType = cCH) depend on transceiver objects allotted to the outer zone.

All channel objects describing the cell BCCH or

If frequency hopping is allowed in a zone (zone

frequency hopping), it is allowed in the cell (btsIshopping).


The frequencies used by the transceiver objects in a zone

are separate from the frequencies used by the transceiver objects in the other zone.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

218

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

Releasing a bts object by shutting down sustains the calls supported by the described cell. The system actions are as follows: Radio resources remain allocated until the calls end. Once a TDMA frame is released, a CLEAR CONFIG REQUEST message is sent to the partnered TRX/DRX. When all calls are terminated, the cell is released (administrativeState = locked and operationalState = disabled) and the concerned TRX/DRXs and TDMA frames are unreachable (availabilityStatus = {dependency}. Notes : It is recommended to bar direct access to the cell before initiating a soft release (cellBarred = barred), to prevent off-call mobiles from listening to the cell during the soft release phase, so they can immediately reselect another cell for receiving or sending calls. It is recommended also to forbid incoming handovers in the cell (incomingHandOver = disabled), to remove the cell from the list of eligible cells and, thus, avoid its selection if the BTS receives such a request. In order to speed up the soft release process, the Force HandOvers command can be used first to redirect the traffic currently handled by the serving cell towards its neighbor cells. If a hard lock request is sent during the soft release phase, all the calls supported by the cell are immediately released by the BSC. administrativeState Description : Value range : Object : Type : ISO state [locked / unlocked] A btsSiteManager object is created in locked state. btsSiteManager DP

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

219

Checks :

[M]:

The parent bsc object is unlocked.

The following checks are only performed when the btsSiteManager object is unlocked: The scheduled time slot (pcmTimeSlotNumber) is masked in the btsSiteManager object radioSiteMask. The radioSiteMask of all btsSiteManager objects sharing a same PCM link in the BSS are dissociated and their scheduled time slots are different and masked in their radioSiteMask. The bscSitePcmList list includes at least two items if the btsSiteManager object redundantPcmPresence attribute is true. All pcmCircuit objects referenced in the list (pcmCircuitBsc components) are created for the parent bsc object and assigned to the Abis interface. One of them identifies a PCM link with a pcmCircuitBtsSiteManager reference in the range [0 to 3] for clock synchronization. The maxNbOfCells attribute value is greater than or equal to the number of bts objects created for the btsSiteManager object. The configRef attribute defines a DLU file downloaded to the BSC disk The dependent software object is created and its sWVersionRunning attribute defines a software version downloaded to the BSC disk. administrativeState Description : Value range : ISO state. Locking the object blocks the collection of data and the generation of the associated messages. [locked / unlocked] A callPathTrace object is created in locked state. Unlock the objet to start collecting data in the related BSC. In that case, data collecting is stopped in the related BSC. However, current messages are stored by the BSC and notified to the OMCR agent. callPathTrace DP

Object : Type :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

220

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

Notes :

If trace data collecting is stopped by locking the object, the BSC continues to send the current trace messages to the OMCR agent, but no notifications are issued. If trace data collecting is stopped by locking the object or on reaching the end-of-session criterion, it is automatically restarted whenever the callPathTrace object is unlocked. For instance, if the end-of-session criterion defines a period of time that elapsed, data collecting will restart for the entire period. V13

administrativeState Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : ISO state [locked / unlocked] cc BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DP

administrativeState Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : ISO state [locked / unlocked] cem BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DP

V13

administrativeState Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : ISO state [locked / unlocked] cn BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DP

V13

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

221

administrativeState Description : ISO state. Locking the object blocks the transmission of the associated messages to the OMCR manager. The administrativeState of an efd object is set by the user at object creation time and can be changed with the Modify command. [locked / unlocked] efd DP V13

Value range : Object : Type :

administrativeState Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : ISO state [locked / unlocked] g3BscEqp BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DP

administrativeState Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : ISO state [locked / unlocked] g3TranscoderEqpt BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DP

V13

administrativeState Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : ISO state [locked / unlocked] iem BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DP

V13

administrativeState Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : ISO state [locked / unlocked] in BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DP

V13

BSS Parameter Dictionary

222

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

administrativeState Description : Activation state of a repeated job A job object is created in unlocked state. When a job is set inactive, it is not run. [locked (inactive) / unlocked (active)] job DP [M]: The job is not running.

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

administrativeState Description : Value range : ISO state. It is set by the OMCR agent. [locked (= restored log) / unlocked (= current log)] An unlocked log object describes a current log on the OMCR agent disks. A locked log object describes a log restored on the disks. log Display DP The attributes of the log objects are not managed by users. V13

Object : Type : Note :

administrativeState Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : ISO state [locked / unlocked] lsaRc BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DP

administrativeState Description : ISO state. Locking the object blocks the generation of processed alarms when out-of-range conditions are met. The administrativeState of an mdWarning object is set by the user at object creation time and can be changed with the Modify command. A change of state is effective when the OMCR is restarted. Whatever the state of the object, the related notifications are always forwarded to the OMCR manager. [locked / unlocked] mdWarning DP

Value range : Object : Type :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

223

administrativeState Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : ISO state [locked / unlocked] mms BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DP

V13

administrativeState Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : ISO state [locked / unlocked] omu BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DP

V13

administrativeState Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : administrativeState Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Checks : ISO state [locked / unlocked] A pcu object is created in locked state. pcu GPRS (SV407 V12) DP [M]: the parent bsc object is unlocked. ISO state [locked / unlocked] A pcmCircuit object is created in locked state. pcmCircuit DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. V12

BSS Parameter Dictionary

224

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

administrativeState Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : administrativeState Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : ISO state [locked / unlocked] sw8kRm BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DP V13 ISO state [locked / unlocked] A signallingLink object is created in locked state. signallingLink DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. V13

administrativeState Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : ISO state [locked / unlocked] tmu BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DP

administrativeState Description : Value range : ISO state. Locking the object blocks the collection of data and the generation of the associated messages. [locked / unlocked] A traceControl object is created in locked state. Unlock the object to start collecting trace data in the related BSC. traceControl DP

Object : Type :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

225

Notes :

If trace data collecting is stopped by locking the object, the BSC continues to send the current trace messages to the OMCR agent, but no notifications are issued. If traced calls are not terminated when the object is locked, all trace information related to those calls will be lost, unless partial record generation was requested. In that case, only data that are not yet recorded will be lost. Trace data collecting is automatically restarted in the BSC whenever the traceControl object is unlocked.

administrativeState Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : ISO state [locked / unlocked / shuttingDown (soft release)] A transceiverEquipment object is created in locked state. transceiverEquipment DP [M]: [M]: [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. It is not possible to change from shuttingDown to unlocked or from locked to shuttingDown. It is not possible to change to shuttingDown if the application database of the related BSC is not built.

The following checks are only performed when the transceiverEquipment object is unlocked: The lapdLinkOMLRef and lapdLinkRSLRef attributes of the transceiverEquipment object refer to lapdLink objects using the same lapdTerminalNumber in the parent BSC. The related software object is created and its sWVersionRunning attribute defines a software version downloaded to the BSC disk. Releasing a transceiverEquipment object by shutting down sustains the calls supported by the described TRX/DRX and the partnered TDMA frame. The system actions which may be carried out are the following: To carry out a soft release. This action does not automatically cause a handover. By carrying out this action, the operator must wait for the end of the coms before the TRX/DRX changes to blocked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

226

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

To carry out a forced handover. A forced handover on the cell object will cause the DRX/TRX to change to blocked more quickly. If the TDMA frame affected by this operation has priority over other frames in the BSS, the BSC reconfigures that frame on a different TRX/DRX and immediately transfers the current calls handled by the TRX/DRX being released. When all calls are transferred or terminated, the TRX/DRX is released (administrativeState = locked and operationalState = disabled), and the partnered TDMA frame is unreachable if it has not been reconfigured (availabilityStatus = {dependency}. Note : If a hard lock request is sent during the soft release phase, all the calls handled by the TRX/DRX are immediately released by the BSC.

administrativeState Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : ISO state [locked / unlocked] A transcoder object is created in locked state. transcoder DP [M]: the parent bsc object is unlocked. The following checks are only performed when the transcoder object is unlocked: All transcoder objects created for the same parent bsc object refer to lapdLink objects that use the same lapdTerminalNumber in the BSC. <maxTranscdBPerTranscd> dependent transcoderBoard objects are created for the transcoder object.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

227

administrativeState Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : ISO state [locked / unlocked] A transcoderBoard object is created in locked state. transcoderBoard DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. The following check is only performed when the transcoderBoard object is unlocked: The related software object is created and its sWVersionRunning attribute defines a software version downloaded to the BSC disk. administrativeState Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : ISO state [locked / unlocked] trm BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DP V13

administrativeState Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : ISO state [locked / unlocked / shuttingDown (soft release)] An xtp object is created in locked state. xtp DP [M]: [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. It is not possible to change from shuttingDown to unlocked or from locked to shuttingDown. It is not possible to change to shuttingDown if the application database of the related BSC is not built.

[M]:

The BSC will refuse to unlock a terrestrial traffic circuit that could break the OMC channel connection down.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

228

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

Releasing an xtp object by shutting down sustains the call supported by the described terrestrial traffic circuit. The system actions are as follows: Any further attempt of the MSC to allocate the terrestrial circuit is refused. When the call is completed, the terrestrial circuit is released (administrativeState = locked and operationalState = disabled). Notes : All terrestrial circuits supported by a given PCM link can be softly released at the same time. If the PCM link supports a signaling link, it remains operating. If a hard lock request is sent during the soft release phase, the call supported by the terrestrial circuit is immediately released by the BSC.

aLAIntState Description : Value range : Internal state of the BSC ALA board [working / fault] working . The board is correctly configured. Object : Type : alarm criteria Description : Value range : Active alarm configuration [day configuration / night configuration configuration / reference configuration] / specific fault . . . . The board configuration was unsuccessful. bsc DD

The active configuration is the alarm criteria configuration currently used by the OMCR Fault Management function for fault processing. The names given to the alarm operating configurations (day / night / specific) only serve to identify them. Any configuration may be activated at any time by users, but only one can be active at a time. omc DP

Object : Type :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

229

Notes :

When the OMCR is started up or the active server is switched over, the OMCR activates the configuration the name of which corresponds to the time of the day that start-up or switchover occurs. The following apply:
The daytime configuration is activated when the event

occurs between 9:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m. (static configuration data).
The nighttime configuration is activated when the event

occurs between 6:00 p.m. and 9:00 a.m. (static configuration data). The active configuration can be forced by users at any other time. If a problem occurs while loading the selected configuration, the OMCR uses the reference configuration and sends a warning message to the user. alarm criteria Description : Value range : Identifier of an alarm criterion on the OMCR [0 to 999] (manufacturer configuration), [1000 to 65535] (operator configurations) Users can manage operator configuration alarm criteria. The manufacturer reference configuration alarm criteria can only be displayed. alarm criteria Id [C]: [C]: The alarm criteria identifier is in the range [1000 to 65535]. The alarm criteria does not exist in the operator configurations.

Object : Type : Checks :

[M/D]: The alarm criteria exists in the operator configurations. alarm number Description : To select alarms with a given number Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Value range : Object : Type : [0 to 2147483646] Alarm logs Filter DP

BSS Parameter Dictionary

230

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

alarm severity Description : Value range : Object : Type : alarm state Description : Value range : Object : Type : alarmDuration Description : Value range : Object : Condition : Type : Alarm hold duration when a counter is involved [0 to 345600] second alarm criteria To define if a counter is associated with the criterion. DP To select alarms according to the acknowledgement state Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. [acknowledged / unacknowledged] Alarm logs Filter DP To select alarms according to the severity Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. [critical / major / minor] Alarm logs Filter DP

alarmListConverter Description : Value range : Object : Type : Note : alarmListFan Description : Value range : Type : Note : State of the TCU fans [working / failed] DD This parameter is only available for BSC 2G State of the TCU converters [working / failed] transcoder DD This parameter is only available for BSC 2G

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

231

alarmListFanBoard Description : Value range : Object : Type : Note : State of the TCU fan boards [working / failed] transcoder DD This parameter is only available for BSC 2G

alarmListVCOTension Description : Value range : Object : Type : Note : State of the TCU VCO voltage [working / failed] transcoder DP This parameter is only available for BSC 2G

BSS Parameter Dictionary

232

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

alarmPriority Description : Value range : Alarm processing priority [CLEARED / critical / indeterminate / major / minor / warning] There are six defined priority levels which provide an indication of how it is perceived that the capability of the managed object has been affected. The following definitions are used: CLEARED: . . . . . . The cleared severity level indicates the clearing of one or more previously reported alarms. This alarm clears all alarms for this managed object that have the same type, probable cause, and specific problems. critical: . . . . . . . . . The critical severity level indicates that a service affecting condition has occurred and an immediate corrective action is required. indeterminate: . . . . The indeterminate severity level indicates that the severity level of the service affecting condition cannot be determined. major: . . . . . . . . . . The major severity level indicates that a service affecting condition has developed and a deferred corrective action is required. minor: . . . . . . . . . . The minor severity level indicates the existence of a nonservice affecting fault condition and that a corrective action should be taken in order to prevent a more serious fault.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

233

Object : Type : AlgoId Description :

warning: . . . . . . . . . The warning severity level indicates the detection of a potential or impending service affecting fault, before any significant effects have been felt. An action should be taken to further diagnose and correct the problem in order to prevent it from becoming a more serious service affecting fault. mdWarning DP V8 Definition of the speech algorithms used in a TCB This parameter is a component of the algorithm Used attribute. Refer to this entry in the Dictionary. [full rate / enhanced full rate] DP transcoderBoard full rate V8

Value range : Type : Object : Default value :

algorithm Used Class 2 Description : Value range :

Speech processing algorithm parameters used in the SPU processors of a TCB AlgoId = [full rate / full rate & enhanced full rate], powerDownLink = [15 to +15] dB, powerUpLink = [15 to +15] dB AlgoId . . . . . . . . . . speech algorithms used powerDownLink . . . power gain on the downlink powerUpLink . . . . . power gain on the uplink transcoderBoard DP [C/M]: The AlgoId component contains full rate. [C/M]: The AlgoId component also contains enhanced full rate if the parent transcoder object version attribute value is TCB_2. [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the transcoderBoard object is locked.

Object : Type : Checks :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

234

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

allocationState Description : Value range : TDMA frame allocation state [available / not available / not significant] available . . . . . . . . The SACCH FILLING messages containing the SYS INFO 5 and 6 have been acknowledged by the BTS. not available . . . . . The SACCH FILLING messages containing the SYS INFO 5 and 6 have not been acknowledged by the BTS. not significant . . . . The SACCH FILLING messages containing the SYS INFO 5 and 6 have not been sent to the BTS by the BSC. transceiver DD V12

Object : Type :

allocBitmap Class 3 Description :

Maximum size of the allocation bitmap provided to the MS and error rate in the cell used by the PCU to build the allocation bitmap [maxSize / blockErrorRate] maxSize [0 to 127] blocks [0 to 100] % blockErrorRate transceiver 24 blocks, 8% GPRS (SV407 V12) DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

Value range :

Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

235

allocPriorityTable Class 3 A5 Description : Table of eighteen elements that define the internal priorities for processing TCH queued allocation requests for each external priority defined (among them, fourteen are GSM priorities) TCH is always allocated using the internal priority. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [0 to 7]. 0 defines the highest priority. bts 000000000000000000 DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

allocPriorityThreshold Class 3 A6 Description : Number of free TCHs needed for processing a TCH allocation request with an internal priority higher than 1 These channels are reserved to allocation requests with a maximum internal priority (priority 0). The TCH allocation is performed according to this algorithm:

Number of free TCH = 0 TCH request of priority 0 TCH request of priority > 0 queueing if defined or reject queueing if defined or reject

1 Number of free TCH allocPriorityThreshold TCH allocated

Number of free TCH > allocPriorityThreshold TCH allocated

queueing if defined or reject

TCH allocated

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

[0 to 2147483646] bts 0 DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

236

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

allocPriorityTimers Class 3 A7 Description : Table of eight timers that defines for each internal processing priority the maximum waiting time of TCH allocations requests [0 to 2147483646] seconds bts 00000000 DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

allocWaitThreshold Class 3 A8 Description : Table of eight elements that defines for each internal processing priority, the maximum number of TCH allocation requests that can be queued A TCH request of priority Pi, P0<PiP7, is queued if the total number of requests of priority Pj, with ji, already in the queue does not exceed the waiting threshold of the queue i (element i of the allocWaitThreshold table). Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [0 to 2147483646] bts 00000000 DP [M]: the parent bsc object is unlocked.

allOtherCasesPriority Class 3 A9 Description : Index in the allocPriorityTable that defines the processing priority of TCH allocation requests with cause other cases This priority is used in primo-allocations or when an SDDCH cannot be allocated for overload reasons. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [0 to 17] bts 17 DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

237

answerPagingPriority Class 3 A10 Description : Index in the allocPriorityTable that defines the processing priority of TCH allocation requests with cause reply to paging This priority is used in signaling mode on TCH only. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : architecture Description : Architecture of the OMCR agent in terms of servers. It is provided by the OMCR agent. The standard configuration is one active with one passive and the basic configuration is one active without passive. Value range : [dual servers but passive not running dual servers running single server running] md Display DP [M]: This attribute is not managed by users. [0 to 17] bts 17 DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

Object : Type : Checks :

assignRequestPriority Class 3 A11 Description : Index in the allocPriorityTable that defines the processing priority of TCH allocation requests with cause immediate assignment This priority is used when radio resource allocation queueing is not requested by the MSC or not authorized in the BSS (refer to the bscQueueingOption entry in the Dictionary). Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [0 to 17] bts 17 DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

238

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

associatedInterface Description : Value range : Interface on which a LAPD link is used [Abis / Ater / Agprs] A LAPD link used on the Abis interface carries BTS signaling. A LAPD link used on the Ater interface carries TCU signaling. A LAPD link used on the Agprs interface carries PCU signaling. lapdLink GPRS (SV407 V12) DP [C]: [C]: [C]: Restrictions : Note : associatedLog Description : Identifier of the log object that describes the associated records on the OMCR agent disks For an mdScanner object, this attribute is displayed provided mdLog = logged. Value range : Object : Type : Restrictions : [0 to 2147483646] callPathTrace, mdScanner, traceControl Display DI [C/M]: This attribute is not managed by users. V13 [M] : The value is whether Abis or Agprs if the lapdConcentration attribute value is disabled. The value is whether Abis or Ater if the lapdConcentration attribute value is enabled. The Agprs value is only allowed for PCU lapdLink interface from V12 BSCs. This attribute cannot be modified.

Object : Feature : Type : Checks :

This parameter is only available for BSC 2G

associatedTMUPosition Description : Value range : Object : Type :

Indicates the TMU position. Dynamically managed by the Bsc. [{0 to 1} / {1 to 15}] btsSiteManager DP

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

239

atmRmId Description :

V13 Identifier of the atmRm object class. This identifier is allocated by the MDR at object creation, depending on the shelf and slot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attribute cannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC e3. [0 to 2147483646] atmRm DP V9

Value range : Object : Type :

Attenuation Class 2 A12 Description :

Attenuation due to coupling system losses. This value depends on the BTS configuration and should not be modified by the operator. [0 to 14] dB btsSiteManager Depends on the equipment DP [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsSiteManager is locked

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Note :

If the Attenuation parameter is not set (value = NULL), then the DLU attenuation value is used. If the Attenuation parameter is set [0 to 14] then the DLU attenuation is replaced by the OMC attenuation parameter.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

240

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

auditBdaStatus Description : Value range : Synthetic result of a BDA audit [no difference / some differences (see list below) / many differences (see partial list below)] The information is stored in sessions logs. no difference . . . . . . Object instances in BDA and BDE are identical. some differences . . . Less than ten object instances are different in BDA and BDE (they are listed in the session logs). many differences . . More than ten object instances are different in BDA and BDE (the first ten are listed in the session logs). bsc DI

Object : Type : auditState Description :

Whether an audit is in-progress in the BSC. Access to a BSC are blocked whenever an audit of its application database is in-progress (Audit BDA command). This attribute is unknown to the BSC and cannot be directly modified by users. When an audit is in-progress in a BSC, all configuration commands involving the BSS are forbidden.

Value range : Object : Type : authorised user Description :

[inProgress / notInProgress] bsc DI

List of the users authorized to copy, display and run the command file. Enter their names as defined in their profiles and use the & character to separate them. commandFile DP

Object : Type :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

241

availabilityStatus Description : ISO state Refer to the operationalState entries in the Dictionary for a description of possible state parameter combinations for these objects: administrativeState, availabilityStatus, operationalState. Value range : Object : [{} / {dependency} / {failed}] bsc, bscMdInterface, btsSiteManager, lapdLink, pcmCircuit, signallingLink, transceiver, transceiverEquipment, transcoder, transcoderBoard DD

Type : availabilityStatus Description :

ISO state The enabled state for a bts object is a transitory state that follows a soft release request. Refer to the administrativeState entry related to the bts object in the Dictionary.

Value range : Object : Type : availabilityStatus Description :

[{} / {dependency} / {failed}] bts DD

ISO state The logFull state applies to a log object that describes an observation or trace log, and indicates that the saving message directory on the OMCR agent disks is full. Refer to the capacityAlarmThreshold entry in the Dictionary.

Value range : Object : Type :

[{} / {logFull}] log DP

BSS Parameter Dictionary

242

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

availabilityStatus Description : Value range : Object : Type : availabilityStatus Description : ISO state Refer to the operationalState entry in the Dictionary for a description of possible state parameter combinations: administrativeState, availabilityStatus, operationalState. [{} / {dependency} / {failed}] pcu GPRS (SV407 V12) DD V12 ISO state Refer to the operationalState entry in the Dictionary for a description of possible state parameter combinations: availabilityStatus and operationalState. [{} / {dependency}] pcusn GPRS (SV407 V12) DD ISO state [{} (the associated observation is running) / {offDuty} (the associated observation has ended)] mdScanner DD V12

Value range : Object : Feature : Type : availabilityStatus Description :

Value range : Object : Feature : Type : availabilityStatus Description :

ISO state Refer to the operationalState entry in the Dictionary for a description of possible state parameter combinations: administrativeState, availabilityStatus, operationalState, and usageState. A state change notification is issued after the soft release. [{} / {dependency} / {failed}] xtp DD

Value range : Object : Type :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

243

averagingPeriod Class 2 A13 Description : Number of SACCH multiframes over which the interference levels are averaged. This averaging will be performed immediately before the transmission of the RESOURCE INDICATION message. This attribute, together with the thresholdInterference attribute, allows users to manage interferences in radio cells. Refer to this entry in the Dictionary. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [0 to 255] SACCH frame (1 unit = 480 ms on TCH, 470 ms on SDCCH) handOverControl 20 DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the associated bts object is locked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

244

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

B
backup manager addresses Description : Object : Type : Restrictions : backupServer Description : Name of the backup OMCR agent server if any. It is provided by the OMCR agent. In a mono-server configuration with redundancy, this attribute is not filled in. md Display DP Backup addresses of the OMCR manager that receives the messages. They are provided by the manager. efd Display DI [C/M]: This attribute is not managed by users.

Object : Type :

baseColourCode Class 3 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Base station Color Code assigned to a neighbor cell. The (BCC, NCC) pair forms the cell BSIC. [0 to 7] adjacentCellHandOver DP [M]: Each defined (baseColourCode, bCCHFrequency, networkColourCode) combination is unique in the set including a serving cell and its neighbor cells. The parent bsc object is unlocked.

[M]:

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

245

baseColourCode Class 2 B2 Description : Base station Color Code assigned to a serving cell. It is broadcast on the cell SCH and is used to distinguish cells that share the same BCCH frequency. The (BCC, NCC) pair forms the cell BSIC. The information is broadcast on the cell SCH. Several BCCs may be assigned to a same BTS. Hence, different codes can be allotted to cells that may have overlapping areas (adjacent cells). The Base Station Identity Code (BSIC) is a 6-bit code: bits 654 = NCC (PLMN color code), bits 321 = BCC (Base station color code). At cell level, the NCC bits can be used to increase BCC color possibilities when the NCC is not needed. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 7] bts DP [M]: Each defined (baseColourCode, bCCHFrequency, networkColourCode) combination is unique in the set including a serving cell and its neighbor cells. The parent bsc object is unlocked and the bts object is locked.

[M]:

bCCHFrequency Class 3 Description : Radio frequency allocated to a neighbor cell BCCH in the network frequency band The information is broadcast on the serving cell SACCH. Value range : [1 to 124] (GSM 900 network / Extended GSM network), [0 to 1023] (GSMR), [512 to 885] (GSM 1800 network), [512 to 810] (GSM 1900 network) adjacentCellHandOver DP

Object : Type :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

246

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

Checks :

[M]:

Each defined (baseColourCode, bCCHFrequency, networkColourCode) combination is unique in the set including a serving cell and its neighbor cells. The bCCHFrequency value must be set according to the standardIndicator attribute. The parent bsc object is unlocked.

[M]: [M]: bCCHFrequency Class 3 Description :

Radio frequency used for selection and reselection management The information is broadcast on the serving cell BCCH.

Value range :

Object : Type : Checks :

[1 to 124] (GSM 900 network / Extended GSM network), [0 to 1023] (GSMR), [512 to 885] (GSM 1800 network), [512 to 810] (GSM 1900 network) adjacentCellReselection DP [M]: [M]: The bCCHFrequency value must be set according to the standardIndicator attribute. The parent bsc object is unlocked.

Note :

An adjacentCellReselection object can use the same BCCH as the serving cell to which it is associated. This allows a mobile to immediately recover the cell on which it was camping after being switched off, then switched back on, and is especially useful in the selection process.

bCCHFrequency Class 2 Description : Radio frequency allocated to a cell BCCH (Broadcast Control CHannel) in the network frequency band The information is broadcast on the cell SACCH. The BCCH frequency is automatically assigned to the radio time slot carrying the cell BCCH when the cell is brought into service (absoluteRFChannelNo attribute of the channel object describing the carrier TDMA frame TS0). It is broadcast to the radio time slot whenever modified.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

247

The BCCH is used by the BTS for broadcasting cell related system information to MS, such as frequency band and list of frequency channels used, authorized services and access conditions, list of neighbor cells, and radio parameters (maximum transmission strength, minimum reception strength, etc). Value range : [1 to 124] (GSM 900 network / Extended GSM network), [0 to 1023] (GSMR), [512 to 885] (GSM 1800 network), [512 to 810] (GSM 1900 network) bts DP [M]: [M]: The BCCH frequency is included in the cellAllocation list. Each defined (baseColourCode, bCCHFrequency, networkColourCode) combination is unique in the set including a serving cell and its neighbor cells. For a dualband cell, the bCCHFrequency attribute must be in the primary band of frequencies. The parent bsc object is unlocked and the bts object is locked. V11

Object : Type : Checks :

[M]: [M]:

bda activation type Description :

Whether the Build BDA should be automatic or commanded See to NTP < 128 > .

Value range : Object : Type : Remark :

[automatic / commanded] bsc Build BDA DP For a V11+ BSC the value can be as follows: automatic: basic BDA change without prototype BDA change commanded: basic BDA change without prototype BDA change or BSC upgrade with prototype BDA change (BSC Edition Upgrade or BSC Version Upgrade) For a V10 BSC the value must be automatic.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

248

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

bdaNewBscState Description : Value range : Current bsc state related to the new BDA

V11

Object : Type : Remark :

[ready for online reset / running online reset / waiting for online build / waiting for software change / waiting for Bda change / running software change/ running Bda change / waiting for end of probative phase / { }] bsc DI This attribute is modified by the OMCR agent when processing end of probative phase, Activate New BDA, On line reset BDA, or Online reset cancel actions or receiving an unsolicited message sent by the BSC. This attribute is NULL { } as long as the BSC has not been connected to the OMCR agent.

Note :

For a V10 BSC, this attribute is always NULL { }. The different states are obtained according to the following: ready for online reset: This state is reached after the following occurrences:
BSC complete restart end of probative phase or BDA new activation or

reset online cancel succeeded


partial or complete spontaneous BSC restart BSC operating command aborted

running online reset: BSC reset online is being executed waiting for online build: BSC reset online has succeeded waiting for software change: BDA version reset online has succeeded waiting for Bda change: BDA edition reset on line has succeeded running software change: BSC Type 5 EFT activation is being executed running Bda change: BSC BDA new activation is being executed waiting for end of probative phase: BSC Type 5 EFT activation has succeeded

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

249

bdaSelected Description : Value range : Object : Type : Remark : Current BSC Application Database (BDA) [running / new] bsc DI

V11

This attribute is modified by the MDR when processing On line reset BDA actions or receiving a BSC spontaneous event. This attribute is set running at the bsc object instance creation For a V10 BSC, this attribute is never modified and its value is running.

Note :

The different states are obtained according to the following: new: BSC upgrades with prototype BDA change running: BSC upgrades without prototype BDA change

bdaState Description : Whether the BSC application database (BDA) is built. No transactions with a BSC can be implemented prior to building its application database. When a bsc object is created or following a user Off line reset BDA command, the value of this attribute is not built. This attribute is unknown to the BSC and cannot be directly modified by users. It is updated by the system after a user Build BDA command. Value range : Object : Type : [built / not built / inconsistency] bsc DI

BSS Parameter Dictionary

250

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

bdaVersionBuild Description : Version number of the BSC application database for rebuilding purposes When the BSC is initialized or following a user Off line reset BDA command, the value of this attribute is 0 (BDA not built). The BSC then sends a build database request message, indicating that its database is defective and needs rebuilding. By issuing a Build BDA command, the user informs the OMCR that the BSC database must be regenerated. [1 to 254] bsc Build BDA DP [A]: If the command follows a BSC architecture change, the new architecture complies with the information in the last build database request message received from the BSC.

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

bdaVersionNumber Description : Current version number of the BSC application database. 0 means that the BDA is not built. Once the user has built or rebuilt the BDA, this attribute is assigned the bdaVersionBuild value sent with the user build command. If the BDA is being regenerated following an On line reset BDA command, this attribute gives the user the version number of the BDA currently used by the BSC. [0 to 254] bsc DD

Value range : Object : Type : Beginning date Description :

To select call monitoring data recorded on that date and after Do not fill in if information produced from the start should be displayed. [mm/dd/yyyy hh:mm:ss] Call monitoring Display SDO DP [A]: Beginning date is on or before End date.

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

251

beginSearchTime Description : Absolute time to start searching for the observation reports to cumulate Observation data accumulating starts with the information contained in the last observation message collected in the requested period of time. Refer to the partnered endSearchTime entry in the Dictionary. Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [<date>,<time>] Display custom report DP [A]: [A]: beginSearchTime is after endSearchTime. The defined period is less than or equal to six hours.

beginSearchTime Description : Absolute time to start searching for the observation report to edit default is the current date and time) The report displays the information contained in the last observation message generated in the requested period of time. Refer to the partnered endSearchTime entry in the Dictionary. Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [<date>,<time>] Display raw report DP [A]: beginSearchTime is after endSearchTime.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

252

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

beginSearchTime Description : Absolute time to start searching for the available temporary observations to list (default is the current date and time) The first listed report is the last observation report generated in the requested period of time. Refer to the partnered endSearchTime entry in the Dictionary. Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : beginSearchTime Description : Absolute time to start searching for the observation messages to list (default is the current date and time) The first listed message is the last observation message generated in the requested period of time. Refer to the partnered endSearchTime entry in the Dictionary. Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [<date>,<time>] List observation messages DP [A]: beginSearchTime is after endSearchTime. [<date>,<time>] List available temporary observations DP [A]: beginSearchTime is after endSearchTime.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

253

biZonePowerOffset Class 3 B3 Description :

V12

Power offset between the inner TRXs and the outer TRXs of the adjacentCellHandOver object of a dualband, dualcoupling, or concentric cell. Offset added in calculation formula to draw up the list of eligible cells for handover towards a dualband, dualcoupling, or concentric cell inner zone to take into account the difference of propagation models between the two bands of the cells and the difference of transmission power between TRXs of the two zones due to either BTS configuration or coupling.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Feature : Checks : Note :

[63 to 63] dB adjacentCellHandOver 63 DP Dualband cell management (TF875 V12) [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. This parameter is only available for S8000 or ecell BTS DRX transceiver architecture. V12

biZonePowerOffset Class 3 B4 Description :

Power offset between inner and outer TRXs of the handOverControl object of a dualband, dualcoupling, or concentric cell. [63 to 63] dB handOverControl 3 DP Dualband cell management (TF875 V12) [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. This parameter is only available for S8000 or ecell BTS DRX transceiver architecture.
zoneTxPwrMaxReduction (inner zone)

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Feature : Checks : Note :

bsc2GEqptId

V13

BSS Parameter Dictionary

254

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

Description :

Identifier of the bsc2GEqpt object class. This identifier is allocated by the MDR at object creation. The only value allocated by the MDR is 0. This attribute cannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC 2G. [1 to 255] bsc2GEqpt DP V13 Identifier of the bsc3GEqpt object class. This identifier is allocated by the MDR at object creation. The only value allocated by the MDR is 0. This attribute cannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC e3. [0 to 0] bsc3GEqpt DP

Value range : Object : Type : bsc3GEqptId Description :

Value range : Object : Type : bsc Description :

Identifier of a bsc object on the OMCR. The bsc reference is part of all BSS configuration object identifiers. In all MMI commands, a bsc object can be referenced by name (bscName). When a bsc object is created and the referenced bscMdInterface object is unlocked, the system attempts to establish the BSS/OMCR link connection. [1 to 255] bsc Id [C]: The number of BSCs managed by an OMCR is limited to maxBscPerNetwork (static configuration data). [C]: The referenced bscMdInterface object (bscMdInterfaceRef) is created. [D]: The BSC application database has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command (bdaState = not built). [D]: No mdScanner, traceControl, or callPathTrace object refers to the bsc object (no observation or trace function is active in the BSC).

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

255

bsc Description : Identifier or name of a bsc object on the OMCR It defines the parent bsc object. Value range : Object : [1 to 255] adjacentCellHandover, adjacentCellReselection, bts, btsSiteManager, channel, frequencyHoppingSystem, handOverControl, lapdLink, multiple site, pcmCircuit, powerControl, signallingLink, signallingLinkSet, signallingPoint, software, transceiver, transceiverEquipment, transceiverZone, transcoder, transcoderBoard, xtp Id [C]: The bsc object is created.

Type : Checks :

bsc equipment name Description : To select messages issued by a given type of BSC or TCU processor Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Value range : [ddti / ala / eci / sicx / sicd / swm / cpue / O.M.N. communication / cabling and PCM cross connect / css7 / cpu486Se / sup / LAPD channel / signalling link / sls / tdti / tuc / internal PCMTCU / tcb / swe / swc / sw16 / tscb / msw / sic lapd (8 channels) / 2nd generation of TCB board / bscb / CPUE pentium 120 / mmu / mmu ide / cpum133 / cpue133 / sup2 / sls2 / pcu element] Alarm and notification logs Filter GPRS (SV407 V12) DP css7 identifies the BSC CCS7 boards; signalling link identifies the SS7 signalling links defined in the BSS and controlled by the CCS7 boards.

Object : Feature : Type : Remark :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

256

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

BSC list Description : List of the BSCs simultaneously monitored for further data processing by the SDO machine. Fill in the list with BSC reference numbers or names, up to maxBscPerNetwork. Do the following to create the list: To add a BSC, fill in the BSC number field with the reference number of the BSC on the OMCR and click Add. To remove one or more BSCs, select the lines that display their reference numbers and click Remove. When the list is complete, click the option matching the desired command, as follows: Start: . . . . . . . . . . . starts collecting call monitoring data in the selected BSCs. Stop: . . . . . . . . . . . . stops collecting call monitoring data in the selected BSCs. Transfer: . . . . . . . . . transfers the BSC selected data files to the OMCR. Processing: . . . . . . . copies and processes the selected data files in the SDO machine. A set of resultant ASCII data files is produced, it is identified as the Level 1 set. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [1 to 255] Call monitoring Commands (SDO) DP [A]: [A]: Notes : The number of BSCs in the list is limited to maxBscPerNetwork (static configuration data). Each BSC occurs once in the list.

The user must make sure that the BSCs in the list are created on the OMCR since no checks are performed by the system.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

257

Processing: The call monitoring data files are meant to exist in the /MD/ftam/bsc directory on the OMCR agent disks. For each BSC in the list, all files saved in that directory whose name begins with SDO_CM_BSCnnn will be processed: nnn is the BSC reference number on the OMCR (if bsc = 5, then nnn is read 005). See to NTP < 07 >. The BSC list needs not be defined when selecting the Query command which displays the activity state of the Call monitoring function in all the BSCs connected to the OMCR. bsc model Description : Value range : Object : Type : BSC number Description : Identifier [1 to 255] or name of a BSC to add to the BSC list Fill in this field and click Add to add the BSC to the list. Refer to the BSC list entry in the Dictionary. Call monitoring Commands (SDO) DP To select messages issued by a given model of BSC [bsc 12000 / bsc 6000 / bsc 2000] Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Alarm and notification logs Filter DP

Object : Type :

bscAlarmMask Class 3 Description : Configuration of the eight external alarm loops managed by the BSC ALA board. The alarm loop number 32+n is monitored (not monitored) when the nth bit is set to 1 (0). 8 bit register numbered 0 to 7
bscAlarmMask = x x x x x x x x | alarm 39 | alarm 32

Value range :

Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

bsc 11111111 DP [M]:

The bsc object is unlocked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

258

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

bscArchitecture Class 0 Description : Architecture of the BSC This attribute, together with the bsc object bscType attribute and the related software object sWVersionRunning attribute, defines the dimensioning constraints. [bsc6000 / bsc12000 / bsc30000] bsc BSC6000 (for V8 and lower BSC release) DP [C/M]: The type of the BSC (bscType) complies with the new architecture. [M]: The BSC application database is reset (bdaState = not built).

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

bscChainId Description : BSC processing chain(s) to reset The consequences are as follows: activeChain: . . . . . . The active chain is reset and becomes passive, and the passive chain becomes active. Class 1 DPs are not reconfigured. passiveChain: . . . . . The passive chain is reset if it can be reached. bothChain: . . . . . . . Both chains are reset and the BSC is restarted. Class 1 DPs are reconfigured. Value range : Object : Type : bscCounterList Description : Value range : Object : Type : Default value : [activeChain / passiveChain / bothChain] bsc Kill chain Id V11 Identifier of the bscCounterList object defined with regards to the bsc object [0 to 2147483646] bscCounterList Id

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

259

bscDateTime Description : Current BSC reference date and time This attribute is set by a user Synchronize bsc clock command, which broadcasts the current OMCR agent date and time to the concerned BSC. It is also updated by the OMCR agent in the following conditions: A user Set command on the md object is run, which changes its externalTime attribute. The BSS/OMCR link is established. The BSS/OMCR link is reestablished after a breakdown. The statutory time is modified. The OMCR agent sends an alarm notification to the OMCR manager when the time difference with a BSC drifts too much. Value range : Object : Type : [<date>,<time>] bsc DD V12

bscGprsActivation Class 3 Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Default value : Checks : Flag used to activate the GPRS at BSC level [disabled / enabled] bsc GPRS (SV407 V12) DP disabled [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

260

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

bscHopReconfUse Class 1 B5 Description :

V8

Whether frequency hopping reconfiguration is authorized in BTSs that use cavity coupling When frequency reconfiguration is authorized, it allows to automatically reconfigure the hopping sequence whenever a frequency is lost or recovered in the BTS.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

[true / false] bsc True DP [M]: It can be true provided the btsHopReconfRestart of one of the related bts objects is also true. The bsc object is locked. V13 Indicates the first BSC IP address used for a bscMdInterface object instance. IP address corresponds to the subscriber number on the network used. At least one IP address must be specified if protocolUsed is IP; it may be specified otherwise. This attribute is modified by the Manager. Value changes are notified to the Manager. This attribute can be modified only if the bscMdInterface object instance is locked.

[M]: bscIPFirstAdr Description :

Value range : Object : Type :

[7 to 15] String bscMdInterface DP

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

261

bscIPSecondAdr Description :

V13 Indicates the second BSC IP address used for a bscMdInterface object instance. IP address corresponds to the subscriber number on the network used. At least one IP address must be specified if protocolUsed is IP; it may be specified otherwise. This attribute is modified by the Manager. Value changes are notified to the Manager. This attribute can be modified only if the bscMdInterface object instance is locked.

Value range : Object : Type : bscList Description :

[7 to 15] String bscMdInterface DP V13 This attribute indicates for which BSC(s) the units of software has been downloaded. This attribute is allocated by the MDR at object creation. This attribute cannot be modified by the Manager. This attribute is updated by the MDR when a sWDownload command is performed successfully. Value changes are notified to the Manager. [0 to 41] executableSoftware DP V13 Identifier of the bscLog object class. This identifier is allocated by the MDR at object creation. This attribute cannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC e3. [ bscVers13 +Inf ] bscLog DP

Value range : Object : Type : bscLogId Description :

Value range : Object : Type :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

262

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

bscMdInterface Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Identifier of a bscMdInterface object defined with regard to the md object [0 to 255] bscMdInterface Id [D]: No bsc object refers to the bscMdInterface object.

bscMdInterfaceRef Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Restrictions : Identifier of the bscMdInterface object that describes the BSS/OMCR link involving the BSC [0 to 255] bsc DP [C]: No bsc object refers to the bscMdInterface object. [M]: This attribute cannot be modified.

bscMdInterfaceVersionNumber Description : Release number of the BSC/OMCR interface. It is provided by the BSC when the BSS/OMCR link is physically established. If the release number does not match the software version running in the BSC (sWVersionRunning attribute of the related software object), the BSC issues a start-of-fault message. [11 to 99] bsc Display DI [C/M]: This attribute is not managed by users. V9

Value range : Object : Type : Restrictions :

bscMSAccessClassBarringFunction Class 3 B6 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

Enable or disable dynamic barring of access class at the bsc level [enabled / disabled] bsc disabled DP [M]: The bsc object is unlocked.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

263

bscName Description : Reference name of a bsc object on the OMCR. It begins with a letter and is case sensitive. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [30 characters max] bsc DP

V13

[C/M]: The name of a BSC is unique to the OMCR. V12

bscPcuPcmRefList Class 2 Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Checks : List of BSCPCU PCM link numbers [1 to 12] values in the range [0 to 47] pcu GPRS (SV407 V12) DP

[C/M]: All the referred pcmCircuit object instances of this attribute must exist. [C/M]: The referred pcmCircuit object instances must be of pcmAgprs type (pcmType attribute). [C/M]: The referred pcmCircuit object instances must not be already referred to another pcu object instance on the same BSC. [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the pcu object is locked.

Note :

Only one Agprs PCM is used to connect the BSC and one PCU.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

264

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

bscQueueingOption Class 1 B7 Description : Whether radio resource allocation requests are queued in the BSC when no resources are available If no resource is available when an allocation request is received and queueing is not allowed, the allocation request is refused immediately. [allowed (MSC driven) / forced (O&M driven) / not allowed] allowed . . . . . . . . . . Resource allocation request queueing depends on the type of operation and indicative items provided with the messages received from the MSC. forced . . . . . . . . . . . Resource allocation request queueing depends on the type of operation only. not allowed . . . . . . . Resource allocation request queueing is forbidden. signallingPoint forced DP [M]: The bsc object is locked. Allocation requests for immediate assignments and inter-bss, intra-bss, and inter-bts handovers are never queued. Only TCH resource requests (assigments request and intraCell handover) are queued depending on the priority of the demand and the number of request present in the queue. V12

Value range :

Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Note :

bscRefList Class 3 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Feature : bscReset Description : Value range : Object : Type : Requests a control node reset [0 to 1] bsc3GEqpt DP List of the bsc objects managed by a pcuSN object [1 to 12] values in the range [0 to 2147483646] pcusn DP GPRS (SV407 V12)

V13

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

265

bscSitePcmList Class 2 Description : List of the PCM links allotted to a site on the Abis interface, up to maxPcmCPerBtsSM. Each link is identified by a (pcmCircuitBsc, pcmCircuitBtsSiteManager) pair that defines it on BSC end and BTS end. The Abis interface connects a BTS to a BSC through PCM links that are identified by the boards to which they are connected on both ends of the interface, that is DDTI boards on BSC end and DTI boards on BTS end. The following rule is applied: A PCM link connected to DDTI board no.i in the BSC has a pcmCircuitBsc reference equal to 2i or 2i+1 with regard to the BSC (each board manages two links at a time). Refer to BSC Reference Manual. The same PCM link connected to DTI board no.j in the BTS has a pcmCircuitBtsSiteManager reference equal to j with regard to the BTS (each board manages one single link). Refer to BTS Reference Manuals. The number of pairs in the list sets the number of links allotted to the radio site. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 2147483646] (pcmCircuitBsc), [0 to 5] (pcmCircuitBtsSiteManager) btsSiteManager DP [C]: The number of PCM links allotted to a site is limited to maxPcmCPerBtsSM (static configuration data).

[C/M]: The list contains at least one pair, two if the btsSiteManager object redundantPcmPresence attribute is true. [C/M]: Each pair is unique in the list.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

266

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

[C/M]: Each pcmCircuitBsc reference matches a pcmCircuit object created for the parent bsc object and assigned to the Abis interface (pcmType = pcmAbis). [M]: If a pcmCircuitBsc reference is changed, the current link is not used by any dependent transceiverEquipment object. The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsSiteManager object is locked.

[M]:

bscTimeSlot Description : PCM link (pcmCircuitId) and time slot (timeSlotNumber) used by the radio time slot on the Abis interface. The PCM link is identified on BSC end [0 to 47]. The information is displayed provided the parent transceiver object is working. Refer to the operationalState entry for this object in the Dictionary. Value range : Object : Type : pcmCircuitId [0 to 47] timeSlotNumber [1 to 31 (E1 PCM) or 24 (T1 PCM)] channel DD

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

267

bscType Class 0 Description : Type of the BSC. It defines the BSC configuration in terms of equipment boards. See the table listing BSC configuration types in NTP < 07 >. [type1 / type2 / type3 / type4 / type5] bsc type5 DP [M]: number of SICD(8V) ports available in the BSC: See NTP < 07 >. [M]: number of PCM links connected to the BSC: See NTP < 07 >. [M]: number of sites managed by the BSC: See btsSiteManager entry in the Dictionary. [M]: The lapdTerminalNumber attributes of the dependent lapdLink objects comply with the number of SICD(8V) ports available in the BSC. [M]: The BSC application database is reset (bdaState = not built). This parameter is only available for BSC 2G V13 BSC address actually used. This attribute is managed by the MDR. Value changes are not notified to the Manager. [X25 / IP] bscMdInterface DP V12 Number of packets left to transmit divided by the number of UL TS allocated to the MS. [1 to 15] bts 1 GPRS (SV407 V12) DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. bsCvMax is broadcast in the system information.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

Note : bscUsedAdr Description : Value range : Object : Type : bsCvMax Class 3 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks : Comments :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

268

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

bscX25PrefAdr Class 2 Description : X.25 priority address used by the BSC. It corresponds to the subscribers number in the X.25 network. [15 decimal figures max] bscMdInterface $BSC{bscId}_X25P DP [C/M]: The X25 address must not already be used in a preferential address for another bsc object instance. [C/M]: The X25 address must not already be used in a secondary address for another bsc object instance. [M]: Note : The bscMdInterface object is locked.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

This parameter is only available for BSC 2G

bscX25SecAdr Class 2 Description : X.25 address used by the BSC as backup. It is identical to the priority address when there is no redundancy. It corresponds to the subscribers number in the X.25 network. [15 decimal figures max] bscMdInterface $BSC{bscId}_X25S DP [C/M]: The X25 address must not already be used in a secondary address for another bsc object instance. [C/M]: The X25 address must not already be used in a preferential address for another bsc object instance. [M]: Note : The bscMdInterface object is locked.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

This parameter is only available for BSC 2G

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

269

bscX25UsedAdr Description : X.25 outgoing address currently used by the BSC This dynamic attribute allows the user to know the address selected by the system when the connection is established by bringing the link into service. Value range : Object : Type : Note : [15 decimal figures max] bscMdInterface DD This parameter is only available for BSC 2G

bsMsmtProcessingMode Class 2 B8 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Whether radio measurements collected by the mobiles for a cell are processed by the BTS or the BSC [preProcessedMeasurementReporting (BTS) / basicMeasurementReporting (BSC)] bts preProcessedMeasurementReporting DP [C/M]: The attribute value equals preProcessedMeasurementReporting. [M]: Remark : The parent bsc object is unlocked and the bts object is locked.

Since radio measurements are always preprocessed by the BTS, changing this attribute has no meaning.

bsPowerControl Class 3 B9 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Whether BTS transmission power control is allowed at cell level [enabled / disabled] powerControl disabled DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

270

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

bssMapT1 Class 1 B10 Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the BSSMAP management procedure. It is started on transmission of BLOCK or UNBLOCK by the BSC and canceled on receipt of BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE or UNBLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE sent by the MSC. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [2 to 300] seconds bsc 5 DP [M]: The bsc object is locked.

bssMapT12 Class 1 B11 Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the BSSMAP management procedure. This timer is used with a Phase I MSC only. It is started on transmission of RESET CIRCUIT by the BSC and canceled on receipt of RESET CIRCUIT ACKNOWLEDGE sent by the MSC. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [2 to 300] seconds bsc 5 DP [M]: The bsc object is locked.

bssMapT13 Class 1 B12 Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the BSSMAP management procedure. It is started on receipt of RESET sent by the MSC. On elapse, the BSC sends RESET ACKNOWLEDGE to the MSC. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [2 to 300] seconds bsc 32 DP [M]: The bsc object is locked.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

271

bssMapT19 Class 1 B13 Description :

V8

A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the BSSMAP management procedure. This timer is used with a Phase II MSC only. It is started on transmission of RESET CIRCUIT by the BSC and canceled on receipt of RESET CIRCUIT ACKNOWLEDGE sent by the MSC. [2 to 300] seconds bsc 32 DP [M]: The bsc object is locked. V8

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

bssMapT20 Class 1 B14 Description :

A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the BSSMAP management procedure It is started on transmission of CIRCUIT GROUP BLOCK or CIRCUIT GROUP UNBLOCK by the BSC and canceled on receipt of CIRCUIT GROUP BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE or CIRCUIT GROUP UNBLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE sent by the MSC. [2 to 300] seconds bsc 32 DP [M]: The bsc object is locked.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

bssMapT4 Class 1 B15 Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the BSSMAP management procedure It is started on transmission of RESET and canceled on receipt of RESET ACKNOWLEDGE sent by the MSC. On elapse, the BSC sends RESET. [5 to 600] seconds bsc 60 DP [M]: The bsc object is locked.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

272

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

bssMapT7 Class 1 B16 Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the BSSMAP management procedure It is started on transmission of HANDOVER REQUIRED and canceled on receipt of HANDOVER COMMAND, RESET, RESET CIRCUIT, CLEAR COMMAND or HANDOVER REQUIRED REJECT. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [2 to 120] seconds bsc 7 DP [M]: The bsc object is locked.

bssMapT8 Class 1 B17 Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the BSSMAP management procedure. It is greater than t3103 for each cell managed by the BSC It is started on transmission of HANDOVER COMMAND and canceled on receipt of CLEAR COMMAND sent by the MSC or HANDOVER FAILURE sent by MS. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [0 to 255] seconds bsc 15 DP [C/M]: bssMapT8 > t3103 for all bts objects dependent on the bsc object. [M]: The bsc object is locked.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

273

bssMapTchoke Class 1 B18 Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the handover management procedure It is started by the BSC when the last neighbor cell in the list is rejected. On timer elapse, the BSC asks the MSC to provide a new list of eligible cells. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [1 to 255] seconds bsc 4 DP [M]: The bsc object is locked.

bssSccpConnEst Class 1 B19 Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the handover management procedure It is set on transmission of CONNECTION REQUEST and canceled on receipt of CONNECTION CONFIRM or CONNECTION REFUSED. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Note : [5 to 360, by steps of 5] seconds signallingPoint 5 DP [M]: The parent bsc object is locked. The default value is 5 seconds

bssSccpInactRx Class 1 Description : A interface timer T(iar) triggered by the BSC in the SCCP inactivity detection procedure. It is set either on transmission or receipt of CONNECTION CONFIRM or on receipt of any other message during the connection and canceled on receipt of any message. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [2 to 30] minutes signallingPoint 11 DP [M]: The parent bsc object is locked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

274

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

bssSccpInactTx Class 1 Description : A interface timer T(ias) triggered by the BSC in the SCCP inactivity detection procedure. It is set either on transmission or receipt of CONNECTION CONFIRM or on transmission of any other message during the connection and canceled on transmission of any message. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [1 to 15] minutes signallingPoint 5 DP [M]: The parent bsc object is locked.

bssSccpRelease Class 1 Description : A interface timer T(rel) triggered by the BSC in the SCCP management procedure. It is set on transmission of RELEASE and canceled on receipt of RELEASED COMPLETE or RELEASED. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [1 to 20] seconds signallingPoint 10 DP [M]: The parent bsc object is locked.

bssSccpSubSysTest Class 1 Description : A interface timer T(state info) triggered by the BSC in the SCCP management procedure. It is set on transmission of SST and canceled on receipt of SSA. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [5 to 60, by steps of 5] seconds signallingPoint 30 DP [M]: The parent bsc object is locked.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

275

bsTxPwrMax Class 3 B20 Description : Maximum theoretical level of BTS transmission power in a cell The BSC relays the information to the mobiles in the Abis CELL MODIFY REQUEST message. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [2 to 51] dBm powerControl 43 DP [M]: [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. The use of the block edge channels induces a cell power limitation to 32 dBm for GSM 1900 networks (See Remark hereafter).

Note : Remark :

Some bsTxPowerMax values are not compatible with the effective power output by the BTS. See NTP < 07 >. For a GSM 1900 network (standardIndicator of bts object set to pcs1900), the MDR checks the following: bsTxPwrMax < 32 (dBm) when an edge frequency is defined for the cell (i.e. if the value is included in the cellAllocation attribute values). The use of edge frequencies leads to a cell power reduction. The list of edge frequencies is described in the MDR configuration file, MD/base/config/boundEdge.cfg. This file is offline configurable. To update the database according to the list of edge frequencies, use the shell /MD/install/shell/cm_configBde.sh.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

276

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

bts Description : Identifier of a bts object defined with regard to a btsSiteManager object All channel, transceiver, and transceiverEquipment objects in a BSS are identified with regard to a bts object that defines the covering cell. In all MMI commands, a bts object can be referred to by the sequence siteName.cellName where siteName and cellName identify the covering site and the cell respectively by name. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 5] bts Id [C]: The number of cells managed by an OMCR is limited to maxBtsPerNetwork (static configuration data). The maximum number of cells controlled by a BSC is as follows:
BSC 12000/6000 T1 120 T2 120 T3 160 T4 160 T5 160

[C]:

[C]:

The number of cells attached to a radio site is limited to maxNbOfCells (attribute of the parent btsSiteManager object). The software object related to the parent btsSiteManager object is created. The mobileCountryCode and mobileNetworkCode attributes match those of the parent bsc object if they are defined for that object (cell CGIs must comply).

[C]: [C]:

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

277

[C/M]: The adjacent cell umbrella Ref attribute is defined if the cell is a microcell (cellType) and directed retry handovers are processed in BSC mode (directedRetryModeUsed). [C]: If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked and the parent btsSiteManager object is locked. If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked, the parent btsSiteManager object is locked, and the bts object is locked. If the application database of the related BSC is not built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command. No adjacentCellHandOver object refers to the bts object (the described cell is not used as a neighbor cell of another serving cell). No mdScanner object describing a temporary observation refers to the bts object (no observation is running on the described cell). No traceControl or callPathTrace object refers to the bts object (no tracing is running on the described cell).

[D]:

[D]:

[D]:

[D]:

[D]:

Note :

All cells covered by a given radio site must be created in numerical ascending order and deleted in the reverse order.

bts Description : Value range : Object : Identifier or name of a bts object. It defines the associated bts object. [0 to 5] adjacentCellHandOver, adjacentCellReselection, channel, frequencyHoppingSystem, handOverControl, powerControl, software, transceiver, transceiverEquipment, transceiverZone Id [C]: The bts object is created.

Type : Checks :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

278

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

bts equipment name Description : To select messages issued by a given type of BTS equipment Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Value range : [main power / converter B / converter C / converter A / CSW1 / CSW2 / CSW1M / TX / SYN / SYNO / ALAT / ALATO / DCC / DTI /RX splitter / TX splitter / antenna / column system RX / converter D / column system TX / fan system / RX fan / TX fan / cabinet fan / fans rack / MWT system / exchanger system / rectifier system / rectifier groups / fuses system / breakers / battery system / temperature system / door contact / smoke detector / CSWM / SYNC / ALCO / DSC / PCMI / GTW / PCM0 / PCM1 / rectifier 48V / converter F / converter BCF / internal battery system / cooler system / LNA / VSWR / user system / distribution system / battery cabinet / main breaker / diu / external alarm / VGA / DLNA / MNU / DCU / RX / DBF / AMNU / DCU4 / DRX / FPRX / Lightning protection / BCF Cabinet door / BCF Cabinet fan / SBCF / PA / AC power supply / DC power supply / transmit antenna / cabinet high temperature alarm / cabinet low temperature alarm / drx main reception chain / drx diversity reception chain / splitter output / high power module / splitter / low power RF module / rf supply module / CMCF / PCM / CPCMI / RECAL / rx splitter M / rx splitter D / combiner h4 lna / combiner h4 vswr / txFilter / combiner d lna / combiner d vswr / rxMainConnector / rxDivConnector / dacsCooler / compact dacs cooler / compact distribution / PMNU / RDRX / PMOD / ABIS BTS Synchronization / PSU / Heatsink / Preventive lightning protection / Battery / External Environment / SALCO / not protected alarm / internal temperature / external temperature / Remote Tunable Cavity Combiner / Cavity] Alarm and notification logs Filter DP

Object : Type :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

279

bts list Description : List of the cells involved in broadcasting the short message. Enter the (bsc, btsSiteManager, bts) reference of each bts object. short message Start broadcast DP [A]: [A]: Each bts object in the list is created. Each bts object in the list is assigned a CBCH, that is there is one channel object in the set of transceiver objects dependent on the bts object whose channelType is bcchSdcch4CBCH or sdcch8CBCH. No more than five short messages are being broadcast in the cells at that time. V9

Object : Type : Checks :

[A]:

bts time between HO configuration Class 3 B21 Description :

Whether the HOPingpongTimeRejection timer can be used at bts level when processing handovers Refer to bts object btstimeBetweenHOConfiguration and adjacentCellHandOver object HOPingpongTimeRejection attributes in this Dictionary of Parameters.

Value range :

[0 to 60] second for V9 to V11 [0 / 1] for V12 In a V12 BSS, the range value meaning is the following: 0: 1: The timer is disabled. The timer is used. against pingpong handovers

Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Checks :

bts General protection (TF821 V12) 0 DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

280

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

btsDescription Description :

V10 BTS configuration description (BTS type, configuration, coupling system...) corresponding to the transcription of configRef attribute [chain of characters] btsSiteManager DI It designates the maximum configuration of the configRef file loaded on one of the BTSs. But it does not necessarily corresponds to the configuration of the btsSiteManager object concerned. V8

Value range : Object : Type : Note :

btsHopReconfRestart Class 2 B22 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

Whether hopping frequency reconfiguration is authorized on TX restart in a cell [true / false] bts true DP [C/M]: If the attribute value is true, the bscHopReconfUse attribute of the parent bsc object is also true. [C/M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the bts object is locked.

btsIsHopping Class 2 B23 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Whether frequency hopping is allowed in a cell [hopping / noHopping / hoppingWithCarrierFilling (V8) / noHoppingWithCarrierFilling (V8)] bts Hopping DP

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

281

Checks :

[M]:

If frequency hopping is allowed, the GSM fhMgt function is defined in the siteGsmFctList attribute of the parent btsSiteManager object. If it is disabled, no channel object dependent on the bts object is authorized to obey frequency hopping laws. The parent bsc object is unlocked and the bts object is locked.

[M]:

[M]: Note :

The xxxWithCarrierFilling configuration means that the BTS covering the cell must use a TX for BCCH filling purposes. The following apply: The BSC sends the information to the BTS in the Abis CELL CONFIGURATION REQUEST message. If the BTS does not have a redundant TRX/DRX, one of the operating TRX/DRXs is assigned to that purpose and the partnered TDMA frame is unreachable (refer to the operationalState entry for the transceiver object in the Dictionary). When this TRX/DRX is malfunctioning, the BTS reconfigures the other TRX/DRXs. Users are then warned by the system, by means of a notification. The noHoppingWithCarrierFilling configuration can be used in all BTSs, regardless of the coupling mode. The following apply: Hybrid coupling: All cell TX configurations provide BCCH filling. Cavity coupling: Only the TX that transmits the cell BCCH frequency is configured to provide BCCH filling. The hoppingWithCarrierFilling configuration can only be used in BTSs that use cavity coupling. The following apply: Hybrid coupling: The BTS refuses the configuration. Cavity coupling: All cell TX configurations provide self-frequency filling.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

282

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

btsLockedReserved2 Class 3 B24 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Attribute reserved for future use [32768 to 32767] bts 0 DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

V12

btsMSAccessClassBarringFunction Class 3 B25 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : btsReserved3 Class 3 Description :

V9

Enable or disable dynamic barring of access class at the bts level [enabled / disabled] bts disabled DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. V12

Mean number of logical channels belonging to the large frequency reuse pattern and used at the same time for data communications [16 to +16] bts 0 Automatic Cell Tiering (TF995V12) DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. V12

Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks :

btsReserved4 Class 3 B26 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Attribute reserved for future use [32768 to 32767] bts DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

283

btsSensitivity Class 3 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks : Note :

V12

Target power needed for BTS decoding. This parameter has an influence on the power control efficiency. [0 to 255] bts 0 GPRS (SV407 V12) DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. The power control function used is the Open Loop Control. V12

btsSensitivityInnerZone Class 3 (gprsBtsExtendedConf) Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Checks : btsSiteManager Description :

Minimum power needed for BTS decoding in the inner zone of a dualband cell [0 to 255] bts GPRS (SV407 V12) 0 DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

Identifier of a btsSiteManager object defined with regard to a bsc object All bts, channel, transceiver, and transceiverEquipment objects in a BSS are identified with regard to a btsSiteManager object that defines the covering radio site. In all MMI commands, a btsSiteManager object can be referred to by name (siteName).

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

[0 to 146] btsSiteManager Id [C]: The maximum number of radio sites controlled by a BSC depends on its type and architecture (numbers in ordinary brackets apply to a BSC that does not concentrate BTS LAPD signaling).

BSS Parameter Dictionary

284

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

BSC 12000/6000 T1 28 (7) T2 60 (15) T3 92 (23) T4 124 (31) T5 147 (39)

[C]: [C]:

The software object related to the parent bsc object is created. The referenced lapdLink object (lapdLinkOMLRef) is created for the parent bsc object and assigned to the Abis interface. If the application database of the related BSC is built, the referenced pcmCircuit objects (bscSitePcmList) are created for the parent bsc object and assigned to the Abis interface (pcmType = pcmAbis).

[C]:

[C/M]: The bscSitePcmList list contains at least two pairs if the btsSiteManager object redundantPcmPresence attribute is true. [C]: If one of the pcmCircuit objects in the list describes a PCM link that is shared with another site in the BSS, the radioSiteMask of the two btsSiteManager objects are dissociated. If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked. If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsSiteManager object is locked. If the application database of the related BSC is not built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command.

[C]: [D]:

[D]:

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

285

btsSiteManager Description : Identifier or name of a btsSiteManager object. It defines the parent btsSiteManager object. It defines the parent btsSiteManager object. By definition, a radio site (btsSiteManager object) is related to a BSC, a radio cell (bts object) is related to a radio site, a TRX/DRX (transceiverEquipment object), a TDMA frame (transceiver object) and its radio time slots (channel objects) are related to a radio cell. In all MMI commands, the objects dependent on a btsSiteManager object can be identified at BSC or site level, whichever is the most convenient to users. Value range : Object : [0 to 146] adjacentCellHandOver, adjacentCellReselection, bts, channel, frequencyHoppingSystem, handOverControl, powerControl, software, transceiver, transceiverEquipment, transceiverZone Id [C]: The btsSiteManager object is created.

Type : Checks :

btsSiteManager model Description : To select messages issued by a given model of BTS Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Value range : [s2000 inDoor / s2000E inDoor / s2000E outDoor / s4000 inDoor / s4000C inDoor / s4000 outDoor / s4000 smart / s8000 inDoor / s8000 outDoor / s2000 Low Power O1 / s2000 Low Power O2 / s2000 Low Power S11 / s2000 High Power O1 / s2000 High Power O2 / s2000 High Power S11 / s8000 inDoor CBCF / s8000 outDoor CBCF / s2000 Low Power Enhanced Packaging O1 / s2000 Low Power Enhanced Packaging O2 / s2000 Low Power Enhanced Packaging 2O4 / s2000 High Power Enhanced Packaging O1 / s2000 High Power Enhanced Packaging O2 / s2000 High Power Enhanced Packaging 2O4 / s2000 High Power Enhanced Packaging S11 / eCELL / s8002 outdoor CBCF O2] Alarm and notification logs Filter DP

Object : Type :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

286

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

btsSiteManagerList Class 2 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : List of btsSiteManager objects attached to a multiple site object [0 to 146] multiple site DP [C/M]: Each btsSiteManager object is unique in the list and created for the parent bsc object. [M]: Note : The parent bsc object is unlocked and the referenced btsSiteManager objects are locked.

The order in which the btsSiteManager objects are entered in the list must match the BTS chaining order, beginning with the BTS closest to the BSC. V12

btsSMReserved1 Class 2 B27 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : DP [M]: This space is used for RadioSiteMask offset parameter [32768 to 32767] btsSiteManager

The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsSiteManager object is locked. V12

btsSMReserved2 Class 2 B28 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : DP [M]: This space is used for RadioSiteMask offset parameter [32768 to 32767] btsSiteManager

The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsSiteManager object is locked.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

287

btsThresholdHopReconf Class 2 B29 Description :

V8

Minimum number of frequencies that must be working in a cell to allow frequency hopping reconfiguration If this attribute defines the nominal number of cell frequencies, the reconfiguration process is deactivated. Refer to the btsHopReconfRestart entry in the Dictionary.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

[1 to 64] bts 1 DP [M]: [M]: This number is less than or equal to the number of transceiver objects created for the bts object. The parent bsc object is unlocked and the bts object is locked. V12

btsWithCavity Class 2 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks :

Whether the bts object instance uses a transceiver equipment with cavity [true / false] bts false Mixed hybrid and cavity combiner BTSs (PR1179 V12) DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the bts object is locked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

288

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

buildState Description : Whether BSC application database building is in-progress. Commands on all objects related to the bsc concerned object are refused while the BDA is being built. When the bsc object is created, the value of this attribute is enforced to notInProgress. It is unknown to the BSC and cannot be directly modified by users. It is changed to inProgress by the system after a user Build BDA command on the bsc object as long as database building is in-progress. It is then changed back to notInProgress when the operation is complete. Value range : Object : Type : [inProgress / notInProgress] bsc DI

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

289

C
callClearing Class 3 C1 Description : Maximum distance between MS and BTS before call is cleared It is greater than msRangeMax. This distance defines the cell maximum coverage area. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [2 to 35] km (nonextended mode) [2 to 120] km (extended mode) bts 35 in nonextended mode, 90 in extended mode DP [C/M]: callClearing > msRangeMax (attribute of the handOverControl object associated with the bts object). [C/M]: The maximum distance is 35 km if the extended cell attribute of the bts object is false. [C/M]: The maximum distance is 120 km if the extended cell attribute of the bts object is true. [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

7 km for urban 35 km for rural callPathObservationArea Description : List of up to thirty-one same-type objects observed. Enter each object reference according to the type (bts, transceiverEquipment, xtp). [list of objects belonging to the same class] callPathTrace DP [C/M]: All observed objects belong to the same class. [M]: The callPathTrace object is locked.

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

290

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

callPathTrace Description :

V8 Identifier of a callPathTrace object defined with regard to the md object This object describes the Call path tracing function of a BSS (followup of calls using one or more common resources in the BSS). A callPathTrace object is created in locked state. Unlock the object to start collecting trace data.

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

[0 to 2147483646] callPathTrace Id [C]: The callPathTrace object is not created for the md object.

[C/M/D]: The application database of the related BSC is not being built. [C/M/D]: If the application database of the related BSC is built, the BSS/OMCR link is established and no audit is running in the BSC. [D]: callPathTraceType Description : Type of information stored by the BSC The information stored with respect to the type is detailed in NTP < 07 >. If the request cannot be fulfilled, the BSC attempts to store another type of information, using the following rule: radio >>> hand over >>> radio. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [basic / hand over / radio] callPathTrace DP [M]: The callPathTrace object is locked. The callPathTrace object is created.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

291

callReestablishment Class 3 C2 Description : Whether call reestablishment in a cell is allowed when the radio link is broken off for propagation reasons The information is broadcast to the mobiles at regular intervals on the cell BCCH. On receipt of a CHANNEL REQUIRED message with cause call reestablishment, the BSC attempts to allocate a TCH in one of the cells where call reestablishment is allowed. Then, if no TCH is available the BSC attempts to allocate a SDCCH. [allowed / not allowed] bts not allowed DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

callReestablishmentPriority Class 3 C3 Description : Index in the allocPriorityTable that defines the processing priority of TCH allocation requests with cause call reestablishment This priority is used in primo-allocations or when an SDDCH cannot be allocated for overload reasons. [0 to 17] bts 17 DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

capacityAlarmThreshold Description : Filling threshold of the message saving partition on the OMCR agent disks, beyond which a notification is triggered The size of the saving partitions is indicated in the system commissioning files. This attribute is significant when the object describes a current log; it has no meaning when the object describes a restored log. When the threshold is reached, the OMCR agent initiates the following actions: A notification is sent to the OMCR manager.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

292

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

For a current alarm log, old messages are deleted to make room in the partition. If all saved messages are of todays date, further notifications are not saved and the operationalState of the log object is forced to disabled. For a current observation or trace log, the operationalState of the log object is forced to disabled and its availabilityStatus is forced to logFull. Value range : Object : Type : Note : Cause Description : To select messages according to one or more causes associated with a fault number. Refer to BSS and OMC Maintenance Manuals. This parameter is a component of the specific problems filter. Refer to this entry in the Dictionary. Value range : Object : Type : ccId Description : [0 to 19070980] Alarm and notification logs Filter DP V13 Identifier of the cc object class. This identifier is allocated by the MDR at object creation, depending on the shelf and slot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attribute cannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC e3. [0 to 2147483646] cc DP [0 to 2147483646]. 2147483646 defines a 100% threshold (the partition is full). log Display DP The attributes of the log objects are not managed by users.

Value range : Object : Type :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

293

cellAllocation Class 2 C4 Description : List of no more than 64 frequencies allotted to a cell in the network frequency band By definition, all cells covered by a given radio site use the same frequency band defined by the type of the network (standardIndicator). All cells declared as neighbor cells of a serving cell use the same frequency band as the serving cell. Value range : [1 to 124] (GSM 900 network / Extended GSM network), [0 to 1023] (GSMR), [512 to 885] (GSM 1800 network), [512 to 810] (GSM 1900 network) bts DP [C/M]: Each frequency occurs once in the list and complies with the type of the network (refer to the standardIndicator entry in the Dictionary). [C/M] : GSM 900 / GSMR / Extended GSM networks: The number of frequencies in the list is limited to 64. [C/M] : GSM 1800 or 1900 network: The number of frequencies in the list depends on the gap between the lowest and the greatest defined frequencies.
Maximum gap between frequencies between 257 and 512 between 129 and 256 between 113 and 128 between 1 and 112 Number of frequencies [2 to 18] [2 to 22] [2 to 29] [2 to 64]

Object : Type : Checks :

[C/M]: The cell BCCH frequency (bCCHFrequency) is part of the list. [C/M]: For dualband networks, the number of frequencies must be inferior or equal to 64 by frequency band. [M]: The frequencies allotted to the radio time slots (channel objects) of the set of TDMA frames related to the cell are part of the list. The parent bsc object is unlocked and the bts object is locked.

[M]:

BSS Parameter Dictionary

294

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

cellBarQualify Class 3 C5 Description :

V8

Cell selection priority used in the C2 algorithm in Phase II The information is broadcast to the mobiles at regular intervals on the cell BCCH.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

[true (low priority) / false (normal priority)] bts False DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

cellBarred Class 3 C6 Description : Whether direct cell access are barred to mobiles The information is broadcast to the mobiles at regular intervals on the cell BCCH. During a call, it is transmitted on a signaling link. If the attribute value is changed to barred, all in-progress calls can continue but the BSC will direct further mobile calls to another cell. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Remark : [barred / not barred] bts not barred DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. Even when cell access are barred to MSs, the cell may be indirectly accessible if incoming handovers are allowed (incomingHandOver attribute of the associated handOverControl object).

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

295

cellDeletionCount Class 3 C7 Description : Number of consecutive Measurement Result messages which, if not received from a given neighbor cell, will cause all previously stored information related to that cell to be deleted. From V12, this number corresponds to the number of missing measurement reports after which this neighbour cell is no more eligible. The measurements related to this neighbour cell are not deleted as far as less than 10 consecutive measurements are missing. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Note : [0 to 31] bts 5 in rural environment, 2 in microcell environment DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. Any entered value superior than 10 is taken into account as 10 value.

cellDtxDownLink Class 3 C8 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Remark : Whether the use of discontinuous transmission in BTS-to-MS direction is allowed in a cell [enabled / disabled] bts enabled DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. The dtxMode attribute allows users to control the use of discontinuous transmission on the uplink. Refer to this entry in the Dictionary.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

296

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

cellIdentity Class 3 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Cell Identity code (CI) that identifies in a location area, a neighbor cell of the current cell [0 to 65535] adjacentCellHandOver DP [C/M]: A CGI is unique in the set including a serving cell and its neighbor cells. [M]: cellIdentity Class 3 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Cell Identity code (CI) that identifies in a location area, a neighbor cell of the current cell [0 to 65535] adjacentCellReselection DP [C/M]: A CGI is unique in the set including a serving cell and its neighbor cells. [M]: cellIdentity Class 2 Description : Cell Identity code (CI) that identifies a serving cell in a location area A CGI (Cell Global Identifier) is unique in a location area. It identifies a cell in the PLMN and includes four fields: cellIdentity (CI), locationAreaCode (LAC), mobileCountryCode (MCC), and mobileNetworkCode (MNC). Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 65535] bts DP [C/M]: A CGI is unique in the set including a serving cell and its neighbor cells. [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the bts object is locked. The parent bsc object is unlocked. The parent bsc object is unlocked.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

297

cellName Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Reference name of a bts object on the coverage site. It is case sensitive. [30 characters max] bts DP [C/M]: The name of a cell is unique to the covering radio site.

cellPagingState Description : Value range : Processing mode of the paging requests in the cell [allowed / not allowed / not significant] This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSC. allowed . . . . . . . . . . The operationalState of the transceiver object describing the TDMA frame no.0 carrying the BCCH is working and SYS INFO 1, 2, 3, 4 have been acknowledged by the BTS. not allowed . . . . . . . The operationalState of the transceiver object describing the TDMA frame no.0 carrying the BCCH is working and SYS INFO 1, 2, 3, 4 have not been acknowledged by the BTS. If no message has been acknowledged by the BTS, the notification 1256 Non response to SYS INFO 1, 2, 3, 4 or 2bis is issued. not significant . . . . The operationalState of the transceiver object describing the TDMA frame no.0 carrying the BCCH is not working. Object : Type : bts DD

BSS Parameter Dictionary

298

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

cellReselectHysteresis Class 3C9 Description : Hysteresis to reselect towards a cell: when the MS is in GSM IDLE mode and reselects a cell with a different LA (Location Area) when the MS is in GMM stand by state and reselects a cell with a different LA (Location Area) or a different RA (Routing Area) when the MS is in GMM ready state and reselects a different cell A mobile can select a cell in another location area provided the reselection parameter value of that cell oversteps the reselection parameter values of all the cells in the same location area as the current camping cell by at least cellReselectHysteresis dB. The information is broadcast on the cell BCCH. The reselection criterion (C1) formula is: C1 = (A Max (B,0)) where A and B are as follows: A = average level of the received signal rxLevAccessMin B = msTxPwrMaxCCH Maximum RF output power of the MS The reselection criterion (C2) formula is given with the cellReselectOffset entry. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Note : [0 to 14, by steps of 2] dB bts 6 dB DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. The greater the value of cellReselectHysteresis, the later a new cell in another location area is selected. This prevents from switching back and forth two location areas.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

299

cellReselectOffset Class 3C10 Description :

V8

Encouragement to reselect a cell (C2 criterion) for phase 2 MS The reselection criterion (C2) formula is: C2 = C1 + cellReselectOffset temporaryOffset x H (penaltyTime T) C1 is defined with the cellReselectHysteresis entry. T is a timer that is started when the cell is placed by the MS on the list of most suitable cells to receive the calls, and is stopped when the cell is no longer on the list. H(penaltyTime T) equals 0 when penaltyTime < T and equals 1 when penaltyTime T. In the case when penaltyTime = 640, reselection criterion formula becomes: C2 = C1 cellReselectOffset

Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Checks : Note : Type :

[0 to 126, by steps of 2] dB bts AR 264 4 DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

The value given to this attribute allows to more or less encourage the mobiles to reselect the cell. DP V8

cellReselInd Class 3 C11 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Whether cell reselection criterion (C2) use is authorized [true / false] bts True DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2100

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

cellType Class 3 C12 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : cellType Class 3 C13 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Type of the serving cell [normalType / umbrellaType / microType] bts normalType DP [C/M]: The adjacent cell umbrella Ref attribute is defined if the cell is a microcell (cellType) and directed retry handovers are processed in BSC mode (directedRetryModeUsed). [M]: cemId Description : The parent bsc object is unlocked. V13 Identifier of the cem object class. This identifier is allocated by the MDR at object creation, depending on the shelf and slot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attribute cannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC e3 and TCU e3. [0 to 2147483646] cem DP Type of the adjacent cell [normalType / umbrellaType / microType] adjacentCellHandOver normalType DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

Value range : Object : Type : chain Description : Value range : Object : Type :

Identifier of a BSC processing chain It identifies the chain whose software markers are displayed. [A / B] softwarebsc Display markers DD

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2101

chain Description : To select messages originating from a BSC processing chain Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Value range : Object : Type : chainId Description : Identifier of a BSC processing chain It identifies the chain whose characteristics are displayed. Value range : Object : Type : Note : chainId Description : Identifier of a BSC processing chain The consequences of the command are as follows: If the chain is active at the time the BSC receives the order, it is reset and the operations are switched over to the passive chain. If the chain is passive when the BSC receives the order, it is reset if it can be reached. To determine which chain is currently active in a BSC, run a Display all command on the concerned bsc object: the activeChain attribute identifies the active chain. Value range : Object : Type : [chainA / chainB] bsc Suicide chain Id [chainA / chainB] bsc Display chain information Id This parameter is only available for BSC 2G [chainA / chainB] Alarm and notification logs Filter DP

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2102

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

channel Description : Identifier of a channel object (radio time slot) In all MMI commands, a channel object can be referred to by the sequence siteName.cellName.transceiver.channel, where siteName and cellName respectively identify the covering site and cell by name. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 7] channel Id [C]: The number of channel objects dependent on a transceiver object is limited to eight.

[C/M]: If the channel object does not obey frequency hopping laws, the absoluteRFChannelNo is defined unless it carries the parent cell BCCH, and fhsRef and maio are undefined. [C/M]: If the channel object obeys frequency hopping laws, the absoluteRFChannelNo is undefined, and fhsRef and maio are defined. [C/D]: If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked and the parent bts object is locked. [D]: If the application database of the related BSC is not built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2103

channel state Description : Value range : Type: [BCCH / RACH / PCH AGCH / SDCCH/4 / SDCCH/8 / TCH (full rate) / CCH], [not created / disabled / working / free / busy / blocking / working, blocked / blocking, removing / disabled, blocked / free, blocked / removing / available / working not CBCH / disabled not CBCH / working CBCH / disabled CBCH] Type and resource state of the logical channels multiplexed on the radio time slot

Resource state:

available . . . . . . . . The channel is allocated, not blocked, and free. busy . . . . . . . . . . . . The channel is allocated, not blocked, and busy. disabled . . . . . . . . . The channel is not configured. working, blocked . . The channel is allocated and blocked. disabled, blocked . . The channel is not allocated and blocked. Object : Type : Notes : channel Display channel state DD The types of logical channels that can be multiplexed on a radio time slot depend on its channelType. Refer to this entry in the Dictionary. The resource state of SDCCH no.2 is disabled if a CBCH is defined. A radio channel is blocked or released by means of a user Modify channel state command. A radio channel is allocated when the TDMA frame is configured (in the Abis way) and its radio time slots are mapped onto an Abis interface PCM link.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2104

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

channelType Class 2 C14 Description : Value range : Type of logical channel supported by a radio TS [tCHFull / sDCCH / mainBCCH / mainBCCHCombined / bcchsdcch4CBCH / sdcch8CBCH / cCH (V12) / pDTCH (V12)] An SDCCH is only allocated to a mobile during call setup. Once the call is established, the SDCCH is released and a TCH supports the call, serving traffic and signaling needs. A CBCH (Cell Broadcast CHannel) configuration enables use of the Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (SMSCB) in a cell when a radio time slot of a TDMA frame related to the cell supports that type of channel. The CBCH can be combined with an SDCCH/8 or a BCCH+SDCCH/4. It takes the place of SDCCH no.2 in all cases. If the time slot carries a cell BCCH, its type sets the cell BCCH configuration (combined or not combined). channel Extended CCCH (TF184 V12) GPRS (SV407 V12) None DP [C/M]: If the type is mainBCCH, mainBCCHCombined, or bcchSdcch4CBCH, the channel object identifier is [0] and the object is not authorized to hop. [C/M]: The type cCH can only be used if TS 0 carries a BCCH logical channel (main BCCH, main BCCH combined) [C/M]: The only allowed association of (BCCH + CCCH) timeslots are (0), (0, 2), (0, 2, 4), (0, 2, 4, 6) [C/M]: If the type is sdcch8CBCH, the channel object identifier is in the range [0 to 3] if the covering cell works in normal mode, and it equals 0 or 2 if the cell works in extended mode (extended cell attribute of the parent bts object). [C/M]: If the type is sdcch8CBCH, the noOfBlksForAccessGrant attribute of the parent bts object has a value greater than 0.

Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Checks :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2105

[C/M]: If the type is bcchSdcch4CBCH or sdcch8CBCH, use of the SMSCB service is authorized in the parent bts object (smsCB = used). [C/M]: Concentric cell: If the parent transceiver object belongs to the cell inner zone, the only authorized types are bcchSdcch4CBCH and sdcch8CBCH. The pDTCH channelType is only allowed from V12 BSCs for GPRS. [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the parent bts object is locked. A radio channel is identified by an 8-bit code built up by the OMCR from the channel type and the number of the time slot that supports it: 6 5 4 3 2 1 C3 C2 C1 < TN > TN bits (bits 3 to 1) indicate the radio time slot number [0-7]. 00001 0001T 001TT 01TTT 10000 10001 10010 C bits (bits 8 to 4) describe the type of the channel: ACCH with a TCH/FR (SACCH/FACCH) ACCH with a TCH/HR ACCH in an SDCCH/4 configuration ACCH in an SDCCH/8 configuration BCCH RACH (Uplink CCCH) PCH + AGCH (Downlink CCCH) The T bits indicate the subchannel number [0 to 7]:
There are four subchannels [0 to 3] in an SDCCH/4

[M]:

8 C5

7 C4

00100 00101 00110 00111

configuration: SDCCH/4 + ACCH subchannel no.0 SDCCH/4 + ACCH subchannel no.1 (combined CBCH) SDCCH/4 + ACCH subchannel no.2 SDCCH/4 + ACCH subchannel no.3
There are eight subchannels [0 to 7] in an SDCCH/8

01000

configuration: SDCCH/8 + ACCH subchannel no.0

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2106

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

01001 01010 01011 01100 01101 01110 01111

SDCCH/8 + ACCH subchannel no.1 (CBCH) SDCCH/8 + ACCH subchannel no.2 SDCCH/8 + ACCH subchannel no.3 SDCCH/8 + ACCH subchannel no.4 SDCCH/8 + ACCH subchannel no.5 SDCCH/8 + ACCH subchannel no.6 SDCCH/8 + ACCH subchannel no.7 The logical channels that can be multiplexed on a radio time slot depend on its channelType. They are described in the following table.

channelType tCHFull sDCCH mainBCCH

Bits C5C1 BM + ACCH (SACCH/FACCH) SDCCH/8 + ACCH subchannels [0 to 7] (SACCH/FACCH) BCCH RACH (Uplink) PCH + AGCH (Downlink) BCCH RACH (Uplink) PCH + AGCH (Downlink) SDCCH/4 + ACCH subchannels [0 to 3] BCCH CBCH (= SDCCH No2) RACH (Uplink) PCH + AGCH (Downlink) SDCCH/4 + ACCH subchannels [0 to 3] CBCH (= SDCCH No2) SDCCH/4 + ACCH subchannels [0 to 3] (SACCH/FACCH) BCCH RACH (Uplink) PCH + AGCH (Downlink)

mainBCCHCombined

bcchSdcch4CBCH

sdcch8CBCH

cCH

Remark :

Configuration of logical channels and broadcast of short messages are managed by two independent OMCR functions. When a short message broadcast is started in a cell, the presence of a channel object with a CBCH dependent on the concerned bts object is checked. On the contrary, the SMSCB function is not aware of changes made to that attribute.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2107

Consequently, withdrawing a CBCH from a cell configuration will implicitly stop any short message broadcast in the cell without the SMSCB function knowing. Note : The following counters have been multiplexed on TSs 0, 2, 4, and 6 for the Extended CCCH feature: C1026, C1027, C1028, C1029, C1030, C1031, C1033, C1604, C1605. No recommended value is specified since this parameter depends on the strategy of the operator.

Comments :

chanState Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Whether the radio channel should be blocked [locked / unlocked] channel Set channel state DP [A]: [A]: Notes : A BCCH or a CBCH, whether combined or not, cannot be blocked. The parent btsSiteManager and bts objects are unlocked.

When a CBCH is defined for a cell, it always uses SDCCH no.2. Run a Display channel state command to check that the channel has switched to the specified state. Refer to the channel state entry in the Dictionary. V8

chosenChannelAsscomp Class 1 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

Whether the Chosen channel element is used in the ASSIGN COMPLETE messages (Phase II compliance) [true / false] signallingPoint False DP [M]: The parent bsc object is locked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2108

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

chosenChannelCompL3Info Class 1 Description :

V8

Whether the Chosen channel element is used in the COMPLETE LAYER 3 INFORMATION messages (Phase II compliance) [true / false] signallingPoint False DP [M]: The parent bsc object is locked. V8

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

chosenChannelHoPerf Class 1 Description :

Whether the Chosen channel element is used in the HANDOVER PERFORMED messages (Phase II compliance) [true / false] signallingPoint False DP [M]: The parent bsc object is locked. V8

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

chosenChannelHoReq Class 1 Description :

Whether the Chosen channel element is used in the HANDOVER REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE messages (Phase II compliance) [true / false] signallingPoint False DP [M]: The parent bsc object is locked.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2109

cic Description : Circuit Identity Code = numbers of the PCM link and time slot used by a terrestrial circuit on the A interface, defined with regard to the MSC (cic = 32xmscPcmNumber + mscPcmTsNumber) The cic is coded into 16 bits, as follows:
xxxxxxxxxxxnnnnn = (32xmscPcmNumber) + mscPcmTsNumber

Bits x identify the PCM link involved in the BSC/MSC link with regard to the MSC (mscPcmNumber), bits n identify the time slot used on that PCM link with regard to the MSC (mscPcmTsNumber). Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 65535] xtp DP [C]: [C]: A cic is unique to the parent bsc object. The PCM TS used by the terrestrial circuit on the A interface is identical on MSC end (mscPcmTsNumber component) and BSC end (timeSlotNumber), and is not allotted to another xtp or signallingLink object dependent on the parent bsc object. If PCM link no.3 is used on the A interface (pcmCircuitId), the TS number is in the range [1 to 27] if the PCM link is an E1 link and in the range [1 to 20] if the PCM link is a T1 link. Since the last four TSs on that link are not mapped on the Ater interface, they cannot be used. Refer to the transcoderMatrix entry in the Dictionary. This attribute cannot be modified.

[C]:

Restrictions :

[M]:

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2110

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

circuitGroupBlock Class 1 Description :

V8

Whether the CIRCUIT GROUP BLOCK and CIRCUIT GROUP UNBLOCK messages are used (Phase II compliance) If these messages are unused, the BLOCK and UNBLOCK messages are used.

Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Checks : Remark :

[false / true] signallingPoint Unequipped circuit and circuit group block (UF1169.1 V12) False DP [M]: The parent bsc object is locked. [C/M]: The only accepted value in V10 and V11 is false. Since the system accepts only one value in V10 and V11, changing it has no meaning.

circularFileId Description : Identifier of a BSC circular file BSC circular files are automatically created by the system: the FAULT files are created with the BSC, the PERF (observations) and TRACE (trace data) files are created when the BSC application database is built. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [majorFault / minorFault / observation (permanent and temporary) / instrumentPanel] bscMdInterface Circular file Id [A]: The circular file is created.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2111

circularFileState Description : State of a circular file. When a circular file is closed, the spontaneous messages stored are not forwarded to the OMCR agent. This attribute is set by the system following a user Close circular file or Open circular file command. When a circular file is closed, the messages are stored until the file is reopened. Some messages may be lost if the capacity of the file is reached. Value range : Object : Type : clear time Description : To select alarms cleared at that time Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Value range : Object : Type : cleared by Description : To select alarms ceased by a given user. Enter the users name as defined in the users profile. Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Cleared alarm log Filter DP [<date>,<time>] Cleared alarm log Filter DP [closed / opened] bscMdInterface Display circular file state DP

Object : Type : clearing cause Description : Value range :

To select alarms according to the cause of ceasing Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. [user command / object enabled / object deleted / clear event received / automatic purge / cleared on low threshold crossing / circular file saturation] Cleared alarm log Filter DP

Object : Type :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2112

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

cnId Description :

V13 Identifier of a cn object class. This identifier is allocated by the MDR at object creation. The only value allocated by the MDR is 0. This attribute cannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC e3. [0 to 0] cn DP V13 Current partitioning of the coder pool. This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS. It is set to NULL at object creation. Value changes are not notified to the Manager. This attribute is relevant for TCU e3. [0 to 65535] transcoder3GEqpt DP V12

Value range : Object : Type : coderPoolList Description :

Value range : Object : Type :

codingScheme Class 2 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks : Note :

Channel coding scheme that the MS (Mobile Station) shall use when transmitting data on UL. [cs1, cs2] transceiver cs1 GPRS (SV407 V12) DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the bts object is locked.

cs1 (respectively cs2) is recommended for data blocks (respectively signaling blocks).

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2113

command classes Description : List of no more than twenty-five authorized command classes that define a users command domain. MMI commands grant access to OMCR functions. Each class defines a subset of commands (one of them provides access to all MMI commands). The comprehensive list of MMI commands, together with their class(es), can be displayed using the Display command classes command. Value range : Object : Type : command line Description : Command associated with the job. Follow the Line mode syntax. If the job is meant to run a simple command, enter the sequence describing the command and its parameters. If the job is meant to run a command file, enter the following: RuncommandFile: object=(commandFile=/<directory>/<filename>); The command file must be created in the specified directory. The Line mode syntax is detailed in NTP < 130 >. Value range : Object : Type : command number Description : Serial number of the command to abort. It is assigned by the system and is registered in session logs. Every MMI command launched by the user is identified by a serial number assigned by the system. Open the user session log consultation window and search for that number. commandFile Abort DP [case sensitive] job DP [0 to 2147483646] user profile DP

Object : Type :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2114

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

commandFile Description : Identifier (name) of a command file in the saving directory Enter the file name only. If the file exists in the selected directory, the user can either overwrite its contents with the commands newly recorded or append the new commands to the existing file (see to NTP < 130 >). [case sensitive, 14 characters max] commandFile Create file Id

Value range : Object : Type : commandFile Description :

Saving name of the command file after being edited Enter the file name only. If the file is a new one, preselect the saving directory in the Command file manager window. If the file exists, it is saved in the same directory as the source file. [case sensitive, 14 characters max] Command file editing Save Id V11 Text comment [256 characters max] report template DP

Value range : Object : Type : comment Description : Value range : Object : Type : comment Description : Value range : Object : Type : comments Description : Object : Type :

Additional information coming with the short message. It is not broadcast. [60 characters max] short message DP

Additional information (such as creation date) software Display markers DD

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2115

ComputeSyntheticCounters Description : Whether synthetic counters are included in the observation report This parameter is significant only for permanent bsc and instrument panel observation report display requests. Value range : Object : Type : [enabled / disabled] Display xxx report DP V9

concentAlgoExtMsRange Class 3 C15 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Condition : Type : Checks :

MS to BTS distance below which a handover is requested from the large zone to the small zone if the level criteria is verified [1 to 34] km (nonextended mode) [1 to 120] km (extended mode) handOverControl 1 To define if the associated bts object describes a concentric, dualband or dualcoupling cell DP [C/M]: concentAlgoExtMsRange concentAlgoIntMsRange [C/M]: The maximum distance is 34 km if the extended cell attribute of the associated bts object is false. [C/M]: The maximum distance is 120 km if the extended cell attribute of the bts object is true. [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2116

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

concentAlgoExtRxLev Class 3 C16 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Condition : Type : Checks :

V9

The level of the MS signal strength from below which a handover is requested from the large zone to the small zone [less than 110, 110 to 109, ... , 49 to 48, more than 48] dBm handOverControl 95 to 94 To define if the associated bts object describes a concentric, dualband or dualcoupling cell DP [C/M]: concentAlgoExtRxLev concentAlgoIntRxLev [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. V9

concentAlgoIntMsRange Class 3 C17 Description :

MS to BTS distance from which a handover from the small zone to the large zone will be requested The following inequality, that is not checked by the system, must be true (refer to these entries in the Dictionary): concentAlgoIntMsRange msRangeMax

Value range : Object : Default value : Condition : Type : Checks :

[1 to 34] km (nonextended mode) [1 to 120] km (extended mode) handOverControl 34 To define if the associated bts object describes a concentric, dualband or dualcoupling cell DP [C/M]: concentAlgoIntMsRange concentAlgoExtMsRange [C/M]: The maximum distance is 34 km if the extended cell attribute of the associated bts object is false. [C/M]: The maximum distance is 120 km if the extended cell attribute of the bts object is true. [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2117

concentAlgoIntRxLev Class 3 C18 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Condition : Type : Checks :

V9

Level of the MS signal strength below which a handover is requested from the small zone to the large zone [less than 110, 110 to 109, ... , 49 to 48, more than 48] dBm handOverControl less than 110 To define if the associated bts object describes a concentric, dualband or dualcoupling cell DP [C/M]: concentAlgoIntRxLev concentAlgoExtRxLev [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2118

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

concentric cell Class 2 C19 Description :

V9

Whether the cell is monozone, concentric, dualband or dualcoupling A concentric, dualband, or dualcoupling cell describes a combination of two transmission zones, the outer (or large) zone and the inner (or small) zone. The inner zone is entirely included in the outer zone. A dualband cell is a particular type of concentric cell for which GSM 900 and GSM1800 TRXs/DRXs coexist and share the same BCCH. A dualcoupling cell is a particular type of concentric cell for which the TRXs/DRXs are combined with two types of combiners. For concentric configurations (concentric, dualband or dualcoupling), a TDMA frame belongs to one zone or the other, but never to both, and the frequencies used in each zone are separated.

Value range :

[monozone / concentric / dualband / dualcoupling] monozone.......normal cell concentric.......two concentric transmission zones dualband.........two concentric transmissions zones with GSM 900 TRXs/DRXs for the one and GSM 1800 TRXs/DRXs for the other dualcoupling..two concentric transmission zones with TRXs/DRXs combined with a one type of combiner for the one and with another type of combiner for the other

Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Checks : Note :

bts Dualband cell management (TF875 V12) monozone DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the bts object is locked.

Dualband cells are only available for S8000 DRX transceiver architecture. Dualcoupling cells are only available for BTSs equipped with non mixed DCU4 or DRX transceiver architecture.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2119

condition Description : Condition for calling the counting mechanism when a counter is involved The following fields can be combined in the logical expression:
Parameter administrativeState availabilityStatus bsc equipment name bsc model Cause btsSiteManager model bts equipment name equipment processor number faultNumber operationalState perceived severity postMortem usageState Notification type state change state change alarm alarm alarm alarm alarm alarm alarm state change alarm alarm state change Operators = = = = < = > = = < = > < = > = = = =

The postMortem field can take two values, either before BSC restart or after bsc restart. They have the following meaning: before BSC restart means that the notification issued by the BSC was received by the OMCR agent without the BSC having restarted (nominal conditions). after BSC restart means that the notification was issued by the BSC and the BSC was restarted before the OMCR agent received the notification. These notifications do not trigger alarms.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2120

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

The following logical operators can be used in the logical expression: & stands for the logical AND. | stands for the logical OR. ! stands for the logical NOT. Value range : Object : Condition : Type : configRef Class 2 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Reference name of a DLU (Data Loading Unit) configuration file. Check BSS upgrade file. [1 to VVV] btsSiteManager DP [C/M]: The attribute value must be set according to a static configuration file. [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsSiteManager object is locked. If the attribute is nonzero, the user must check that the DLU configuration file exists on the concerned BSC disk, since no check is performed by the OMCR. The configRef is an ASCII-coded integer in base 32 that allows to code the version of the DLU configuration file as seven characters (xxaYYYz). The btsDescription parameter gives the transcription of the configRef parameter. configRefList Description : V13 This attribute identifies the list of available configRef for a btsSiteManager EFT. For another object class instance, this attribute is empty. This attribute is allocated by the MDR at object creation. This attribute cannot be modified by the Manager. [0 to 150] executableSoftware DP [logical expression] alarm criteria To define if a Counter is associated with the criterion. DP

Note :

Value range : Object : Type :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2121

configurationType Description : Type of configuration the alarm criterion belongs to The manufacturer configuration is known as the reference configuration. The operator configurations are known as the daytime configuration, the nighttime configuration, and the specific (or particular) configuration. Refer to the alarm criteria entry in the Dictionary. [manufacturer / operator] alarm criteria DP [M]: This attribute cannot be modified. V8 Whether the CONFUSION messages are used (Phase II compliance) [false] signallingPoint False DP [C/M]: The only accepted value is false. [M]: The parent bsc object is locked. Since the system accepts only one value for this attribute, changing it has no meaning. V12 Type of the counter list displayed [default / all] default: the default counter list all: the whole counter list report template DP V11

Value range : Object : Type : Checks : confusion Class 1 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Remark :

Counter list Description : Value range :

Object : Type :

counter list filename Description : Object : Type : Full pathname of the counter list file bscCounterList DP

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2122

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

counterId Description : Value range : Object : Type : counters Description : Object : Type : Q3 name of a permanent BSS observation counter. See to NTP < 125 >. [50 characters max, case sensitive] mdWarning detection function = outOfRangeCounter DP V11 List of the Q3 names of the counters eligible for observation, which are in the counter list filename bscCounterList DP V12

cpueNumber Class 1 C20 Description :

Number of the CPU/BIFP board chosen for managing the radio site and its related equipment.
BSC BSC 12000 HC, 12000/6000 types 3, 4, 5 CPUE 0 BIFP0 CPUE 1 BIFP 1

Value range :

Object : Default value : Type : Feature : Checks :

Note :

[noValue / 0 / 1] noValue: let BSC determine BIFP board number on which the new site is attached 0: attach the new site to BIFP0 1: attach the new site to BIFP1 btsSiteManager no value, 0 DP CPU/BIFP load sharing (AR874 V12) [C]: The btsSiteManager object is limited according to the cpueNumber attribute value. [C]: The transceiverEquipment object instance number is limited according to the cpueNumber attribute value. [C/M]: This attribute can only be modified if the BSC BDA is not built. This parameter only applies to type 3 to type 5 BSCs.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2123

cpueOccurrence Description : Number of the CPU/BIFP board selected by the BSC for managing the radio site and its common equipment. This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSC. Value range : Object : Type : cRC Class 2 Description : Whether the CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) test on PCM links is used by the DDTI board controlling the PCM link pcmCircuit object dependent on a bsc object (Abis or Ater interface): If a CRC frame checking method is used, the DDTI board in the BSC and the DTI board in the BTS to which the PCM link is connected must be appropriately configured, as follows: DDTI board: CS17 or CS18 jumper is ON (see NTP < 22 >). DTI board: CS17 jumper is ON (see BTS Reference Manuals). PCMI board: SW2 or SW3 jumper is ON (see BTS Reference Manuals) pcmCircuit object dependent on a transcoder object (A interface): If a CRC frame checking method is used, the DDTI board in the TCU to which the PCM link is connected must be appropriately configured: CS17 and CS18 jumpers are ON (see NTP < 16 >). In case of mismatch, the DDTI configuration takes precedence over the CRC state and a fault message is sent to the OMCR. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [used / not used] pcmCircuit not used DP [M]: The parent bsc is unlocked and the pcmCircuit object is locked. [0 to 2] btsSiteManager DD

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2124

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

creator Description : Value range : Object : Type : criteriaEventType Description : Type of the notifications handled by the alarm criterion Report template creator name [30 characters max] report template DP

V11

Selecting alarmNotification includes all Q3 alarm notifications such as communicationAlarm, equipmentAlarm, environmentalAlarm, processingError-Alarm, and qualityOfServiceAlarm. Selecting stateChangeNotification includes all Q3 state change notifications. Value range : Object : Type : CTU cable Description : Value range : [alarmNotification / stateChangeNotification] alarm criteria DP V13 The CTU (cable transition unit) provides the physical interface to the customers spans in the BSC e3 and the TCU e3. [true / false] True value: No break in the copper connection from the CTU to the IEM module of the LSA. False value: The cable is improperly installed from the CTU to the IEM module of the LSA or some break in the copper connection from the CTU and the IEM module of the LSA. iem DD AR 1209 V13.1

Object : Type : Feature : current log size Description : Object : Type : Remark :

Current log size expressed in bytes log Display DP The attributes of the log objects are not managed by the users

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2125

currentChannelHorqd Class 1 C21 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

V12

Whether the Current channel element is used or not in the HANDOVER REQUIRED messages (Phase II compliance). [false / true] signallingPoint true DP [M]: The parent bsc object is locked. V8

cypherModeReject Class 1 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

Whether the CYPHER MODE REJECT messages are used (Phase II compliance) [true / false] signallingPoint False DP [M]: The parent bsc object is locked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2126

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

D
data mode 14.4 kbit/s Class 2 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Whether data 14.4 kbit/s transmission rate is allowed [disabled / enabled] transcoderBoard disabled DP [M] : [M] : [M] : Related software object release must be V11+ release. The version attribute of the parent transcoder object must be set at TCB_2. The parent bsc object is unlocked and the transcoderBoard is unlocked. V11 V11

data non transparent mode Class 3 Description :

Set of transmission rates used for data non transparent mode transmission on the Radio interface (MS BTS) and Abis interface (BTS BSC) [9.6 / 14.4] (kbit/s) bts 9,6 DP [M] : The parent bsc is unlocked. [C/M]: The only allowed configurations are the following:
9.6 9.6 and 14.4

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2127

data non transparent mode Class 3 Description :

V9

Set of transmission rates used for data non transparent mode transmission on the Radio interface (MS BTS) and Abis interface (BTS BSC) [9.6 / 14.4] (kbit/s) signallingPoint 9.6 kbit/s DP [M] : The parent bsc is unlocked. [C/M]: The only allowed configurations are the following:
9.6 9.6 and 14.4

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

data transparent mode Class 3 Description :

V11

Set of transmission rates used for data transparent mode transmission on the Radio interface (MS BTS) and Abis interface (BTS BSC) [1.2/0.075 / 0.6 / 1.2 / 2.4 / 4.8 / 9.6 / 14.4] (kbs) bts DP [M] : The parent bsc is unlocked. [C/M]: The only allowed configurations are the following:
1.2/0.075, 0.6, 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, and 9.6 (6 values) 1.2/0.075, 0.6, 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, and 14.4 (7 values)

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2128

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

data transparent mode Class 3 Description :

V9

Set of transmission rates used for data transparent mode transmission on the Radio interface (MS BTS) and Abis interface (BTS BSC) [1.2/0.075 / 0.6 / 1.2 / 2.4 / 4.8 / 9.6 / 14.4] (kbit/s) signallingPoint DP [M] : The parent bsc is unlocked. [C/M]: The only allowed configurations are the following:
1.2/0.075, 0.6, 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, and 9.6 (6 values) 1.2/0.075, 0.6, 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, and 14.4 (7 values)

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

Data14_4OnNoHoppingTs Class 3 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : date Description : Value range : Object : Type : date Description : Value range : Object : Type : Note : Date on which data to archive were recorded Date on which the observation report was created Date format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. [<date>] Display daily report DP

V12

Whether data 14.4 kbit/s transmission rate is allowed at bts level on the non hopping TSs [disabled / enabled] bts disabled DP [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked.

Date format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. [<date>] md Archive DP Archiving fault, observation, or trace data is not possible for the current day.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2129

date Description : Value range : Object : Type : date Description : Value range : Object : Type : Note : date Description : Value range : Object : Type : day intervention Description : Value range : Object : Type : Day to be purged Description : Value range : Object : Type : Date on which the data to purge were recorded Date format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. [<date>] omc Data purge DP Type of action associated with an alarm criterion in the daytime configuration [noAlarm / critical / major / minor] alarm criteria DP V10 Date on which data to restore were recorded Date format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. [<date>] omc Restore DP Date on which data to archive were recorded Date format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. [<date>] omc Archive/Restore DP Archiving fault, observation, or trace data is not possible for the current day. Date on which data to restore were recorded Date format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. [<date>] md Restore DP

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2130

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

dDTIIntState Description : Value range : Internal state of the DDTI board controlling the PCM link [working / fault] working . . . . . . . . . The board is correctly configured. fault . . . . . . . . . . . . The board unsuccessful. pcmCircuit DD This parameter is only available for BSC 2G V8 configuration was

Object : Type : Note :

delayBetweenRetrans Class 2 D1 Description :

Number of occurences of a paging sub-group that separates two transmissions of the same paging message. The following inequality, that is not checked by the system, must be true (refer to these entries in the Dictionary):
retransDuration (delayBetweenRetrans + 1) x nbOfRepeat

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

[0 to 22] bts 0 DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the bts object is locked.

deltaUtc Description : Gap between the current OMCR agent time and the GMT reference. Enter a positive value [+m] when the OMCR agent is located east of the Greenwich meridian and a negative value [m] when it is located west. [1440 to +1440] minute The range of possible values allows to update the OMCR reference time within 24 hours. md DP Setting this attribute does not change the time displayed in the system Session informations window which refers to the workstation internal clock.

Value range :

Object : Type : Remark :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2131

detectionFunction Description : Value range : Object : Type : Associated function [excessiveAnomalyRate / outOfRangeCounter] mdWarning DP V9

directedRetry Class 3D2 Description :

Minimum signal strength level received by the mobiles to be granted access to the neighbor cell, used in processing directed retry handovers in BTS mode [less than 110, 110 to 109, ... , 49 to 48, more than 48] dBm adjacentCellHandOver >48 dBm DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. V9

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

directedRetryModeUsed Class 3 D3 Description :

Specify how directed retry handovers are processed in a cell either directly by the BSC (microcells only) or by querying the BTS first [bsc / bts] bts bts DP [C/M]: The BSC mode is authorized if the cell is a microcell (cellType) and the adjacent cell umbrella Ref attribute is defined. [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. The micro cell should be entirely covered by the macro cell in order to use efficiently the bsc mode. The use of the bts mode is recommended in a hot spot when these are several micro cells under the umbrella. The bts mode allows the use of micro cells to rescue the umbrella cell and also avoids a saturation of the umbrella cell. The bts mode is also recommended for all other cases.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

Note :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2132

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

directedRetryPrio D4 Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : directory Description :

V12

Defines the number priority for directed retry handovers [0 to 17] bts General protection (TF821 V12) DP against pingpong handovers

Name of the directory to create on the OMCR agent disks for storing an EFT containing a BSS software version The directory name identifies the type and version of the BSS software to be later stored. Refer to the eft entry in the Dictionary. If the directory exists on the OMCR agent disks, the user is warned.

Value range : Object : Type :

[BSxabvcdefgh (BSC software) / XXXabcdef (others)] md Create EFT dir DP

distHreqt Class 3 D5 Description : Number of distance measurements, used to compute the weighted average MS-to-BTS distance in handover algorithms [1 to 16] handOverControl 4 DP [C/M]: distHreqt is equal to the number of weights in distWtsList (refer to the next entry). [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2133

distWtsList Class 3 D6 Description : List of no more than sixteen weights, used to compute the average MS-to-BTS distance from distHreqt measurements The L1M function balances distHreqt raw measurements with the weights defined in the distWtsList list. Each measurement is partnered with one weight in the list. Weight/measurement associations are set in the order which the weights are recorded. The latest received measurement is always partnered with the first weight in the list.
Super-average = [ (measurementi x weighti)] / 100, i = 1 to distHreqt

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

[0 to 100] % handOverControl 40 30 20 10 DP [C/M]: The number of weights in the list is equal to distHreqt and their sum equals 100. [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

diversity Class 2 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Whether reception diversity is allowed in a cell [enabled / disabled] bts enabled DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the bts object is locked. V12

dLPwrValue Class 3 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks : Power reduction applied to PDCH compared to BCCH [0 to 3] transceiver 0 GPRS (SV407 V12) DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2134

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

drxTimerMax Class 3 Description : Value range :

V12

Maximum value allowed for mobile stations to request nonDRX mode after packet transfer mode [0 (0s), 1 (1s), 2 (2s), 3 (4s), 4 (8s), 5 (16s), 6 (32s), 7 (64s)] The deactivation value for the subfeature TF1220.3 transfer non DRX mode is 0. transceiver 0s GPRS (SV407 V12, and TF1220 V12.4c) DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks :

dtxMode Class 3 D7 Description : MS control of the discontinuous transmission mechanism in a cell Discontinuous transmission is designed to lessen MS battery consumption and diminish interference by breaking off the transmission when no data or speech are being transmitted. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Remark : [msMayUseDtx / msShallUseDtx / msShallNotUseDtx] bts msMayUseDtx DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. The cellDtxDownlink attribute allows users to control the use of discontinuous transmission on the downlink. Refer to this entry in the Dictionary.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2135

duplex link state Description : Value range : Object : Type : duration Description : Time delay before running the next command Active/passive chain link state [working, fault] bsc DD

V10

The Sleep command can be inserted in a command file as many times as necessary. Value range : Object : Type : [1 to 3600] seconds commandFile Sleep command DP V12

dwAckTime Class3 (packetAckTime) Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Checks :

Time defining the period for the acknowledgments for downlink transfers [1 to 64] steps 100 ms for downlink transfer (step size is 100 msec) transceiver GPRS (SV407 V12 and TF1220 V12.4c) DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2136

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

E
early classmark sending Class 3 E1 Description : V10

Whether Early classmark sending procedure initiated by a multiband MS is allowed. The information is broadcast to the mobiles at regular intervals on the cell BCCH (SYQ INFO 3).

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : efd Description :

[Not Allowed, Allowed] bts Not Allowed DP [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked

Identifier of an efd object defined with regard to the md object Seven efd objects are automatically created for the md object, an efdAlarm type object, an efdConfiguration type object, an efdObs type object, an efdSpecificNotif type object, an efdStateChange type object, an efdTrace type object, and an efdClass type object. Refer to the efdType entry. The administrativeState attribute of an efd object sets the conditions for forwarding the associated messages to the OMCR manager.

Value range : Object : Type : Note :

[0 to 2147483646] efd Id An efd object should be created in unlocked state.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2137

efdType Description : Value range : Type of the messages processed by the efd object [efdAlarm / efdConfiguration / efdObs / efdSpecificNotif / efdStateChange / efdTrace / efdClass] An efdAlarm type object tallies alarm notifications issued by the OMCR agent. An efdConfiguration type object tallies object create and set messages issued by the users and attribute value change messages issued by the BSC. An efdObs type object tallies observation messages collected by the OMCR agent. An efdSpecificNotif type object allows users to define sets of specific notification messages to process such as endOfArchival, endOfRestore, beginningOfBdeArchival, downloadEnd, endOfBdeArchival, endOfBdaBuiding, endOfMarkingConsultation, or endOfSoftwareChange. An efdStateChange type object tallies object state change notifications. An efdTrace type object tallies trace messages collected by the OMCR agent. An efdClass type object tallies efd class objects creation and deletion messages. Thus these notifications enable to identify the external managers which are being connected to the MDR. efd DP [M]: This attribute cannot be modified.

Object : Type : Restrictions :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2138

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

eft Description : Name of an EFT (set of transferable files) containing a BSS software version The name of the EFT identifies the type and version of the BSS software it contains. Refer to the eft entry related to the software object in the Dictionary. The Create EFT command validates EFT downloading on the OMCR agent disks, in the matching directory created for that purpose. Refer to the directory entry in the Dictionary. The software can then be dowloaded to the concerned BSC disk with a Download command on the software object related to an object of the same type. Refer to the eft entry related to the software object in the Dictionary. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [BSxabvcdefgh (BSC software) / XXXabcdef (others)] md Create EFT / Delete EFT DP [C]: If mergeEFT is False, the EFT does not exist in the matching directory on the OMCR agent disks. The EFT exists in the matching directory on the OMCR agent disks and no software object refers to the software version contained in the EFT.

[D]:

eft Description : Name of an EFT (set of transferable files) containing a BSS software version The name of the EFT identifies the type and version of the BSS software it contains. Refer to the eft entry related to the software object in the Dictionary. This command copies the EFT stored on the OMCR manager disks by a Read Gigatape command to the matching directory on the OMCR agent disks. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [BSxabvcdefgh (BSC software) / XXXabcdef (others)] omc Download EFT to md DP [A]: The EFT exists on the OMCR manager disks.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2139

eft Description : Name of the EFT to download to the BSC disk. It must match the type of the parent object related to the software object. The name of the EFT identifies the type and version of the BSS software to donwload, as follows: BSC software: Format = BSxabvcdefgh
Field BSx ab v cd ef gh Meaning Type of software Version number Reserved Sub-version number Edition number Revision factor [01 .. 99] [01 .. 99] [01 .. 99] Value x = [1 .. 3] [09 .. 32]

BTS and TCU software: Format = XXXabcdef


Field XXX Meaning Type of software Value BCF : BCF / BC1 / BC2 / SBC / PIC TRX : TRX / DRX / TR1 / PIC TCB : TCB/TC1/TC2 [08 .. 32] BCF : [A .. H] TRX : [A .. H] TCB : [A .. H]

ab c

Version number Sub-version number

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2140

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

Field d

Meaning Edition number

Value BCF : [1 .. 8] TRX : [1 .. 8] TCB : [1 .. 8] BCF : [01 .. 32] TRX : [01 .. 32] TCB : [01 .. 64]

ef

Revision factor

If downloading is successful, the system sets the value of the sWVersionNew attribute of the software object to the version of the new software downloaded to the BSC disk. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [BSxabvcdefgh (BSC software) / XXXabcdef (others)] software Download DP [A]: The first three letters of the EFT name match the type of the managed object related to the software object. For a software-bsc object, the manufacturing release corresponds to the bscType attribute of the related bsc object. Downloading of the EFT on the OMCR agent disks is validated. Refer to the eft entry related to the md or omc object in the Dictionary. No directory creation command is in-progress for the EFT. Refer to the directory entry in the Dictionary. The parent bsc object is unlocked.

[A]:

[A]:

[A]:

emergencyCallPriority Class 3 E2 Description : Index in the table allocPriorityTable for a TCH allocation request whose cause is emergency call This priority is used in primo-allocations or when an SDDCH cannot be allocated for overload reasons. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [0 to 17] bts 17 DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2141

eMLPPThreshold Class 3 E3 Description :

V12

Defines the minimum value that the eMLPP Precedence of an incoming call must have to be taken into account by the BSS with inband signalling (paging and vbs/vgcs assignment request) [none / priority 4 / priority 3 / priority 2 / priority 1 / priority 0 / priority B / priority A] signallingPoint none DP ASCI (GSMR V12) [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked. V8

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Feature : Checks :

encrypAlgoAsscomp Class 1 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

Whether the Chosen encryption algorithm element is used in the ASSIGN COMPLETE messages (Phase II compliance) [true / false] signallingPoint False DP [M]: The parent bsc object is locked. V8

encrypAlgoCiphModComp Class 1 Description :

Whether the Chosen encryption algorithm element is used in the CIPHER MODE COMPLETE messages (Phase II compliance) [true / false] signallingPoint False DP [M]: The parent bsc object is locked.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2142

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

encrypAlgoHoperf Class 1 Description :

V8

Whether the Chosen encryption algorithm element is used in the HANDOVER PERFORMED messages (Phase II compliance) [true / false] signallingPoint False DP [M]: The parent bsc object is locked. V8

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

encrypAlgoHoreq Class 1 Description :

Whether the Chosen encryption algorithm element is used in the HANDOVER REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE messages (Phase II compliance) [true / false] signallingPoint False DP [M]: The parent bsc object is locked.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

encryptionAlgorSupported Class 1 Description : Type of ciphering capability supported by the BTSs of a BSS. When no ciphering capability is supported, users calls are not crypted. [none / gsmEncryptionV1 (A5.1) / gsmEncryptionV2 (A5.2)] bsc gsmEncryptionV1 DP [C/M]: Only one type of ciphering capability is defined. [M]: The bsc object is locked.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2143

End date Description : To select call monitoring data recorded on that date and before. It is on or after Beginning date. Do not fill in if information produced to the end should be displayed. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : end date Description : Date on which data were last recorded in the log (default is the current date). It is on or after start date. Date format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [<date>] System session log Filter DP [A]: end date is on or after start date. V11 [mm/dd/yyyy hh:mm:ss] Call monitoring Display (SDO) DP [A]: End date is on or after Beginning date.

End of probative Phase Type Description :

Whether the user validate or cancel the software change after new EFT activation See to NTP < 128 >.

Value range : Object : Type : Note :

[validate software change / cancel software change] bsc End of probative phase DP This parameter only applies to BSC Upgrades with prototype BDA change (BSC Version Upgrade and BSC Edition Upgrade).

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2144

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

end time Description : Absolute time of final job run if the job is to be periodically run over a limited period of time Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. If date matches the date in start time, fill in time with a value after start time. Value range : Object : Condition : Type : Checks : end time Description : End of system log reading on the requested end date (default is 24:00) Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [<time>] System session log Filter DP [A]: If end date and start date are identical, end time is after start time. [<date>,<time>] job To define when a job periodicity is defined and only if the job life is limited (users choice). DP [A]: end time is after start time.

endAlarmFilter Description : Condition for ceasing the alarm when no counter is involved The fields that can be combined in the logical expression are described under the startAlarmFilter entry in the Dictionary. Value range : Object : Condition : Type : [logical expression] alarm criteria To define if no counter is associated with the criterion. DP

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2145

endAlarmThreshold Description : Minimum counting value in the reference period, below which an end-of-alarm message is sent if the corresponding startofalarm message was sent first. The value must be checked by users. This attribute defines a minimum value read at the end of the defined refPeriod. It must be lower than startAlarmThreshold. Threshold changes are effective when the OMCR is restarted. Value range : Object : Type : [0.00 to 2147483646] mdWarning if detectionFunction = excessiveAnomalyRate DP

endAlarmThreshold Description : Minimum (thresholdLow) / maximum (thresholdHigh) counting value in the reference period, above/below which an end of lower threshold/upper threshold alarm message is sent if the corresponding start-of-alarm message was sent first. The value must be checked by users. If thesholdType is thresholdLow, it defines a minimum value for a one minute reference period (or the counter collecting period for PCM unavailability counters), above which the end of lower threshold alarm message is sent. It must be greater than startAlarmThreshold low. If thesholdType is thresholdHigh, it defines a maximum value for a one minute reference period (or the counter collecting period for PCM unavailability counters), below which the end of upper threshold alarm message is sent. It must be lower than startAlarmThreshold high. Threshold changes are effective when the OMCR is restarted. Value range : Object : Type : Remark : The threshold limits depend on the associated counter. The BSS counter threshold crossing detection mechanism is described in NTP < 07 >. [0.00 to 2147483646] mdWarning if detectionFunction = outOfRangeCounter DP

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2146

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

endCounterThreshold Description : Value range : Object : Condition : Type : endSearchTime Description : Absolute time to end searching for the observation reports to cumulate. It is six hours before beginSearchTime at the most. Observation data accumulating ends with the information contained in the first observation message collected in the requested period of time. Refer to the partnered beginSearchTime entry in the Dictionary. Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [<date>,<time>] Display custom report DP [A]: [A]: endSearchTime is before beginSearchTime. The defined period is less than or equal to six hours. Maximum counting threshold when a counter is involved [0 to 100] alarm criteria To define if a counter is associated with the criterion. DP

endSearchTime Description : Absolute time to end searching for the observation report to edit (default is one hour before beginSearchTime) The report displays the information contained in the last observation message generated in the requested period of time. Refer to the partnered beginSearchTime entry in the Dictionary. Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [<date>,<time>] Display raw report DP [A]: endSearchTime is before beginSearchTime.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2147

endSearchTime Description : Absolute time to end searching for the avalaible permanent observations to list (default is twelve days before beginSearchTime) The last listed report is the first observation report generated in the requested period of time. Refer to the partnered beginSearchTime entry in the Dictionary. Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. [<date>,<time>] List available permanent observations messages DP [A]: endSearchTime is before beginSearchTime.

Value range : Object : Type : Checks : endSearchTime Description :

Absolute time to end searching for the avalaible permanent observations to list (default is twelve days before beginSearchTime) The last listed report is the first observation report generated in the requested period of time. Refer to the partnered beginSearchTime entry in the Dictionary. Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. [<date>,<time>] List available temporary observations messages DP [A]: endSearchTime is before beginSearchTime.

Value range : Object : Type : Checks : endSearchTime Description :

Absolute time to end searching for the observation messages to list (default is twelve days before beginSearchTime) The last listed message is the first observation message generated in the requested period of time. Refer to the partnered beginSearchTime entry in the Dictionary. Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. [<date>,<time>] List observation messages DP [A]: endSearchTime is before beginSearchTime.

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2148

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

endSessionCriteriaType Description : Value range : Definition of the criterion that will end a call path tracing session [duration / number (of calls) / oam (locking the callPathTrace object)] duration . . . . . . . . . endSessionCriteriaDuration = [5 to 1080] minutes number . . . . . . . . . . endSessionCriteriaNbCall = [1 to 2500] oam . . . . . . . . . . . . administrativeState = locked Only one criterion is defined. When it is true, the call followup session is stopped in the BSS. Refer to the usageState entry related to this object in the Dictionary. callPathTrace DP [M] : The callPathTrace object is locked. The session is automatically restarted by unlocking the object, regardless of the end-of-session criterion. V12

Object : Type : Checks : Note :

enhancedTRAUFrameIndication E4 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Feature : Notes :

Whether the BTS uses the Enhanced TRAU Frame (EFT = executable Software) for TCU [notAvailable / available / active] bsc DI PCM error correction (FM660 V12) This attribute is set to available only if the transcoderBoards of all the related TCUs are of TCB2 board type and their software are V12. This attribute is set to active only if the pcmErrorCorrection attribute of one bts object related to the BSC is set to 1. Only BTSs equipped with non mixed DCU4 or DRX transceiver architecture can support the Enhanced TRAU Frame.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2149

equipment processor number Description : To select a processor or an equipment in the preselected type Consult the corresponding notification messages (Equipment number field). Do not fill in if neither bsc equipment name nor bts equipment name is defined or if this criterion is not to be selected. Value range : Object : Type : [0 to 200] Alarm and notification logs Filter DP V11

error concealment unit Class 2 Description :

Whether the Error Concealment Unit (ECU) is used. The ECU provides a voice quality improvement on the uplink in bad radio propagation conditions. [not used, used] bts used DP [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked and the bts object is locked

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

errorCorrectionMethod Class 3 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Type of correction method used on the A interface [basicRetr (only value accepted) / prevCyclRetr] signallingLinkSet basicRetr DP [C/M]: The only accepted value is basicRetr. [M]: Remark : The parent bsc object is locked.

Since the system accepts only one value for this attribute, changing it has no meaning.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2150

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

exclusive interval of codano Description : To select messages according to their fault number.

V12

The filter can contain one (or several) intervals defining the fault numbers not to be retrieved. For example, interval 5~8 enables to retrieve ALL the fault numbers except fault numbers 5, 6, 7, and 8. Value range : Object : Type : [0 to 65535 0 to 65535] Alarm and notification logs Filter DP V12

exclusive list of codano Description : Value range : Object : Type :

To select messages that do not contain one (or several) given fault number(s). [0 to 65535] Alarm and notification logs Filter DP V13

executableSoftwareId Description :

Identifier of a executableSoftware object class. This identifier is allocated by the MDR at object creation, if not given by the Manager. This attribute cannot be modified. [0 to 255] executableSoftware DP V13

Value range : Object : Type :

executableSoftwareName Description :

Name of a software version. This attribute is allocated by the MDR at object creation, if not given by the Manager. This attribute cannot be modified. [0 to 12] String executableSoftware DP

Value range : Object : Type :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2151

extCommsInt Description : State of the X.25 links set up from the BSC chain X.25 ports [working / fault]. Each port is identified with regard to the mother SICX board working . . . . . . . . . The X.25 link is correctly initialized. fault . . . . . . . . . . . . An error was detected (SLS board faulty, etc.). Value range : Object : Type : Note : [0 to 65535] bsc Display chain information DD This parameter is only available for BSC 2G V9

extended cell Class 2 E5 Description :

Whether the cell is extended (up to 120 km large) or not The cell working mode governs the upper limit of the following attribute values (refer to theses entries in the Dictionary): callClearing, msRangeMax, and rndAccTimAdvThreshold attributes of the bts object concentAlgoExtMsRange and concentAlgoIntMsRange attributes of the associated handOverControl object if the bts object describes a concentric cell

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

[true (extended) / false (normal)] bts false DP [M]: If the attribute is changed to true and a CBCH is defined for the cell, this channel is carried by a radio time slot with an even identifier number. Refer to the channelType entry in the Dictionary. The parent bsc object is unlocked and the bts object is locked.

[M]: Note :

In that mode, the radio time slots with odd identifier numbers are unknown to the BSC and the diversity functionality is not available in the cells.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2152

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

external alarm configuration Class 2 Description :

V9

Configuration of the external alarm loops controlled by a BTS. Alarm loop n is monitored (not monitored) when the nth bit is set to 1 (0) in the binary field. The alarm mask is immediately displayed in the hexadecimal field just below. The alarm mask can be set using the hexadecimal field as well as the binary field. The number of connectors per alarm board depends on the type of the alarm boards installed in the BTS.
BTS Type of board Number of protected external alarms per cabinet 4 6 4 4 4 16

S2000 S2000H/L S4000 Indoor S4000 Outdoor S4000 Smart S8000

ALATO SBCF ALAT ALATO ALATO ALCO

The correspondence between those 48 bits and the external alarms of each site directly depends on three factors: the type of BTS, the number of cabinets, and the convention for numbering those cabinets. S4000: 24 external alarms max., 6 cabinets 4 externals alarms per cabinet. Therefore 4 bits by cabinets placed on the mask on the same order of the numbering of the cabinets. Exemple: to unmask all the external alarms of S4000 Indoor S22 the alarm mask would be:

1111 0000 1111 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000

Base cabinet 1st cabinet of the 1st sector

Extension cabinet 2nd cabinet of 1er sector

Extension cabinet 1st cabinet of 2nd sector

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2153

S8000:

48 external alarms max., up to 3 cabinets in the future 16 alarms per cabinet (16 bits per cabinet).

S2000H/L: 18 external alarms max., up to 3 cabinets in the future 6 alarms per cabinet (6 bits per cabinet). Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [48-bit register] btsSiteManager 48 bits equal to 0 DP [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsSiteManager object is locked V9

external battery cabinet Class 2 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

Presence or absence of the optional equipment ancillary battery cabinet in S8000 Outdoor [Present / Absent] btsSiteManager DP [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsSiteManager object is locked

externalTime Description : Current OMCR agent date and time Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Value range : Object : Type : Remark : [<date>,<time>] md DP Setting this attribute does not change the time displayed in the system Session informations window which refers to the workstation internal clock.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2154

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

F
Family Description : V11 Family of counters in which are chosen the counters to be observed The list of the available families depends on the Observed object class and the observation type selected in the report template definition of the observation. See Tables hereafter. Value range : [A interface / ABIS interface / Abis interface / BSC / BSC BSCB / BSC CPUM / BSC SICD / BSC TSCB / CCCH monitoring / Channel mode / CPUE / Dedicated channel assignment / Directed retry / Establishment / Global handovers / Handovers / Interbss handovers / Intracell handovers / Layer One Management / OMC interface / Releases of communications / SDCCH allocations / SMS / synthetic / TCH allocations] report template DP [M] : Only one family type of counters can be selected for each observation report.

Object : Type : Checks :

Observed object: bsc


Observation real time (ORT) A interface BSC synthetic A interface OMC interface Releases of communications Channel mode TCH allocations BSC BSC SICD CPUE BSC CPUM ABIS interface BSC BSCB BSC TSCB synthetic

Observation fast statistic (OFS)

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2155

Observed object: bts


Observation real time (ORT) SDCCH allocations TCH allocations Establishment Global handovers SDCCH allocations TCH allocations Channel mode Intrabss handovers Interbss handovers Dedicated channel assignment Global handovers Establishment Releases of communications Layer One Management Interferences Directed retry SMS Abis interface CCCH monitoring synthetic

Observation fast statistic (OFS)

Observed object : transceiverZone


Observation real time (ORT) Observation fast statistic (OFS) SDCCH allocations TCH allocations SDCCH allocations TCH allocations Intracell handovers

faultNumber Description : To select messages with a given fault number This parameter is a component of the specific problems filter. Refer to this entry in the Dictionary. Value range : Object : Type : [0 to 40000] Alarm and notification logs Filter DP

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2156

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

fhsRef Class 2 F1 Description : Identifier of the frequencyHoppingSystem object that defines the frequency hopping management parameters for the radio time slot Setting this attribute and the maio attribute allows the time slot to obey frequency hopping laws. Value range : Object : Condition : Type : Checks : [0 to 63] channel To define if the time slot hops in frequencies. DP [C/M]: This attribute is undefined if frequency hopping is not allowed for the parent bts object (btsIsHopping = no hopping) or the channelType of the channel object is mainBCCH, mainBCCHCombined, or bcchSdcch4CBCH. [C/M]: If the attribute is defined, the following is checked:
The maio attribute is also defined. The referenced frequencyHoppingSystem object is

created for the parent bts object.


Each frequency occurs once in the mobileAllocation

list and is allotted in the cellAllocation list of the parent bts object.
The number of frequencies in the mobileAllocation list

is greater than the maio attribute value.


Concentric

cell: The frequencies in the mobileAllocation list are not used in the zone to which the parent transceiver object does not belong. [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the parent bts object is locked.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2157

forced handover algo Class 3 F2 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

V9

Minimum signal strength level received by the mobiles to be granted access to a neighbor cell in case of forced handover [less than 110, 110 to 109, ..., 49 to 48, more than 48] dBm handOverControl less than 110 DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

frequencyHoppingSystem Description : Identifier of a frequencyHoppingSystem object that defines frequency hopping management parameters for radio time slots that obey frequency hopping laws. A bts object may reference up to sixty-four objects of this type. Refer to the hoppingSequenceNumber mobileAllocation entries in the Dictionary. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 2147483646] frequencyHoppingSystem Id [C]: The associated bts object is created and the frequencyHoppingSystem object is not created for that object. The number of frequencyHoppingSystem objects created for a bts object is limited to sixty-four. and

[C]:

[C/D]: If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked. [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the associated bts object is locked. If the application database of the related BSC is not built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command. No channel object dependent on the bts object refers to the frequencyHoppingSystem object (fhsRef attribute).

[M/D]: The frequencyHoppingSystem object is created. [D]:

[D]:

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2158

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

G
geographical coordinates Description : V11 Definition of the geographical coordinates of the equipment in the network These coordinates are defined by a latitude and a longitude, each expressed by four fields. Latitude is expressed by the four following fields: Deg Lat . . . . . . . . . [0 to 90] degrees Min Lat . . . . . . . . . [0 to 59] minutes Hundreth of sec Lat . . . . . . . [0 to 5999] hundredth second Direction Lat . . . . [North / South] Longitude is expressed by the four following fields: Deg Lon . . . . . . . . . [0 to 180] degrees Min Lon . . . . . . . . [0 to 59] minutes Hundreth of sec Lon . . . . . . . [0 to 5999] hundredth second Object : Direction Lon . . . . [East / West] bsc btsSiteManager md transcoder DI V12

Value range :

Type :

geographical coordinates Description :

Definition of the geographical coordinates of the pcuSN equipment in the network These coordinates are defined by a latitude and a longitude, each expressed by four fields. Latitude is expressed by the four following fields: Deg Lat . . . . . . . . . [0 to 90] degrees Min Lat . . . . . . . . . [0 to 59] minutes Hundreth of sec Lat . . . . . . . . . [0 to 5999] hundredth second Direction Lat . . . . [North / South]

Value range :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2159

Longitude is expressed by the four following fields: Deg Lon . . . . . . . . . [0 to 180] degrees Min Lon . . . . . . . . [0 to 59] minutes Hundreth of sec Lon . . . . . . . . . [0 to 5999] hundredth second Object : Feature : Type : Direction Lon . . . . [East / West] pcusn GPRS (SV407 V12) DI V12

gprsAvgParam Class 3 Description :

This parameter is composed of the following attributes: nAvgI nAvgT nAvgW

Refer to these entries in the NTP < 124 >. gprsBtsExtendedConf Description : V12

This parameter is composed of the following attributes: minNbrGprsTs gprsPreemption gprsPreemptionProtection T3172 N3103 maxDwAssign maxUpTbfP1P2Threshold maxDnTbfP1P2Threshold maxUpTbfPerTs maxDnTbfPerTs longTbfSizeThreshold longTbfLossThroughput nbrFreeTchBeforeAnticipation

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2160

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

nbrFreeTchToEndAnticipation btsSensitivityInnerZone maxBsTransmitPowerInnerZone reserved3 reserved4 reserved5 Refer to these entries in the NTP < 124 >. gprsBtsLockExtendedConf Description : V12

This parameter is composed of the following attributes: radioAllocator msCapWeightActive speechOnHoppingTs

Refer to these entries in the NTP < 124 >. gprsCellActivation Class 3 Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Checks : Flag used to activate the GPRS at cell level [disabled / enabled] bts GPRS (SV407 V12) disabled DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. V12 V12

gprsPcuCrossConnectList Description :

This parameter is composed of the following attributes: pcmNbr nbrTch Refer to these entries in this Dictionary.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2161

gprsPcuLockExtendedConf Class 2 Description : reserved1 reserved2 reserved3 reserved4 reserved5 Refer to these entries in this Dictionary.. gprsPermittedAccess Class 3 Description :

V12

This parameter is composed of the following attributes:

V12

It defines the Routing Area Color (3bit length) of the cell. If the MS receives different values of the Routing Area Color field in two different cells, it shall interpret the cell reselection information as if the two cells belonged to different RA. [0 to 7] bts 0 GPRS (SV407 V12) DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. V12

Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks :

gprsPreemption Class 3 (gprsBtsExtendedConf) Description :

Set to yes, it allows the PCU to refuse GSM preemption over shared GSM/GPRS TS if GPRS resources are not sufficient to ensure the minimum bandwidth for each MS. In the case of lack of GSM radio TS, the BSC has to allocate one shared GSM/GPRS radio TS to GSM and a preemption procedure is started. When one shared radio TS temporarily allocated to GSM is released (end of GSM allocation due to end of call or handover), then a reallocation procedure is started to increase the GPRS capacity. [yes / no] bts GPRS (TF1121 V12) DP yes [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Default value : Checks :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2162

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

gprsPreemptionProtection Class 3 (gprsBtsExtendedConf) Description :

V12

Protection timer used by the BSC in order to reduce the load in case of PCU TDMA TS Status Nack message reception during a preemption procedure. This message is sent by the PCU. [1 to 60] second(s) bts GPRS (TF1121 V12) 10 DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. None V12

Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Checks : Comments :

gprsPriority Class 2 (gprsTranscvLockExtendedConf) Description : Priorities that can be affected to the TDMA

Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks :

Priority affected to the TDMA when allocating packet ressources. [p1 or p2 (hight GPRS priority)] transceiver p1 GPRS (TF1121 V12) DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the transceiver object is locked. V12

gprsTimerWaitPUAM Class 3 Description :

Waiting timer for the reception of the uplink assignment after sending a PACKET RESOURCE REQUEST message This timer is used on the MS side to define when to stop waiting for Packet Uplink Assignment Message after sending of a PACKET RESOURCE REQUEST message [500ms, 1s, 2s, 4s] bts 0.5 s GPRS (SV407 V12) DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2163

gprsTimerWaitRLC Class 3 Description :

V12

Waiting timer for release of the TBF after reception of the final block This timer is used on the MS side to define when the MS has received all the RLC data blocks. When the timer expires the MS releases the resources associated with the TBF and begins to monitor its paging.

Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks :

[500ms , 1s, 2s, 4s] bts 0s GPRS (SV407 V12) DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. V12

gprsTranscvLockBtsExtendedConf Class 2 Description :

This parameter is composed of the following attributes: gprsPriority maxNbrPDAAssig N3105max maxNbrRLCEmptyBlock maxNbrPUDWithoutVChange reserved1 reserved2 reserved3 reserved4 reserved5 Refer to these entries in this Dictionary.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2164

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

H
HandOver from signalling channel Class 3 H1 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Remark : Authorization to perform intercell handovers on signalling channels (SDCCH or TCH in signalling mode) [enabled / disabled] handOverControl disabled DP The attribute was named TCH and sDCCHHandOver on the V8 OMCR MMI.

handOverControl Description : Identifier of a handOverControl object that defines handover management parameters in a cell. A bts object may reference one and only one object of this type. [0 to 2147483646] handOverControl Id [C]: The associated bts object is created and the handOverControl object is not created for that object. The parent bsc object is unlocked. If class 2 attributes are modified, the associated bts object is locked.

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

[M]:

[C/D]: If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked and the associated bts object is locked. [M/D]: The handOverControl object is created. [D]: [D]: The associated bts object is not referenced, except by a powerControl object. If the application database of the related BSC is not built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2165

hardware configuration Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Type of architecture of the transceiverEquipment [Dcu2 / Dcu4 / Drx] transceiverEquipment Drx DP

V11

hardwareRef Class 2 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Hardware reference of a site BCF. Check BSS upgrade file. [0 to 65535] btsSiteManager DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsSiteManager object is locked.

hardwareRef Class 2 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Hardware reference of a TRX/DRX. Check BSS upgrade file. [0 to 65535] transceiverEquipment DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the transceiverEquipment object is locked.

hardwareRef Class 2 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Hardware reference of a TCB. Check BSS upgrade file. [0 to 65535] transcoderBoard DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the transcoderBoard object is locked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2166

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

hexa text Description :

V12 Transcription in hexadecimal of the contents of a short message. The content of the hexa text parameter is displayed when using the command Display hexa. It cannot be modified by the user. Only the content of the text parameter can be modified by the user. Refer to the text (short message) entry in the Dictionary. [chain of characters] short message Display hexa DI

Value range : Object : Type :

hoMargin Class 3 H2 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Margin to use for PBGT handovers to avoid subsequent handover, in PBGT formula [63 to 63] dB adjacentCellHandOver 4 DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. V11

hoMarginBeg Class 3 H3 Description :

Margin to be added to hoMargin until rxLevHreqave for early handover mechanism in order to compensate the lack of measurements This parameter is coupled with hoMargin and rxLevHreqaveBeg. [63 to 63] dB bts 4 DP [M] : The parent bsc is unlocked. [M] : This parameter is inhibited when set to 63 dB. This parameter shall be set such as hoMargin hoMarginBeg This parameter is only available for DCU4 or DRX transceiver architecture.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Note :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2167

hoMarginDist Class 3 H4 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Margin to be used for Distance Handovers [63 to 63] dB adjacentCellHandOver 24 dB DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

V8

hoMarginRxLev Class 3 H5 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Margin to be used for signal strength Handovers [63 to 63] dB adjacentCellHandOver 24 dB DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

V8

hoMarginRxQual Class 3 H6 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Margin to be used for Signal Quality Handovers [63 to 63] dB adjacentCellHandOver 24 dB DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

V8

hoMarginTiering Class 3 Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type :

V12

Hysteresis between the uCirDLH and lCirDLH tiering thresholds to avoid pingpong handovers (expressed in dB) [0 to 63] dB handOverControl Automatic Cell Tiering (TF995V12) 4 dB DP

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2168

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

hoMarginTrafficOffset Class 3 H7 Description :

V12

Minimum signal strength margin with the serving cell that allows to select the best neighbor cell when a handover is triggered for overload reasons [0 to 63] dB adjacentCellHandOver 0 dB Handover for traffic reasons (TF132 V12) DP [C/M]: This attribute must be in the range [0 63]. [C/M]: When set to 0, the handovers for traffic reasons are not allowed in the adjacent cell. [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks :

Note :

This attribute only applies to BTSs equipped with non mixed DCU4 or DRX boards. V12

HOPingpongCombination Class3 H8 Description :

List of couples of causes (HOInitialCause and HONonEssentialCause) indicating the causes of pingpong handovers in the overlapping areas The following causes are defined with regard to the neighboring cell: HOInitialCause indicates the essential handover cause which leads to enter the neighbor cell (cause of incoming handover). HONonEssentialCause indicates the nonessential handover cause which leads to leave the cell (cause of outgoing handover). This parameter defines the combination for which the HOPingpongTimeRejection attribute is used.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2169

Value range : Object : Type : Feature : Checks : Restrictions :

[rxQual, rxLev, distance, powerBudget, capture, directedRetry, OaM, traffic, all, allCapture, allPowerBudget] adjacentCellHandOver DP General protection (TF821V12) [M]: against pingpong handovers

The parent bsc object is unlocked.

For the moment the essential and non essential causes taken into account are the following: Only rxQual and rxLev causes apply to HOInitialCause. Only powerBudget and capture causes apply to HONonEssentialCause.

Notes :

The HOPingpongCombination list can hold up to 4 couples of causes. allCapture cause (only applying to HONonEssentialCause)matches the capture cause for all the microcells belonging to the current macrocell . This cause has to be used in order to prevent pingpong handovers between micro and macrolayers. allPowerBudget cause (only applying to HONonEssentialCause) matches the powerBudget cause for all the neighboring cells of the current cell. This cause is used in order to restore the Minimum time between handovers (feature TF218).

HOPingpongTimeRejection Class 3 H9 Description : Time before a new handover attempt can be triggered

V12

Refer to bsc object timeBetweenHOConfiguration and bts object bts time between HO configuration attributes in this Dictionary of Parameters for this timer activation. Refer to adjacentCellHandOver object HOPingpongCombination attribute in this Dictionary of Parameters for the combinations for which this timer applies. To avoid pingpong handovers this new timer is started after a successful handover. Up to the expiration of this timer, the receipt of HANDOVER INDICATION message is ignored.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2170

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Checks :

[0 to 60] s adjacentCellHandOver [30 sec] General protection against pingpong handovers (TF821V12) [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

hoppingSequenceNumber Class 2 F3 Description : Hopping sequence number used by a radio time slot which obeys frequency hopping laws. Select different HSNs for nearby cells that use the same set of frequencies. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 63] frequencyHoppingSystem DP [M]: If the frequencyHoppingSystem object is referenced by a channel object (fhsRef attribute defined), the parent bsc object is unlocked and the associated bts object is locked. V9

HOSecondBestCellConfiguration Class 3 H10 Description :

Number of neighbor cells in which the BSC immediately attempts to perform a new handover when the previous handover attempt failed with return to the old channel Giving the attribute a value greater than 2 allows the BSC to renew the handover request without waiting for a new set of radio measurements (the first attempt is included in this count). The same list of neighbor eligible cells is used to process the request (no new list is provided by the BTS).

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

[1 to 3] bsc 3 DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2171

hoTraffic Class 3 H11 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Feature : Checks : Note :

V12

Whether handovers for traffic reasons at bsc level are allowed. [disabled / enabled] bsc disabled DP Handover for traffic reasons (TF132 V12) [M]: The bsc object is unlocked. Enabling this parameter allows the related BTSs with DCU4 or DRX transceiver architecture handle handovers for traffic reasons. V12

hoTraffic Class 3 H12 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Feature : Checks : Note :

Whether handovers for traffic reasons at bts level are allowed. [disabled / enabled] bts enabled DP Handover for traffic reasons (TF132 V12) [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. This attribute is only available for DCU4 or DRX transceiver architecture.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2172

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

I
identifier Description : Identifier of a short message. It allows MSs to identify the short message and discard it if already received. Short message identifiers are assigned by the network operator. [0 to 65535] short message DP

Value range : Object : Type : identifier Description :

Name of a BSS software application followed by its version number Refer to the eft entry related to the software object in the Dictionary where the name formats are explained. [XXXabcdef] software Display markers DD

Value range : Object : Type : identifier Description :

Name of a BSC database configuration file followed by its version number Refer to the eft entry related to the software object in the Dictionary where the name formats are explained. [BSxabvcdefgh] softwarebsc Display markers DD V13 Identifier of the iem object class. This identifier is allocated by the MDR at object creation, depending on the shelf and slot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attribute cannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC e3 and TCU e3. [0 to 2147483646] iem DP

Value range : Object : Type : iemId Description :

Value range : Object : Type :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2173

iMSIAttachDetach Class 2 Description : Whether MS attachment/detachment is allowed. Allowing enables the system to take into account temporary MS absence to prevent unsuccessful call attempts. [allowed / not allowed] bts allowed DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the bts object is locked.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : inactivity timeout Description : Value range : Object : Type : Remark :

Maximum time between two user commands, over which the system induces an automatic logout procedure [2 to 2147483646] (5) minute user profile DP Moving the mouse inside an MMI window on the terminal screen resets the counter. V12

inclusive interval of codano Description :

To select messages according to their fault number. The filtering list can contain one (or several) interval(s). For example, interval 5~8 enables to retrieve fault numbers 5, 6, 7, and 8. Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. [0 to 65535 0 to 65535] Alarm and notification logs Filter DP V12

Value range : Object : Type :

inclusive list of codano Description :

To select messages according to their fault number. The filter can contain one (or several) fault number(s). Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. [0 to 65535] Alarm and notification logs Filter DP

Value range : Object : Type :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2174

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

incomingHandOver Class 3 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : inhibitRequest Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Remark : Whether the SS7 channel should be inhibited [true / false] signallingLink Set inhibit DP [M]: The parent bsc object and the signallingLink object are unlocked. An inhibit request may have no immediate effect and can even be refused. Run a Display all command on the signallingLink objet to display the resource state of the SS7 channel and check that the system has applied the request (signallingLinkResState). V13 Identifier of an in object class. This identifier is allocated by the MDR at object creation. The only value allocated by the MDR is 0. This attribute cannot be modified. [0 to 0] in DP V9 Whether incoming handovers are allowed in a cell [enabled / disabled] handOverControl enabled DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

inId Description :

Value range : Object : Type :

interBscDirectedRetry Class 3 I1 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Note :

Whether inter-bss directed retry handovers are allowed in a BSS [allowed / not allowed] bsc allowed DP [M]: The bsc object is unlocked. Queuing must also be activated at BSC level.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2175

interBscDirectedRetryFromCell Class 3 I2 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Note :

V9

Whether inter-bss directed retry handovers are allowed in a cell [allowed / not allowed] bts allowed DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. Queueing must also be activated at BSC level.

interCellHOExtPriority Class 3 I3 Description : Index in the allocPriorityTable that defines the processing priority of incoming inter-bss handovers in a cell This priority is used when radio resource allocation queueing is not requested by the MSC or not authorized in the BSS (refer to the bscQueueingOption entry in the Dictionary). Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [0 to 17] bts 17 DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

interCellHOIntPriority Class 3 I4 Description : Index in the allocPriorityTable that defines the processing priority of incoming intra-bss handovers in a cell This priority is always used, whether radio resource allocation queueing is authorized in the BSS or not. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [0 to 17] bts 17 DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2176

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

interferenceType Class 3 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks : Type of interference created by neighbour cell [notApplicable / adjacent / coChannel] adjacentCellHandOver notApplicable Automatic Cell Tiering (TF995V12) DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

V12

interferer cancel algo usage Class 2 I5 Description :

V10

Correlation ratio of the input signals received from the normal and diversity antennas. This ratio enables to adapt the SPU software (the interferer cancellation algorithm) to the propagation conditions. Correlation ratio = 0 means that the interferer cancellation algorithm is inactive. [0 to 100] % bts 0 DP [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked and the bts object is locked

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

internal DMUX alarm state Description : Value range : State of the BSC chain equipment controlled by the ECI board by means of alarm loops The following is a list of equipment in alphabetical order: Control bay extractor . . . . . . . . . [all working / one failed] Control bay extractor power supply . . . . [all working / one failed] EQP fans . . . . . . . . [all working / one failed] MPU converters . . . [all working / one failed] MPU converter

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2177

(other channel) . . . . [all working / one failed] MPU fan power supply . . . . . . . . . . . [all working / one failed] MPU fans . . . . . . . . [all working / one failed] RCB0 . . . . . . . . . . . [present / absent] RCB1 . . . . . . . . . . . [present / absent] RCB2 . . . . . . . . . . . [present / absent] Right MPU converter . . . . . . . . [all working / one failed] SWD converter . . . [all working / one failed] BSC 2000 EQPD converter . . . [all working / one failed] EQPM converter . . [all working / one failed] EQPM EQPD fan . . [all working / one failed] BSC 12000/6000 EQPD0 converter . . [all working / one failed] EQPD0 EQPD1 EQPI shelves fans . [all working / one failed] EQPD1 converter . . [all working / one failed] EQPI converter . . . [all working / one failed] EQPT fans . . . . . . . [all working / one failed] EQPT and SWG shelf fans . . . . . . . . [all working / one failed] RCB3 . . . . . . . . . . . [present / absent] Object : Type : Note : RCB4 . . . . . . . . . . . [present / absent] bsc Display chain information DD This parameter is only available for BSC 2G

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2178

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

internal DMUX state Description : Value range : Internal state of the BSC chain ECI board [working / fault] working . . . . . . . . . The board has been successfully initialized. Object : Type : Note : fault . . . . . . . . . . . . A fault was detected on the board. bsc Display chain information DD This parameter is only available for BSC 2G

internal PCM states Description : State of the internal PCM links of the BSC chain. Each link is identified by a serial number: [0 to 15] (BSC type 1), [0 to 31] (BSC types 2, 3, 4), [0 to 63] (BSC type 5.). [working / fault] working . . . . . . . . . The internal PCM link is working. Object : Type : fault . . . . . . . . . . . . A fault was detected on the link. bsc Display chain information DD

Value range :

internal switching matrix Description : Value range : State of the BSC chain switching unit [working / fault)] working . . . . . . . . . The switching boards are correctly initialized. fault . . . . . . . . . . . . A fault was detected on a switching board. bsc Display chain information DD

Object : Type :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2179

interOmuEtherlinkOper Description : Operational state of the inner OMU Ethernet link. This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS. Value changes are not notified to the manager. ISO operational state This attribute is relevant for 3G BSC. Value range : Object : Type : Feature : [disabled / enabled] cn DD AR 1209 V13.1

V13

intraBscDirectedRetry Class 3 I6 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Note :

V9

Whether intra-bss directed retry handovers are allowed in a BSS [allowed / not allowed] bsc allowed DP [M]: The bsc object is unlocked.

Queueing must also be activated at BSC level. V9

intraBscDirectedRetryFromCell Class 3 I7 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Note :

Whether intra-bss directed retry handovers are allowed in a cell [allowed / not allowed] bts allowed DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

Queueing must also be activated at BSC level.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2180

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

intraCell Class 3 I8 Description : Value range : Whether intra-bts handovers on TCH are allowed in a cell for interference reasons or Cell Tiering reasons [cellTieringHandover/ intraCellHandover / handoverNotAllowed] cellTieringHandover: the intrabts handovers are allowed for CellTiering reason intraCellHandover: the intrabts handovers are allowed for interference reason handoverNotAllowed: the intra bts handovers are not allowed handOverControl Automatic Cell Tiering (TF995V12) handoverNotAllowed DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Checks :

intraCellHOIntPriority Class 3 I9 Description : Index in the allocPriorityTable that defines the processing priority of an intra-bts handover in a cell This priority is always used, whether radio resource allocation queueing is authorized in the BSS or not. [0 to 17] bts 17 DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

intraCellQueueing Class 3 I10 Description : Whether intra-bts handover requests are queued for a cell. This parameter is significant only when queuing radio resource allocation requests is allowed in the BSS. Refer to the bscQueueingOption entry in the Dictionary. [enabled / disabled] bts disabled DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2181

intraCellSDCCH Class 3 I11 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

V8

Whether intra-bts handovers on SDCCH are authorized in a cell for interference reasons [enabled / disabled] handOverControl disabled DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2182

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

J
job Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : jobResult Description : Identifier (name) of the associated job on the OMCR A result file stores the commands that are executed and the system responses to those commands during the associated job successive runs, beginning with the first run. Value range : Object : Type : [case sensitive] jobResult Id Identifier (name) of a job on the OMCR [case sensitive, unlimited number of characters]. The . and / characters are forbidden. job Id [M/D]: The job is created on the OMCR.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2183

L
label Description : Label of an archive cartridge When a label is set, all information already stored on the cartridge is lost. Value range : Object : [case sensitive, 64 characters max] md, omc Display label md, omc Set label md, omc Archive md, omc Restore md, omc Display archive list DP

Type : language Description :

Language in which a short message is broadcast The information is used in the data coding scheme when the short message is broadcast.

Value range :

Object : Type :

[German / English / Italian / French / Spanish / Dutch / Danish / Portuguese / Finnish / Norwegian / Data / Multi Byte Character Set / unspecified] short message DP

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2184

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

lapdConcentration Description : Value range : Object : Type : Feature : Checks : Whether information concentration is authorized on a LAPD link [enabled / disabled] lapdLink DP GPRS (SV407 V12) [C]: The attribute value can be enabledor disabled if the link carries BTS signaling on the Abis interface in a BSS that manages BTS LAPD signaling concentration. The attribute value is enabled if the link carries TCU signaling on the Ater interface. The attribute value is disabled if the link carries PCU signaling on the Agprs interface. This attribute cannot be modified.

[C]: [C]: Restrictions : Note : [M]:

This parameter is only available for BSC 2G

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2185

lapdLink Description : Identifier of an lapdLink object defined with regard to a bsc object In all MMI commands, an LAPD link can be referenced by bscName.lapdLink where bscName is a permanent attribute of the parent bsc object that identifies it by name. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 2147483646] lapdLink Id [C]: The number of LAPD links per BSC is limited to 841. Fourteen links can be assigned to the TCUs on the Ater interface or to the PCU on the Agprs interface, 147 links can be assigned to the radio sites on the Abis interface, and the remaining links can be assigned to the TRX/DRXs on the Abis interface, with two links per TRX/DRX. The software object related to the parent bsc object is created. The number of lapdLlink objects dependent on the same bsc object that use the same lapdTerminalNumber is limited to maxTeiPerLapdCh (static configuration data). All lapdLlink objects dependent on the same bsc object that use the same lapdTerminalNumber have identical associatedInterface and lapdConcentration attributes.

[C]: [C]:

[C]:

[C/D]: If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked. [D]: If the application database of the related BSC is not built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command. No btsSiteManager, transceiverEquipment, or transcoder objects refer to the lapdLink object.

[D]: Remark :

An lapdLink object has no administrativeState of its own; its operationalState depends on the administrativeState of the parent bsc object.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2186

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

lapdLinkCallPLoad Description :

V13

Number of lapdLink object instances used by the Call Processing on the Ater interface. This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS. It is set to NULL at object creation. Value changes are not notified to the Manager. [0 to 65535] transcoder3GEqpt DP

Value range : Object : Type :

lapdLinkOMLRef Class 2 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Identifier of the lapdLink object with sapi = OML referenced by the btsSiteManager object [0 to 2147483646] btsSiteManager DP [C/M]: The referenced lapdLink object depends on the same bsc object as the btsSiteManager object, it is assigned to the Abis interface (associatedInterface), its sapi attribute value is OML. [C/M]: The number of objects dependent on a bsc object that refer to lapdLink objects using the same lapdTerminalNumber is limited to maxTeiPerLapdCh (static configuration data). [C]: The number of LAPD channels used by a site and the related TRX/DRXs is limited to maxLapdChPerBtsSM (static configuration data).

[C/M]: If the lapdLink object lapdConcentration attribute value is enabled, the defined lapdTerminalNumber is used by no more than four btsSiteManager objects dependent on the same bsc object. [C/M]: If the lapdLink object lapdConcentration attribute value is disabled, the defined lapdTerminalNumber is not used. [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsSiteManager object is locked.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2187

lapdLinkOMLRef Class 2 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Identifier of the lapdLink object with sapi = OML referenced by the transceiverEquipment object [0 to 2147483646] transceiverEquipment DP [C]: The number of LAPD channels used by a site and its related TRX/DRXs is limited to maxLapdChPerBtsSM (static configuration data). [C/M]: The referenced lapdLink objects depend on the same bsc object as the transceiverEquipment object, they are assigned to the Abis interface (associatedInterface), they use the same lapdTerminalNumber, their sapi attribute matches the type of use (OML or RSL). [C/M]: The number of btsSiteManager and transceiverEquipment objects dependent on a bsc object that refer to lapdLink objects using the same lapdTerminalNumber is limited to maxTeiPerLapdCh (static configuration data). [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked, the parent btsSiteManager object and the transceiverEquipment object are locked.

lapdLinkOMLRef Class 0 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Identifier of the lapdLink object with sapi = OML referenced by the transcoder object [0 to 2147483646] transcoder DP [C/M]: The referenced lapdLink object depends on the same bsc object as the transcoder object, it is assigned to the Ater interface (associatedInterface = Ater), its sapi attribute value is OML. [M]: The application database of the parent BSC is not built (bdaState = not built). This parameter is only available for BSC 2G

Note :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2188

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

lapdLinkRSLRef Class 2 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Identifier of the lapdLink object with sapi = RSL referenced by the transceiverEquipment object [0 to 2147483646] transceiverEquipment DP [C]: The number of LAPD channels used by a site and its related TRX/DRXs is limited to maxLapdChPerBtsSM (static configuration data).

[C/M]: The referenced lapdLink objects depend on the same bsc object as the transceiverEquipment object, they are assigned to the Abis interface (associatedInterface), they use the same lapdTerminalNumber, their sapi attribute matches the type of use (OML or RSL). [C/M]: The number of btsSiteManager and transceiverEquipment objects dependent on a bsc object that refer to lapdLink objects using the same lapdTerminalNumber is limited to maxTeiPerLapdCh (static configuration data). [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked, the parent btsSiteManager object and the transceiverEquipment object are locked.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2189

lapdTerminalNumber Class 0 L1 Description : BSC SICD port assigned to the LAPD link lapdTerninalNumber = 4 x number of the mother SICD4 board [0 to 9] + port number [0 to 3] lapdTerninalNumber = 8 x number of the mother SICD8 board [0 to 4] + port number [0 to 7] Value range : [0 to 7] (BSC type 1) [0 to 15] (BSC type 2) [0 to 23] (BSC type 3) [0 to 31] (BSC type 4) [0 to 39] (BSC type 5) For BSC e3 value range = [0 to inf] lapdLink GPRS (SV407 V12) DP [C/M] : The number of SICD ports in a BSC depends on its type, knowing that a SICD board manages four ports and a SICD8V board manages eight ports.
BSC type SICD ports T1 8 T2 16 T3 24 T4 32 T5 40

Note : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks :

[M] : [M] : [M] : [M]:

If the port is used by an Abis interface LAPD link, it cannot be used for TCU and PCU signaling. If the port is used by an Ater interface LAPD link, it cannot be used for BTS and PCU signaling. If the port is used by an Agprs interface LAPD link, it cannot be used for BTS and TCU signaling. The number of btsSiteManager and transceiverEquipment objects dependent on a bsc object that refer to lapdLink objects using the same lapdTerminalNumber is limited to maxTeiPerLapdCh (static configuration data). The application database of the parent BSC is not built (bdaState = not built).

[M]:

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2190

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

layer3MsgCyphModComp Class 1 Description :

V8

Whether the Layer 3 message element is used in the CYPHER MODE COMPLETE messages (Phase II compliance) [true / false] signallingPoint False DP [M]: The parent bsc object is locked.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Level to process Description :

Identifier of a set of SDO resultant data files. Level 1 identifies the latest set produced by the SDO machine. As many as three sets of resultant data files created from the same workstation can exist in the SDO machine. Any one can be selected for report display or purge purposes. [1, 2, 3] Call monitoring Display/Management) (SDO) DP [A]: The set of files exists in the SDO machine. V9

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

lightning protection Class 2 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : line Description : Line number of the first command to run (default is 1)

Presence or absence of the optional equipment lightning arrester in S8000 Outdoor [Present / Absent] btsSiteManager DP [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsSiteManager object is locked

Value range : Object : Type :

Every command in a command file is assigned a line number. Line no.1 corresponds to the first recorded command, line no.n corresponds to the last recorded command. [1 to 2147483646] commandFile Run DP

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2191

locationAreaCode Class 3 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Code of a location area of the neighbor cell in the PLMN [0 to 65535] adjacentCellHandOver DP [C/M]: A CGI is unique in the set including a serving cell and its neighbor cells. [M]: locationAreaCode Class 3 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Code of a location area of the neighbor cell in the PLMN [0 to 65535] adjacentCellReselection DP [C/M]: A CGI is unique in the set including a serving cell and its neighbor cells. [M]: locationAreaCode Class 2 Description : Code of a location area in the PLMN A CGI (Cell Global Identifier) is unique in a location area. It identifies a cell in the PLMN and includes four fields: cellIdentity (CI), locationAreaCode (LAC), mobileCountryCode (MCC), and mobileNetworkCode (MNC). Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 65535] bts DP [C/M]: A CGI is unique in the set including a serving cell and its neighbor cells. [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the bts object is locked. The parent bsc object is unlocked. The parent bsc object is unlocked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2192

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

log Description : Identifier of a log object defined with regard to the md object. It is assigned by the OMCR agent. The current alarm log is no.1. Current observations logs are created inascending numerical order each time a new mdScanner object is created. Current trace logs are created in ascending numerical order each time a new callPathTrace or traceControl object is created. A restored log is created each time a Restore command on the md object related to faults, observations, or trace data is run. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 2147483646] log Id (on observation and trace logs) [D]: Restrictions : Notes : The observation or the associated trace function is stopped.

[D]: The log object describing the current alarm log cannot be deleted. The log objects are created by the OMCR agent and can be deleted by users under certain conditions (see above). The attributes of the log objects are not managed by users.

logFullAction Description : Action taken by the OMCR agent in case of storage directory capacity threshold overflow The value wrap means that messages may be purged; the value halt means that further messages are not saved. Refer to the capacityAlarmThreshold entry in the Dictionary. Value range : Object : Type : Note : [wrap (alarm log) / halt (observation or trace log)] log Display DP The attributes of the log objects are not managed by users.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2193

longTbfLossThroughput Class 3 (gprsBtsExtendedConf) Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Default value : Checks :

V12

Loss of throughput for long TBF in percentage of allocated bandwidth. Prioritize normal transfer over long data transfer. [0 to 100] in % bts GPRS (SV407 V12) DP 0 [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. V12

longTbfSizeThreshold Class 3 (gprsBtsExtendedConf) Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Default value : Checks :

Threshold for long TBF size, in Kbytes. This parameter is used in the functionality which penalizes long TBF. [1 to 65535] bts GPRS (SV407 V12) DP 100 [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

lRxLevDLH Class 3 L2 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Signal strength threshold in BTS-to-MS direction, below which a handover may be triggered [less than 110, 110 to 109, ... , 49 to 48, more than 48] dBm handOverControl 101 to 100 dBm (GSM 900) 99 to 98 dBm (GSM1800/1900) DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2194

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

lRxLevDLP Class 3 L3 Description : Signal strength threshold in BTS-to-MS direction, below which the power control function increases power. It is lower than uRxLevDLP. [less than 110, 110 to 109, ... , 49 to 48, more than 48] dBm powerControl 95 to 94 dBm DP [M]: [M]: [M]: Note :
lRxLevDLP + powerIncrStepSize uRxLevDLP uRxLevDLP powerRedStepSize lRxLevDLP

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

The parent bsc object is unlocked.

The powerIncrStepSize, powerRedStepSize, and uRxLevDLP parameters are ignored when the BTS uses the advanced one shot power control algorithm.

lRxLevULH Class 3 L4 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Signal strength threshold in MS-to-BTS direction, below which a handover may be triggered [less than 110, 110 to 109, ... , 49 to 48, more than 48] dBm handOverControl 101 to 100 dBm (GSM 900) 99 to 98 dBm (GSM 1800/1900) DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2195

lRxLevULP Class 3 L5 Description : Signal strength threshold in MS-to-BTS direction, below which the power control function increases power. It is lower than uRxLevULP. [less than 110, 110 to 109, ... , 49 to 48, more than 48] dBm powerControl 95 to 94 dBm DP [M]: [M]: [M]: Note :
lRxLevULP + powerIncrStepSize uRxLevULP uRxLevULP powerRedStepSize lRxLevULP

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

The parent bsc object is unlocked.

The powerIncrStepSize, powerRedStepSize, and uRxLevULP parameters are ignored when the BTS uses the advanced one shot power control algorithm.

lRxQualDLH Class 3 L6 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Feature : Checks : Bit error rate threshold in BTS-to-MS direction, above which an inter cell handover may be triggered [less than 0.2, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.4 to 0.8, ... , 6.4 to 12.8, more than 12.8] % handOverControl 1.6 to 3.2 % DP Intracell handover enhancements (TF819 V12) [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2196

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

lRxQualDLP Class 3 L7 Description : Bit error rate threshold in BTS-to-MS direction, above which the power control function increases power. It is greater than or equal to uRxQualDLP. [less than 0.2, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.4 to 0.8, ... , 6.4 to 12.8, more than 12.8] % powerControl 0.4 to 0.8 DP [C/M]: lRxQualDLP uRxQualDLP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. The uRxQualDLP parameter is ignored when the BTS uses the advanced one shot power control algorithm.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Note :

lRxQualULH Class 3 L8 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Feature : Checks : Bit error rate threshold in MS-to-BTS direction, above which an inter cell handover may be triggered [less than 0.2, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.4 to 0.8, ... , 6.4 to 12.8, more than 12.8] % handOverControl 1.6 to 3.2 % DP Intracell handover enhancements (TF819 V12) [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

lRxQualULP Class 3 L9 Description : Bit error rate threshold in MS-to-BTS direction, above which the power control function increases power. It is greater than or equal to uRxQualULP. [less than 0.2, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.4 to 0.8, ... , 6.4 to 12.8, more than 12.8] % powerControl 0.4 to 0.8 DP [C/M]: lRxQualULP uRxQualULP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. The uRxQualULP parameter is ignored when the BTS uses the advanced one shot power control algorithm.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Note :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2197

lsaRcId Description :

V13 Identifier of the lasRc object class. This identifier is allocated by the MDR at object creation, depending on the shelf and slot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attribute cannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC e3 and TCU e3. [0 to 2147483646] lsaRc DP V13 Pointer to the associated lsaRc object instance. This attribute cannot be modified. It is set at iem creation as indicated by the BSS.

Value range : Object : Type :

lsaRc Reference
Description :

Value range : Object : Feature :

[0 to 2147483646] iem AR 1209 V13.1

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2198

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

M
machine name Description : Name of the machine (terminal or server), as defined in its profile for a terminal, in which the job is run (default is the logged-in users terminal). Enter server for the OMCR server console. [case sensitive] job DP [C/M]: The machine is authorized to run jobs.

Value range : Object : Type : Checks : machine name Description :

Name of the machine, as defined in its profile for a terminal, in which the associated job was run (server identifies the OMCR server) jobResult DD

Object : Type :

mainNetworkBand Description : Value range : maio Class 2 M1 Description : Index in the list of frequencies allotted to a radio time slot which obeys frequency hopping laws. Setting this attribute, together with the fhsRef attribute, allows the time slot to obey frequency hopping laws. This offset allows to differentiate channel objects that reference frequencyHoppingSystem objects with identical attributes (orthogonality principle). Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to N1] N is the number of frequencies ( 64) allotted to the time slot. channel DP [C/M]: The attribute is in the range [0 to 63]. Indicates the main network band. [900/1800] network band

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2199

[C/M]: It is undefined if frequency hopping is not allowed for the parent bts object (btsIsHopping = no hopping) or the channelType of the channel object is mainBCCH, mainBCCHCombined, or bcchSdcch4CBCH. [C/M]: If the attribute is defined, the fhsRef attribute is also defined. [C/M]: If the attribute is defined, its value is lower than the number of frequencies defined in the mobileAllocation list (attribute of the referenced frequencyHoppingSystem object). [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the parent bts object is locked. managedObjectClass Description : Value range : Object class referenced [adjacentCellHandOver / adjacentCellReselection / bsc / bscMdInterface / bts / btsSiteManager / callPathTrace / channel / efd / frequencyHoppingSystem / handOverControl / lapdLink / log / md / mdScanner / mdWarning / pcmCircuit / powerControl / signallingLink / signallingLinkSet / signallingPoint / software / traceControl / transceiver / transceiverEquipment / transceiverZone / transcoder / transcoderBoard / xtp] alarmRecord, mdScanReportRecord, observationFileReadyRecord, stateChangeRecord, traceFileReadyRecord, traceLogRecord DP

Object :

Type :

managedObjectInstance Description : Object : Identification of an object in the class alarmRecord, mdScanReportRecord, observationFileReadyRecord, stateChangeRecord, traceFileReadyRecord, traceLogRecord DP

Type :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2200

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

Manager address type Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Manager addresses Description : Object : Type : Restrictions : managerServer Description : Name of the active OMCR agent server. It is provided by the OMCR agent. This server is referred to as the NMC server in the Q3 names of the permanent md observation counters related to the OMCR agent active server. md Display DP Addresses of the OMCR manager that receives the messages. They are provided by the manager. efd Display DP [C/M]: This attribute is not managed by users. OMCR manager address type [internal / external] efd Display DP [C/M]: This attribute is not managed by users

Object : Type :

manufacturerIntervention Description : Value range : Object : Type : Type of action associated with an alarm criterion in the manufacturer configuration [noAlarm / critical / major / minor] alarm criteria DP

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2201

marking type Description : Type of software to consult Selecting prom allows to display the software applications loaded in PROMs in the selected BSS entity. Selecting soft allows to display the software applications loaded in the processors of the selected BSS entity. Value range : Object : Type : max log size Description : Object : Type : Remark : Maximum log size expressed in bytes log Display DP The attributes of the log objects are not managed by the users [prom / soft] software Display markers DP

maxAdjCHOARMPerBts Description : Maximum number of neighbor cells associated with a serving cell for handover and reselection management (static OMCR configuration data) [32] OMCR DS

Value range : Object : Type :

maxBscPerNetwork Description : Value range : Object : Type : Maximum number of BSCs handled by an OMCR (static OMCR configuration data) [20] OMCR DS

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2202

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

maxBsTransmitPowerInnerZone Class 3 (gprsBtsExtendedConf ) Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Checks : maxBtsPerBtsSM Description : Value range : Object : Type :

V12

Maximum level of BTS transmission power in the inner zone of a dualband cell [2 to 51] bts GPRS (SV407 V12) 2, 10 DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

Maximum number of radio cells controlled by a site (static OMCR configuration data) [6 (BTS conventional) / 4 (others)] OMCR DS

maxBtsPerNetwork Description : Value range : Object : Type : Maximum number of radio cells controlled by an OMCR (static OMCR configuration data) [3200] OMCR DS V12

maxDnTbfP1P2Threshold Class 3 (gprsBtsExtendedConf) Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Checks :

Maximum number of downlink TBF on a P1 TDMA before selection of P2 TDMA [1 to 32] bts GPRS (SV407 V12) 16 [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2203

maxDnTbfPerTs Class 3 (gprsBtsExtendedConf) Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Default value : Checks :

V12

Maximum number of downlink TBF per TDMA on a timeslot basis [1 to 8] bts GPRS (SV407 V12) DP 8 [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. V12

maxDwAssign Class 3 (gprsBtsExtendedConf) Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Default value : Checks :

Maximum number of Immediate Assignment messages per second. [1 to 32] blocks bts GPRS (SV407 V12) DP 8 [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

Because no TS partitioning is implemented in GPRS V12.4 b release, the number of maximum TBF establishment cannot exceed the number of TS configured in the cell. Recommended value has to be set to the number of PDTCH configured in the cell. maxFileSize Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Maximum size of the call path tracing data file in the BSC [30 to 500] kbytes callPathTrace DP [M]: The callPathTrace object is locked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2204

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

maximum acknowledgment time Description : To select messages acknowledged at that time or before Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. [<date>,<time>] Alarm logs Filter DP [A]: It is after minimum acknowledgment time when filled in.

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

maximum alarm number Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : To select alarms with a number lower than or equal to that one Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. [0 to 2147483646] Alarm logs Filter DP [A]: It is greater than or equal to minimum alarm number when filled in.

maximum clear time Description : To select alarms cleared at that time or before Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. [<date>,<time>] Cleared alarm log Filter DP [A]: It is after minimum clear time when filled in.

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

maximum event time Description : To select messages issued at that time or before Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. [<date>,<time>] Alarm and notification logs Filter DP [A]: It is after minimum event time when filled in.

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2205

maximum MD notification number Description : To select OMCR agent notifications with a number lower than or equal to that one Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. [0 to 2147483646] Alarm and notification logs Filter DP [A]: It is greater than or equal to minimum MD notification number when filled in.

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

maximum OMC notification number Description : To select OMCR manager notifications with a number lower than or equal to that one Do not fill in if this criteria is not to be selected. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 2147483646] Alarm and notification logs Filter DP [A]: It is greater than or equal to minimum OMC notification number when filled in.

maximum reception time Description : To select messages received at that time or before Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. [<date>,<time>] Alarm and notification logs Filter DP [A]: It is after minimum reception time when filled in.

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

maxLapdChPerBtsSM Description : Value range : Object : Type : Maximum number of LAPD channels used by a radio site (static OMCR configuration data) [6] OMCR DS

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2206

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

maxNbrConsMess Description :

V13 Maximum number of messages stored in the BSC log files. This number is allocated by the MDR at object creation. This attribute can be modified only if the bsc object instance is locked. [1 to 7] bscLog DP

Value range : Object : Type :

maxNbOfCells Class 2 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Maximum number of radio cells controlled by a site [1 to maxBtsPerBtsSM] btsSiteManager DP [C/M]: The number of cells controlled by a site is limited to maxBtsPerBtsSM (refer to this entry in the Dictionary). [M]: This number is greater than or equal to the number of bts objects created for the btsSiteManager object. The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsSiteManager object is locked. V12

[M]:

maxNbrPDAAssig Class 2 (gprsTranscvLockExtendedConf) Description : Maximum number of:

Polling request messsages sent on PDCH after immediate assigment message has been sent on CCCH. PDAS messages on old TS when changing TS allocation before going into failure. Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks : [1 to 10] transceiver 5 GPRS (SV407 V12) DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the transceiver object is locked.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2207

maxNbrPUDWithoutVchange Class 2 (NN0002Max) gprsTranscvLockExtendedConf Description :

V12

Maximum number of PUAN (Packet Uplink Ack/Nack) consecutively sent without V(A) has changed (respectively, maximum number of PDAN (Packet Downlink Ack/Nack) consecutively sent without V(Q) has changed). [1 to 255] transceiver 10 GPRS (SV407 V12) DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the transceiver object is locked. V12

Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks :

maxNbrRLCEmptyBlock Class 2 (N3101Max) (gprsTranscvLockExtendedConf) Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks :

Maximum number of USF where no data is received in the UL direction [1 to 255] transceiver 10 GPRS (SV407 V12) DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the transceiver object is locked.

maxNumberRetransmission Class 3 M2 Description : Maximum number of RACH burst retransmissions allowed in a call in case of nonsystem response The information is broadcast to the mobiles at regular intervals on the cell BCCH. It defines the maximum number of times a mobile can renew access requests to the BTS on RACH. [one / two / four / seven] bts two DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2208

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

maxPcmCPerBtsSM Description : Value range : Object : Type : Maximum number of PCM links used by a radio site on the Abis interface (static OMCR configuration data) [6] OMCR DS

maxPcmCPerTranscd Description : Value range : Object : Type : maxRACH Class 3 Description : Value range : Maximum number of PCM links used by a remote transcoder on the A interface (static OMCR configuration data) [4] OMCR DS V12 Maximum number of RACH messages accepted by the PCU per second [0 to 15] blocks Range to be considered at the MMI is [0 to 15], which means for the PCU from 1 to 16 RACH per second. bts 0 GPRS (SV407 V12) DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks : maxRowCount Description : Value range : Object : Type :

Maximum number of information lines per table to access. 0 means accessing all data. The default value is 1000. [0 to 1000] Trace data display DP

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2209

maxSigLPerSigLS Description : Value range : Maximum number of SS7 channels linked to a BSC (static OMCR configuration data) [2 (BSC 6000 types 1, 2) 4 (BSC 6000 types 3, 4, 5) 2 (BSC 12000 type 1) 4 (BSC 12000 types 2, 3, 4) 6 (BSC 12000 type 5)] OMCR DS

Object : Type :

maxTeiPerLapdCh Description : Maximum number of TEI addresses allotted to a LAPD terminal (static OMCR configuration data) It defines the maximum number of LAPD links that can use the same SICD port in the BSC (lapdTerminalNumber attribute of the lapdLink objects). Value range : Object : Type : [15] OMCR DS

maxTranscdBPerTranscd Description : Value range : Object : Type : Maximum number of transcoding boards housed in a remote transcoder (static OMCR configuration data) [10 in a GSM 900, EGSM, GSMR or 1800 network 8 in a GSM 1900 network] OMCR DS

maxTranscdPerBsc Description : Value range : Object : Type : Maximum number of remote transcoders linked to a BSC (static OMCR configuration data) [7 (BSC 6000) / 12 (BSC 12000) for E1 PCMs 9 (BSC 6000 / 14 (BSC 12000) for T1 PCMs] OMCR DS

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2210

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

maxUpTbfP1P2Threshold Class 3 (gprsBtsExtendedConf) Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Default value : Checks :

V12

Maximum number of uplink TBF on a P1 TDMA before selection of P2 TDMA [1 to 32] bts GPRS (SV407 V12) DP 16 [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. V12

maxUpTbfPerTs Class 3 (gprsBtsExtendedConf) Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Default value : Checks : md Description :

Maximum number of uplink TBF per TDMA on a timeslot basis [1 to 8] bts GPRS (SV407 V12) DP 8 [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

Identifier of the md object that describes the OMCR agent. It is enforced by the system. The md object is unique to the OMCR. It is created when the system is started.

Value range : Object : Type :

[1] md Id

MD notification number Description : Value range : Object : Type : To select OMCR agent notifications with a given number [0 to 2147483646] Alarm and notification logs Filter DP

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2211

mdArchive Description : Whether archiving the observation messages processed is allowed The value of this attribute is not archived when mdScannerType = performance monitor (instrument panel observation) and archived otherwise. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : mdConfirm Description : Whether the observation messages processed should be acknowledged The value of this attribute is not confirmed when mdScannerType = performance monitor (instrument panel observation) and confirmed otherwise. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : mdFileName Description : Object : Type : Name of an observation file containing an elementary report. Refer to the naming rules to NTP < 07 >. mdScanReportRecord DP [confirmed (yes) / not confirmed (no)] mdScanner Display DP [C/M]: This attribute is not managed by users. [archived / not archived] mdScanner DP [M]: This attribute cannot be modified.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2212

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

mdGranularityPeriod Description : Value range : [5, 10, 15] minutes . . . . . . . permanent general md [15, 30, 60] minutes . . . . . . permanent general bsc (BSC) [15, 30, 60] minutes . . . . . . Fast Statistic Observation (OFS) [1440] minutes . . . . . . . . . . General Statistic Observation (OGS) [5, 10, 15] minutes . . . . . . . Diagnostic Observation (ODIAG) [1, 2, 3, 4, 5] minutes . . . . . performance monitor (Real Time Observation (ORT)) [5, 10, 15, 30, 60] minutes . Temporary Observation (TO) mdScanner DP [C/M]: The number of temporary observations running at the same time with a 5minute recovery period in the BSSs managed on the OMCR is limited to 50. [C/M]: The number of instrument panel observations running at the same time with a 1minute recovery period is limited to 10. [M]: This attribute cannot be modified if mdScannerType = temporary xxx. Stop the observation if necessary by deleting the concerned mdScanner object and create it back with a new observation period. Recovery period of the observation messages by the OMCR agent

Object : Type : Checks :

Restrictions :

mdGranularityPeriod Description : Value range : [5, 10, 15] minutes . . . . . . . permanent general md [15, 30, 60] minutes . . . . . . permanent general bsc (GPOBSC) [15, 30, 60] minutes . . . . . . Fast Statistic Observation (OFS) Recovery period of the observation messages by the OMCR agent

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2213

[1440] minutes . . . . . . . . . . General Statistic Observation (OGS) [15] minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Observation (ODIAG) [1, 2, 3, 4, 5] minutes . . . . . performance monitor (Instrument Panel (IPO) or Real Time Observation (ORT)) [5, 10, 15, 30, 60] minutes . Temporary (TO) mdScanReportRecord DP Observation

Object : Type :

mdGranularityPeriod Description : Value range : [5, 10, 15] minutes . . . . . . . permanent general md [15, 30, 60] minutes . . . . . . permanent general (GPOBSC) bsc Recovery period of the observation messages by the OMCR agent

[15, 30, 60] minutes . . . . . . Fast Statistic Observation (OFS) [1440] minutes . . . . . . . . . . General Statistic Observation (OGS) [15] minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Observation (ODIAG) [1, 2, 3, 4, 5] minutes . . . . . performance monitor (Instrument Panel (IPO) or Real Time Observation (ORT)) [5, 10, 15, 30, 60] minutes . Temporary (TO) Object : Type : observationFileReadyRecord DP Observation

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2214

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

mdId Description : Identifier of the md object that describes the OMCR agent. It is enforced by the system. This attribute allows users to identify the md object on the OMCR. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : mdLog Description : Whether the observation messages processed are saved on the OMCR agent disks The value of this attribute is not logged when mdScannerType = performance monitor (instrument panel observation) and logged otherwise. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : mdObjectList Description : Identification of the observed object. It depends on the type of the defined observation.
mdScannerType permanent general md permanent general bsc general statistic (OGS) fast statistic (OFS) performance monitor (IPO) real time (ORT) temporary interference* temporary signallingLink* md bsc bsc bsc bsc bsc bsc & btsSiteManager & bts bsc & signallingLink mdObjectList

[1] md Display DP [M]: This attribute is not managed by users.

[logged / not logged] mdScanner DP [M]: This attribute cannot be modified.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2215

mdScannerType temporary pcmCircuit* temporary handOver* temporary Abis Interface bts* diagnostic (ODIAG)

mdObjectList bsc & pcmCircuit bsc & btsSiteManager & bts bsc & btsSiteManager & bts bsc, bts, signallingLink, transcoder3G, transcoderEqpt, pcmPort, transceiverEqpt & btsSiteManager

Object : Type : Restrictions : mdObjectList Description : Object : Type : mdObjectList Description : Object : Type : mdScanner Description :

* This type only applies to V12 bscs mdScanner DP [M]: This attribute cannot be modified.

Identification of the observed object. It depends on the type of the defined observation. Display xxx report DP

Identification of the observed object. It depends on the type of the defined observation. List observation messages DP

Identifier of an mdScanner object defined with regard to the md object The mdScanner object class describes the OMCR agent and BSS observations. These objects are managed by the OMCR Performance Management function.

Value range : Object : Type :

[0 to 2147483646] mdScanner Id

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2216

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

Checks :

(performed only when the object describes a BSS observation) [C/M/D]: The application database of the BSC is not being built. [C/M/D]: If the application database of the BSC is not built, temporary observations cannot be managed. [C/M/D]: If the application database of the BSC is built, the BSS/OMCR link is established and no audit is in-progress in the BSC.

Remark :

Deleting an mdScanner object that describes a temporary observation is always possible if the observation duration has elapsed (stopTime = 0) and the stop TGE has been sent to the BSC.

mdScannerType Description : Value range : Type of the observation [general Statistic (V11+) / fast Statistic (V11+) / real Time (V11+) / diagnostic (V11+) / permanent general bsc (V10) / permanent general md / permanent general manager / performance monitor (IPO V10) / temporary interference / temporary signallingLink / temporary pcmCircuit (V10) / temporary handOver (V10) / temporary pair of bts (V8) / temporary Abis Interface bts] Display xxx report DP

Object : Type : mdScannerType Description : Value range :

Type of the observation [general Statistic (V11+) / fast Statistic (V11+) / real Time (V11+) / diagnostic (V11+) / permanent general bsc (V10) / permanent general md / permanent general manager / temporary interference / temporary signallingLink / temporary pcmCircuit (V10) / temporary handOver (V10) / temporary pair of bts (V8) / temporary Abis Interface bts] List observation messages DP

Object : Type :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2217

mdScannerType Description : Value range : Type of the observation [general Statistic (V11+) / fast Statistic (V11+) / real Time (V11+) / permanent general bsc / permanent general md / permanent general manager / performance monitor (instrument panel) (V10)] Load formulae DP

Object : Type : mdScannerType Description : Value range :

Type of the observation [general Statistic (V11+) / fast Statistic (V11+) / real Time (V11+) / diagnostic (V11+) / permanent general md / permanent general manager / temporary interference / temporary signallingLink / temporary pair of bts (V8) / temporary Abis Interface bts] mdScanner DP [C]: [M]: The defined observation is not running. This attribute cannot be modified.

Object : Type : Checks : Restrictions : Notes :

The permanent general md observation is unique to the OMCR. The permanent general bsc and Instrument Panel observations are unique to a BSS (V10). The OGS is unique to a BSS (V11+). The OFS is unique to a BSS (V11+). The ORT is unique to a BSS (V11+). A temporary observation of a given type or ODIAG (V11+) is unique to a BSS.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2218

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

mdStorageDuration Description : Storage duration of the observation messages processed on the OMCR agent disks Observation messages are kept on the OMCR agent disks for a limited period of time, provided the mdLog attribute of the associated log object is logged. They are automatically purged at regular intervals. The user will have to archive the observation data, should data analysis occur after the purge time set by static configuration. Value range : [N] hour. N is a static configuration data. Since instrument panel observation messages are not kept, N equals zero for the log objects that describe these observations. mdScanner DP [C/M]: This attribute is not managed by users.

Object : Type : Restrictions : mdTransferMode Description : Value range : Object : Type : Restrictions : mdWarning Description :

Service used by the OMCR agent to transmit the observation messages processed to the OMCR manager [FTAM (permanent general md and bsc observations) / CMIS (others)] mdScanner Display DP [C/M]: This attribute is not managed by users.

Identifier of a mdWarning object defined with regard to the md object The mdWarning object class describes the processing conditions of BSS alarms of outOfRangeCounter and excessiveAnomalyRate type. These objects are managed by the OMCR Fault Management function.

Value range : Object : Type :

[0 to 2147483646] mdWarning Id

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2219

measurementProcAlgorithm Class 2 Description : Value range : Whether the new L1M interface is used

V12

Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks : mergeEft Description :

[L1MV1, L1MV2] L1MV1: the older L1M is used L1MV2: the newer L1M is used bts L1MV1 L1M evolutions for advanced features support (TF1089V12) DP [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked and the bts object is locked.

Whether the EFT should be merged in an existing EFT The attribute value can only be True if the EFT contains a site BCF software. If the EFT exists on the OMCR agent disks, the following apply: If mergeEFT = True, the EFT is updated with the new DLU files. If mergeEFT = False, the command is refused. [true / false] md Create EFT DP

Value range : Object : Type : mergeEft Description :

Whether the EFT should be merged in an existing EFT The attribute value can only be True if the EFT contains a site BCF software. If the EFT exists on the OMCR agent disks, the following apply: If mergeEFT = True, the EFT is updated with the new DLU files. If mergeEFT = False, the command is refused. [true / false] md Validate EFT DP

Value range : Object : Type :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2220

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

mergeEft Description : Whether the EFT should be merged in an existing EFT The attribute value can only be True if the EFT contains a site BCF software. If the EFT exists on the OMCR agent disks, the following apply: If mergeEFT = True, the EFT is updated with the new DLU files. If mergeEFT = False, the command is refused. Value range : Object : Type : [true / false] omc Download and validate EFT from gigatape to md DP V8

microCellCaptureTimer Class 3 M3 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Condition : Type : Checks :

Time used to confirm a capture (signal strength stability) when using microcell Algorithm type A [0 to 255] multiple of <runHandOver> adjacentCellHandOver 0 To define if A handover algorithm is activated DP [C]: [M]: This attribute is defined if the described neighbor cell is a microcell (cellType = microType). The parent bsc object is unlocked.

microCellStability Class 3 M4 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Condition : Type : Checks : Strength Level Stability Criterion for Capture Algorithm A [0 to 255] dB adjacentCellHandOver 10 To define if A handover algorithm is activated DP [C]: [M]: This attribute is defined if the described neighbor cell is a microcell (cellType = microType). The parent bsc object is unlocked.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2221

minimum acknowledgment time Description : To select messages acknowledged at that time or after Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. [<date>,<time>] Alarm logs Filter DP [A]: It is before maximum acknowledgment time when filled in.

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

minimum alarm number Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : To select alarms with a number greater than or equal to that one Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. [0 to 2147483646] Alarm logs Filter DP [A]: It is lower than or equal to maximum alarm number when filled in.

minimum clear time Description : To select alarms cleared at that time or after Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. [<date>,<time>] Cleared alarm log Filter DP [A]: It is before maximum clear time when filled in.

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

minimum event time Description : To select messages issued at that time or after Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. [<date>,<time>] Alarm and notification logs Filter DP [A]: It is before maximum event time when filled in.

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2222

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

minimum MD notification number Description : To select OMCR agent notifications with a number greater than or equal to that one Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 2147483646] Alarm and notification logs Filter DP [A]: It is lower than or equal to maximum MD notification number when filled in.

minimum OMC notification number Description : To select OMCR manager notifications with a number greater than or equal to that one Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 2147483646] Alarm and notification logs Filter DP [A]: It is lower than or equal to maximum OMC notification number when filled in.

minimum reception time Description : To select messages received at that time or after Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [<date>,<time>] Alarm and notification logs Filter DP [A]: It is before maximum reception time when filled in.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2223

minNbOfTDMA Class 2 M5 Description : Minimum number of TDMA frames that must be working in order for the cell itself to be working. The frame carrying the cell BCCH must be among them and is successfully configured. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [1 to 16] bts 1 DP [M]: This number is less than or equal to the number of transceiver objects (TDMA frames) created for the bts object. The parent bsc objet is unlocked and the bts object is locked. V12

[M]:

minNbrGprsTs Class 3 (gprsBtsExtendedConf) Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Default value : Checks : Minimum number of TS dedicated to GPRS in the cell [0 to 127] bts GPRS (TF1121 V12) DP 0 [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

missDistWt Class 3 M6 Description : Weight applied to missing Distance measurement The missing measurement is replaced by the latest received raw measurement weighed by this corrective factor when calculating the average MS-BTS distance. The range of permitted values makes missing distance measurements not favored. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [100 to 200] % handOverControl 110 DP [M]: The parent bsc objet is unlocked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2224

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

missRxLevWt Class 3 M7 Description : Weight applied in case of missing signal strength measurement report The missing measurement is replaced by the latest computed arithmetic average, or by the latest received raw measurement if no average value is available, weighed by this corrective factor when calculating the average signal strength in the cell. Selecting the greatest value makes missing strength measurements not favored. [0 to 100] % handOverControl 90 DP [M]: The parent bsc objet is unlocked.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

missRxQualWt Class 3 M8 Description : Weight applied to missing Quality measurement The missing measurement is replaced by the latest computed arithmetic average, or by the latest received raw measurement if no average value is available, weighed by this corrective factor when calculating the average bit error rate in the radio link. The range of permitted values makes missing quality measurements not favored. [100 to 200] % handOverControl 110 DP [M]: The parent bsc objet is unlocked. V13 Identifier of the mms object class. This identifier is allocated by the MDR at object creation, depending on the shelf and slot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attribute cannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC e3 and TCU e3. [0 to 2147483646] mms DP

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : mmsId Description :

Value range : Object : Type :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2225

mmsUsage Description :

V13 Indicates whether the MMS is private (i.e. associated to an OMU) ; or sharedmirrored (associated to the Control Node) This attribute cannot be modified. It is set by the MDR at MMS creation. [0 (Shared) to 1 (Private)] mms DP AR 1209 V13.1

Value range : Object : Type : Feature :

mobileAllocation Class 2 M9 Description : List of up to sixty-four frequencies allotted in the network frequency band to a radio time slot which obeys frequency hopping laws [1 to 124] (GSM 900 network / Extended GSM network), [0 to 1023] (GSMR), [512 to 885] (GSM 1800 network), [512 to 810] (GSM 1900 network) frequencyHoppingSystem DP [C/M]: Each frequency occurs once in the list and is allotted to the parent bts object (cellAllocation). [M]: If the frequencyHoppingSystem object is referenced by a channel object dependent on the associated bts object, the parent bsc object is unlocked and the associated bts object is locked.

Value range :

Object : Type : Checks :

mobileCountryCode Class 3 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Code of the PLMN home country Refer to the next entry. [0 to 999] adjacentCellHandOver DP [C]: This code is identical to the mobileCountryCode attribute of the parent bsc object when it is defined for that object. [C/M]: A CGI is unique in the set including a serving cell and its neigbor cells. [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2226

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

mobileCountryCode Class 3 Description : Code of the PLMN home country Refer to the next entry. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 999] adjacentCellReselection DP [C]: This code is identical to the mobileCountryCode attribute of the parent bsc object when it is defined for that object.

[C/M]: A CGI is unique in the set including a serving cell and its neigbor cells. [M]: mobileCountryCode Class 1 Description : Code of the PLMN home country. It must be defined when the MSC does not manage cell global identifiers (CGI). Refer to the next entry. Value range : Object : Condition : Type : Checks : [0 to 999] bsc To define when MSC does not manage cell global identifiers (CGI). DP [M]: The bsc object is locked. The parent bsc object is unlocked.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2227

mobileCountryCode Class 2 Description : Code of the PLMN home country A CGI (Cell Global Identifier) is unique within a location area. It identifies a cell unambiguously in the PLMN and includes four fields: cellIdentityCode (CI), locationAreaCode (LAC), mobileCountryCode (MCC), and mobileNetworkCode (MNC). Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 999] bts DP [C]: This code is identical to the mobileCountryCode attribute of the parent bsc object when it is defined for that object.

[C/M]: A CGI is unique in the set including a serving cell and its neigbor cells. [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the bts object is locked.

mobileNetworkCode Class 3 Description : Code of the PLMN in the country Refer to the next entry. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 999] adjacentCellHandOver DP [C]: This code is identical to the mobileNetworkCode attribute of the parent bsc object when it is defined for that object.

[C/M]: A CGI is unique in the set including a serving cell and its neigbor cells. [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2228

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

mobileNetworkCode Class 3 Description : Code of the PLMN in the country Refer to the next entry. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 999] adjacentCellReselection DP [C]: This code is identical to the mobileNetworkCode attribute of the parent bsc object when it is defined for that object.

[C/M]: A CGI is unique in the set including a serving cell and its neigbor cells. [M]: mobileNetworkCode Class 1 Description : Code of the PLMN in the country. It must be defined when the MSC does not manage cell global identifiers (CGI). Refer to the next entry. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 999] bsc DP [M]: The bsc object is locked. The parent bsc object is unlocked.

mobileNetworkCode Class 2 Description : Code of the PLMN in the country A CGI (Cell Global Identifier) is unique within a location area. It identifies a cell unambiguously in the PLMN and includes four fields: cellIdentityCode (CI), locationAreaCode (LAC), mobileCountryCode (MCC), and mobileNetworkCode (MNC). Value range : Object : Type : [0 to 999] bts DP

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2229

Checks :

[C]:

This code is identical to the mobileNetworkCode attribute of the parent bsc object when it is defined for that object.

[C/M]: A CGI is unique in the set including a serving cell and its neigbor cells. [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and bts object is locked. V9

modeModifyMandatory Class 3 M10 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

Whether a CHANNEL MODE MODIFY message should be sent to the mobile after a directed retry handover in the BSS [used (yes) / not used (no)] bsc not used DP [C/M]: The attribute value can only be used if directed retry handovers are allowed at BSC level. Refer to the interBscDirectedRetry and intraBscDirectedRetry entries in the Dictionary. [M]: The bsc object is unlocked.

monitoredObjectClass Description : Value range : Class of the serving object for the notifications processed [adjacentCellHandOver / adjacentCellReselection / bsc / bts / btsSiteManager / channel / frequencyHoppingSystem / handOverControl / lapdLink / pcmCircuit / pcu / pcusn / powerControl / signallingLink / signallingLinkSet / signallingPoint / software / transceiver / transceiverEquipment / transceiverZone / transcoder / transcoderBoard / xtp] mdWarning DP

Object : Type :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2230

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

monitoredObjectInstance Description : Identification of a serving object in the class They identify the object that issued the processed notifications. Enter the concerned object identification sequence. mdWarning DP

Object : Type :

monitoredSpecificProblemsList Description : List of the specific problems taken into account in the process This parameter allows to filter the processed notifications according to the following criteria: cause number, fault number, and processor number. Value range : Object : Type : month Description : Month on which the observation report was created Date format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Value range : Object : Type : [<date>] Display busiest day of the month report DP [(cause, faultNumber) pair] mdWarning if detectionFunction = excessiveAnomalyRate DP

msBtsDistanceInterCell Class 3 M11 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Whether inter-bts handovers are allowed in a cell for distance reasons [enabled / disabled] handOverControl enabled DP [M]: the parent bsc object is unlocked.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2231

msCapWeightActive Class 2 (gprsBtsLockExtendedConf) Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Checks :

V12

It specifies whether the Weight Fair Allocation algorithm is used or not [yes / no] bts GPRS (SV407 V12) yes DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the bts object is locked.

msRangeMax Class 3 M12 Description : Maximum MS-to-BTS distance beyond which a handover may be triggered. It can be set to 1 for a microcell and is less than callClearing in all cases. If the associated serving cell is a concentric cell, the following inequality, that is not checked by the system, must be true (refer to this entry in the Dictionary): msRangeMax concentAlgoExtMsRange Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [1 to 34] km (nonextended mode) [1 to 120] km (extended mode) handOverControl 34 in nonextended mode, 89 in extended mode DP [C/M]: msRangeMax < callClearing (associated bts object attribute) [C/M]: The maximum distance is limited to 34 km if the extended cell attribute of the associated bts object is false. [C/M]: The maximum distance is 120 km if the extended cell attribute of the bts object is true. [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2232

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

msTxPwrMax Class 3 M13 Description : Value range : Maximum MS transmission power in a serving cell. It is equal to msTxPwrMaxCCH in a GSM 900 network. [5 to 43, by steps of 2] dBm (GSM 900, GSMR, EGSM, and GSM 900 GSM 1800 networks) [0 to 36, by steps of 2] dBm (GSM 1800, and GSM 1800 GSM 900 networks) [0 to 33] dBm (GSM 1900 network) bts Typical value of 33 dBm for GSM 900 handhelds and 30 dBm for GSM 1800 and 1900 handhelds DP [C/M]: [M]: Note : GSM 900 networks: msTxPwrMaxCCH msTxPwrMax =

Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

The parent bsc object is unlocked.

The msTxPwrMax values [displayed by the OMCR] / [typed by the OMCR operator] are encoded values. The corresponding maximum MS transmission powers in a serving cell are compliant to GSM Rec 05.05, that is to say: [5 to 39] dBm (GSM 900 network)

msTxPwrMax2ndBand Class 2 M14 Description :

V12

Maximum MS transmission power in the band 1 of the dualband cell depending on the network type (BCCH is only defined in band 0) [0 to 36, by steps of 2] dBm (GSM 900 GSM 1800 network) [5 to 43, by steps of 2] dBm (GSM 1800 GSM 900 network) bts Typical value of 33 dBm for GSM 900 handhelds, 30 dBm for GSM 1800 and 1900 DP Dualband cell management (TF875 V12)

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Feature :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2233

Checks :

[C/M]: The attribute value is within the range [0 to 36] and even when the bts object standardIndicator attribute is gsmdcs. [C/M]: The attribute value is within the range [5 to 43] and odd when the bts object standardIndicator attribute is dcsgsm. [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the associated bts object is locked.

Note :

The msTxPwrMax values [displayed by the OMCR] / [typed by the OMCR operator] are encoded values. The corresponding maximum MS transmission powers in a serving cell are compliant to GSM Rec 05.05, that is to say: [5 to 39] dBm (GSM 900 network) [0 to 36] dBm (GSM 1800 network)

msTxPwrMaxCCH Class 3M15 Description : Maximum MS transmission power in a cell CCCH The BSC relays the information to the mobiles in the Abis CELL MODIFY REQUEST message. Value range : [5 to 43, by steps of 2] dBm (GSM 900, GSMR, EGSM, and GSM 900 GSM 1800 networks) [0 to 36, by steps of 2] dBm (GSM 1800 and GSM 1800 GSM 900 networks) [0 to 33] dBm (GSM 1900 network) bts Typical value of 33 dBm for GSM 900 handhelds, 30 dBm for GSM 1800 and 1900 DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. If the cell is used as a neighbor cell of another serving cell in the network, msTxPwrMaxCCH must be identical to the msTxPwrMaxCell power defined for the corresponding adjacentCellHandOver object (the values must be checked by users). The msTxPwrMax values [displayed by the OMCR] / [typed by the OMCR operator] are encoded values. The corresponding maximum MS transmission powers in a serving cell are compliant to GSM Rec 05.05, that is to say: [5 to 39] dBm (GSM 900 network)

Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Remark :

Note :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2234

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

msTxPwrMaxCell Class 3 M16 Description : Maximum MS transmission power in a neighbor cell. It is equal to msTxPwrMaxCCH when the cell is declared as a serving cell on the network (the value must be checked by users). [5 to 43, by steps of 2] dBm (GSM 900, GSMR, EGSM, and GSM 900 GSM 1800 networks) [0 to 36, by steps of 2] dBm (GSM 1800 network and GSM 1800 GSM 900) [0 to 33] dBm (GSM 1900 network) adjacentCellHandOver Typical value of 33 dBm for GSM 900 handhelds and 30 dBm for GSM 1800 and 1900 handhelds DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. If the cell is used as a neighbor cell of another serving cell in the network, msTxPwrMaxCell should be identical to the msTxPwrMaxCCH power defined for the corresponding adjacentCellHandOver object (the values must be checked by users). The msTxPwrMax values [displayed by the OMCR] / [typed by the OMCR operator] are encoded values. The corresponding maximum MS transmission powers in a serving cell are compliant to GSM Rec 05.05, that is to say: [5 to 39] dBm (GSM 900 network) [0 to 36] dBm (GSM 1800 network)

Value range :

Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Remark :

Note :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2235

multi band reporting Class 3 M17 Description : Value range :

V10

Minimum number of cells that multiband MSs must report in their radio measurements in each frequency band [the six strongest cells / the strongest cell out band / the two strongest cells out band / the three strongest cells out band] six strongest allowed cells irrespective of their frequency band the strongest allowed cell outside the current frequency band the two strongest allowed cells outside the current frequency band the three strongest allowed cells outside the current frequency band

Object : Default value : Type : Checks : multiple site Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

bts the six strongest cells DP [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked V8 Identifier of a multiple site object defined with regard to a bsc object [0 to 65535] multiple site Id [C]: The multiple site object is not created for the parent bsc object.

[C/M]: The btsSiteManager objects in the btsSiteManagerList list are created for the parent bsc object and are not referenced by another multiple site object. [M/D]: The multiple site object is created and the current btsSiteManager objects referenced in the btsSiteManagerList list are locked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2236

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

multipleVocoders Class 1 Description :

V8

Whether the BSC can be linked to one or other MSC that use different speech coding protocols An MSC uses either the GSM protocol or the JTC protocol. False means that only the GSM protocol is compatible.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

[true / false] bsc True DP [M]: The bsc object is locked. V12

muxNumber Class 3 Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : pcuSN mux identification [noMux / oneMux / twoMux] pcusn GPRS (SV407 V12) DP

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2237

N
N3103 Class 3 (gprsBtsExtendedConf) Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks : V12

Maximum number of repetition of a PUAN (Packet Uplink Ack/Nack) message [1 to 64] bts 5 GPRS (SV407 V12) DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. V12

N3105max Class 2 (gprsTranscvLockBtsExtendedConf) Description :

Maximum number of consecutive RLC data blocks sent by the PCU with a valid RRBP and not having been acknowledged by the MS [1 to 64] transceiver 4 GPRS (SV407 V12) DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the transceiver object is locked. V12

Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks :

nAvgl Class 3 (gprsAvgParam) Description : Signal strength filter used for MS output power control

It specifies the Interference signal strength filter constant for power control. NAVG I = 2 (k/2) with k = nAvgI. Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks : [0 to 15] bts 0 GPRS (SV407 V12) DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2238

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

nAvgT Class 3 (gprsAvgParam) Description :

V12

Signal strength filter used for MS output power control, which specifies the Signal strength filter period for power control in packet transfer mode. TAVG T = 2 (k/2) /6 with k = nAvgT. [0 to 25] bts GPRS (SV407 V12) DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. V12

Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Checks :

nAvgW Class 3 (gprsAvgParam) Description :

Signal strength filter used for MS output power control, which specifies the Signal strength filter period for power control in packet idle mode. TAVG W = 2 (k/2) /6 with k = nAvgW. [0 to 25] bts GPRS (SV407 V12) DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. Tavg_w has no impact on frequency measurements and computations done by the MS, which is always equal to the frequency of paging blocks decoding. V8

Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Checks : Note :

nbOfRepeat Class 2 N1 Description :

Maximum number of times that paging messages are repeated to mobiles that belong to the same paging subgroup It is set to 3 in former BSS versions (static configuration parameter). The following inequality, that is not checked by the system, must be true (refer to these entries in the Dictionary):
retransDuration (delayBetweenRetrans + 1) x nbOfRepeat

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

[0 to 22] bts 3 DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the bts object is locked.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2239

nbrFreeTchBeforeAnticipation Class 3 (gprsBtsExtendedConf) Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks : Attribute reserved for future use [0] bts 0 GPRS (SV407 V12) DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

V12

nbrFreeTchToEndAnticipation Class 3 (gprsBtsExtendedConf) Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks : Attribute reserved for future use [0] bts 0 GPRS (SV407 V12) DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

V12

nbrTch Class 2 (gprsPcuCrossConnectList) Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks : Note : Number of TSs used for each Agprs PCM link [0 to 31] pcu 0 GPRS (SV407 V12) DP [M]:

V12

The parent bsc object is unlocked and the pcu object is locked.

This parameter is only available for BSC 2G

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2240

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

NCHPosition Class2 N2 Description : Value range :

V12

Defines the number of blocks and position of the first block for NCH [0 block 1 block, first block 0 1 block, first block 1 1 block, first block 2 1 block, first block 3 1 block, first block 4 1 block, first block 5 1 block, first block 6 2 blocks, first block 0 2 blocks, first block 1 2 blocks, first block 2 2 blocks, first block 3 2 blocks, first block 4 2 blocks, first block 5 3 blocks, first block 0 3 blocks, first block 1 3 blocks, first block 2 3 blocks, first block 3 3 blocks, first block 4 4 blocks, first block 0 4 blocks, first block 1 4 blocks, first block 2 4 blocks, first block 3 5 blocks, first block 0 5 blocks, first block 1 5 blocks, first block 2 6 blocks, first block 0 6 blocks, first block 1 7 blocks, first block 0] bts 0 block DP (GSMR V12) [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked and the bts object is locked. relation

Object : Default value : Type : Feature : Checks : Note :

NCHPosition noOfBlocksForAccessGrant according to channelType attribute

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2241

channelType mainBCCH

NCHPosition 1 block, first block 0 to 6 2 blocks, first block 0 to 5 3 blocks, first block 0 to 4 4 blocks, first block 0 to 3 5 blocks, first block 0 to 2 6 blocks, first block 0 to 1 7 blocks, first block 0 1 block, first block 0 2 blocks, first block 0

noOfBlocksForAccessGrant >1 >2 >3 >4 >5 >6 =7 1 < value 2 =2

mainBCCHCombined

network protocolUsed Description :

V13

Indicates which protocol is used (X.25 or IP). This attribute is modified by the Manager. Value changes are notified to the Manager. This attribute can be modified only if the bscMdInterface object instance is locked. [X25 / IP] bscMdInterface DP

Value range : Object : Type :

networkColourCode Class 3 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Color code of the mobile network. The (BCC,NCC) pair forms the cell BSIC. [0 to 7] adjacentCellHandOver DP [M]: Each defined (baseColourCode, bCCHFrequency, networkColourCode) combination is unique in the set including a serving cell and its neighbor cells. The parent bsc object is unlocked.

[M]:

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2242

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

networkColourCode Class 2 Description : Color code of the mobile network. It allows countries with common borders to allocate BCCs and BCCH frequencies at their own convenience in international border areas. The (BCC,NCC) pair forms the cell BSIC. The information is broadcast on the cell SCH. The Base Station Identity Code (BSIC) is a six-bit code: bits 654 = NCC (PLMN color code), bits 321 = BCC (Base station color code). Outside border areas, the NCC bits can be used to increase the number of BCC possibilities. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 7] bts DP [M]: Each defined (baseColourCode, bCCHFrequency, networkColourCode) combination is unique in the set including a serving cell and its neighbor cells. The parent bsc object is unlocked and the bts object is locked.

[M]: Remark :

The NCC should not be confused with the MCC (Mobile Country Code) nor the MNC (Mobile Network Code), which are part of the CGI (Cell Global Identifier).

networkIndicator Class 1 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Identifier of the SS7 network [nationalUse/internationalUse] signallingLinkSet DP [C/M]: The only value accepted by the system is nationalUse. [M]: Remark : The parent bsc object is locked.

Since the system accepts only one value for this attribute, changing it has no meaning. To change its value, consult NTP < 34 >.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2243

networkIndicator Class 1 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Identifier of the SS7 network [nationalUse] signallingPoint DP [C/M]: The only value accepted by the system is nationalUse. [M]: The parent bsc object is locked. Since the system accepts only one value for this attribute, changing it has no meaning. To change its value, consult NTP < 34 >. This parameter is only available for BSC 2G

Remark :

Note : new name Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

New name to give to the short message. It is different from the current short message identifier. [case sensitive, 20 characters max] short message Rename DP [A]: It is different from the current short message identifier. [A]: It does not exist on the OMCR.

new password 1st try Description : Users new password to use in the next login request. It begins with a letter, contains at least one nonalphabetical character among the first eight characters, and is case sensitive. It is not displayed. [6 characters min] user profile Change password DP [A]: It begins with a letter and contains one nonalphanumerical character among the first eight characters. [A]: It is at least six-character long. [A]: It is different from the N previous occurrences (N is set in static configuration data).

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2244

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

new password 2nd try Description : Second definition of the users new password that will not be validated unless it is exactly the same as new password 1st try. It is not displayed. Refer to the new password 1st try entry in the dictionary. The new password is validated when opening a new session Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [case sensitive] user profile Change password DP [A]: It begins with a letter and contains one nonalphanumerical character among the first eight characters. It is at least six-character long. It is different from the N previous occurrences (N is set in static configuration data). V9

[A]: [A]:

new power control algorithm Class 3 N3 Description : Algorithm used by the BTS to control power in a cell

The step by step value refers to the standard power control algorithm. The one shot value refers to the advanced power control algorithm. The enhanced one shot value refers to the advanced power algorithm used in connection with the handOverControl object rxLevHreqaveBeg attribute used in the early handover mechanism. Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Checks : Note : [step by step / one shot / enhanced one shot] bts Fast power control at TCH assignment (TF975 V12) one shot DP [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked. The enhanced one shot attribute value can only apply to non mixed DCU4 or DRX transceiver architecture.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2245

next execution time Description : Value range : Object : Condition : Type : night intervention Description : Value range : Object : Type : Type of action associated with an alarm criterion in the nighttime configuration [noAlarm / critical / major / minor] alarm criteria DP Date and time of next job run [<date> <time>] job Display This parameter is significant and displayed only when a job run periodicity is defined. DD

noOfBlocksForAccessGrant Class 2 N4 Description : Number of CCCH blocks not used for paging A BCCH is combined when it shares the same radio time slot with four SDCCHs which can include a CBCH (refer to the channelType entry in the Dictionary). In that case, the attribute value is no greater than to 2 (the value must be checked by users). Value range : [0 to 2] if the cell uses a combined BCCH, [1 to 7] otherwise. 0 means that PCH blocks are used for sending immediate assignment messages as and when needed. bts 0 DP [M]: This number is greater than zero if the channelType of one of the channel objects dependent on the bts object is sdcch8CBCH (refer to this entry in the Dictionary). The parent bsc object is unlocked and the bts object is locked.

Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

[M]:

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2246

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

noOfMultiframesBetweenPaging Class 2 N5 Description : Number of occurences of a paging sub-group The greater this number, the greater the number of paging sub-groups. [2 to 9] multi-frame of fifty-one frames bts 6 DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the bts object is locked.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

notAllowedAccessClasses Class 3 N6 Description : List of mobile access classes that are forbidden in the cell, except case of congestion. This attribute, together with the emergencyCallRestricted attribute, allows to control access to a cell according to the service classes authorized. List of mobile access class: [0 to 9]: user classes [11 to 15]: operator classes Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Remark : bts Leave the field empty DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. General conditions mobiles are granted access to a cell are allotted at subscription time.

Value range :

notification number Description : Value range : Object : Reference number of the associated notification [0 to 2147483646] alarmRecord, mdScanReportRecord, observationFileReadyRecord, stateChangeRecord, traceFileReadyRecord, traceLogRecord DP

Type :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2247

notification type Description : To select messages according to the type of the notifications Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Value range : [attributeValueChange / communicationsAlarm / environmentalAlarm / equipmentAlarm / objectCreation / objectDeletion / processingErrorAlarm / qualityOfServiceAlarm / stateChange / specific] Alarm and notification logs Filter DP

Object : Type : number of records Description : Object : Type : Remark :

Number of records log Display DP The attributes of the log objects are not managed by the users V13

numberOfEnabledHDLCPorts Description :

Number of enabled HDLC ports in the TMU or IEM module. Operational State of the HDLC channels in the TMU/IEM modules. Operational State of the HDLC channels in the TMU/LSA modules. The global Operational State of the HDLC feature is given by the number of ports/channels with an individual operational state set to enabled. This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS. It is set to NULL at iem or tmu object instance creation. Value changes are not notified to the Manager. This attribute is relevant for BSC e3.

Value range : Object : Type : Feature :

[0 to 65535] iem, tmu DD AR 1209 V13.1

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2248

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

numberOfPwciSamples Class 3 Description :

V12

Minimum number of PwCI samples required to reach a reliable distribution (representative of the real distribution in the whole cell) * 1000 [0 to 60] handOverControl 20 Automatic Cell Tiering (TF995V12) DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks :

numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans Class 3 N7 Description : Number of radio time slots over which RACH transmission access are spread in a random way to avoid collisions The information is broadcast to the mobiles at regular intervals on the cell BCCH. In the event of nonsystem response, the mobile will renew the RACH bursts after a randomly defined period that varies with numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans. MS Phase 1
1st access 2nd access

Fixed Delay 0 250 or 350 ms


Variable delay from 0 to (numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans 1) slots

Time

The time T between two transmissions of the same RACH burst is the following: T= [D + (N+1) x 4.615]ms where D is the maximum system response pending time: N is the randomly number generated by the mobile in the

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2249

range [0 to numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans1] 4.615 ms is the time occupied by a time slot. MS Phase 2


1st access 2nd access

Fixed Delay 0 S TS RACH


Variable delay from 0 to (numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans 1) slots

Time

The time T between two transmissions of the same RACH burst is the following (whichever is the BCCH, combined or not): T= 4.615 x [S+(N + 1)] ms where S is a parameter depending on the BCCH configuration and on the value of numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans (see table hereafter) N is the randomly number generated by the mobile in the range [0 to numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans1] 4.615 ms is the time occupied by a time slot.
S on not combined BCCH 55 76 109 163 217 S on combined BCCH 41 52 58 86 11

NumberOfSlotsSpreadTrans 3, 8, 14, 50 4, 9, 16 5, 10, 20 6, 11, 25 7, 12, 32

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

[3 to 12 / 14 / 16 / 20 / 25 / 32 / 50] time slots bts 32 DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2250

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

Note :

The choice will depend on the quantities of GSM phase 1 and GSM phase 2 mobiles. For Mobile phase 1, numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans = 50 leads to the lower double allocation rate. For Mobile phase 2, numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans = 6, 7, 11, 12, 25, 32 (respectively 5, 10, 20) for BCCH combined (respectively BCCH not combined) leads to the lower double allocation rate. Therefore, for a network that handles a combination of both types of mobiles, numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans should be set to 32 (default value).

numberOfTCHFreeBeforeCongestion Class 3 N8 Description :

V9

Minimum number of free TCHs which triggers the beginning of the TCH congestion phase and the beginning of the traffic overload condition (this parameter takes also into account the preempted PDTCH) [0 to infinite] bts 0 DP [M]: [C/M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
numberOfTCHFreeBeforeCongestion numberOfTCHFreeToEndCongestion

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

numberOfTCHFreeToEndCongestion Class 3 N9 Description :

V9

Threshold that gives the number of free TCHs, which triggers the end of TCH congestion phase and the end of the traffic overload condition (this parameter takes also into account the preempted PDTCH) [0 to infinite] bts 0 DP [M]: [C/M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
numberOfTCHFreeToEndCongestion numberOfTCHFreeBeforeCongestion

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2251

numberOfTCHQueuedBeforeCongestion Class 3 N10 Description :

V9

Maximum number of TCH allocation requests queued which triggers the beginning of the TCH congestion phase and the beginning of the traffic overload condition [0 to infinite] bts 0 DP [M]: [C/M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
numberOfTCHQueuedBeforeCongestion numberOfTCHQueuedToEndCongestion

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

numberOfTCHQueuedToEndCongestion Class 3 N11 Description :

V9

Maximum number of TCH allocation requests queued which triggers the end of TCH congestion phase and the end of the traffic overload condition [0 to infinite] bts 0 DP [M]: [C/M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
numberOfTCHQueuedToEndCongestion numberOfTCHQueuedBeforeCongestion

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2252

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

O
objectClass Description : Value range : Q3 object class [adjacentCellHandOver / adjacentCellReselection / alarmRecord / bsc / bscCounterList / bscMdInterface / bts / btsSiteManager / callPathTrace / channel / efd / frequencyHoppingSystem / handOverControl / lapdLink / log / md / mdScanner / mdScanReportRecord / mdWarning / network / observationFileReadyRecord / pcmCircuit / powerControl / signallingLink / signallingLinkSet / signallingPoint / software / stateChangeRecord / traceControl / traceFileReadyRecord / traceLogRecord / transceiver / transceiverEquipment / transceiverZone / transcoder / transcoderBoard / xtp] alarmRecord, mdScanReportRecord, observationFileReadyRecord, stateChangeRecord, traceFileReadyRecord, traceLogRecord DP

Object :

Type : objectInstance Description : Object : Type :

Scope of an alarm criteria. It covers all network objects when undefined. alarm criteria DP

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2253

Object Filter List Description :

V12 To select messages issued by one or several objects, and their subtree (optional). The Object Filter List parameter includes the following components: objects and scope. Click the Modify button to enter the names of the objects to be selected. The scope enables to select the subtree of an object.

Value range :

Object : Type : objects Description :

objects [adjacentCellHandOver / adjacentCellReselection / alarmRecord / bsc / bscCounterList / bscMdInterface / bts / btsSiteManager / callPathTrace / channel / efd / frequencyHoppingSystem / handOverControl / lapdLink / log / md / mdScanner / mdScanReportRecord / mdWarning / network / observationFileReadyRecord / omc / pcmCircuit / pcu / pcusn / powerControl / signallingLink / signallingLinkSet / signallingPoint / software / stateChangeRecord / traceControl / traceFileReadyRecord / traceLogRecord / transceiver / transceiverEquipment / transceiverZone / transcoder / transcoderBoard / xtp] Alarm and notification logs Filter DP

To select messages issued by one or several objects (50 objects max), enter the concerned object classe(s). This field has to be empty to select all object classes. Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. If a class is selected, the user may select one or more objects created in that class. If no object is selected, all messages issued by all objects created in the class are displayed.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2254

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

Value range :

Object : Type : objects assigned Description : Value range : Object : Type : Remark : observation type Description : Value range : Object : Type : observation type Description : Value range : Object : Type :

[adjacentCellHandOver / adjacentCellReselection / alarmRecord / bsc / bscCounterList / bscMdInterface / bts / btsSiteManager / callPathTrace / channel / efd / frequencyHoppingSystem / handOverControl / lapdLink / log / md / mdScanner / mdScanReportRecord / mdWarning / network / observationFileReadyRecord / omc / pcmCircuit / pcu / pcusn / powerControl / signallingLink / signallingLinkSet / signallingPoint / software / stateChangeRecord / traceControl / traceFileReadyRecord / traceLogRecord / transceiver / transceiverEquipment / transceiverZone / transcoder / transcoderBoard / xtp] Alarm and notification logs Filter DP

List of the BSSs assigned to the relay. Fill in the list with bsc object identifiers or names. [1 to 255] relay DP A BSS can be assigned to several relays at the same time. V11 Type of the observation [general Statistic / fast Statistic / real Time /diagnostic] bscCounterList DP V11 Type of the observation [Observation real time / Observation fast statistic / Performance monitor] report template DP V11

Observed counters Description : Object : Value range : Type : List of counters (Q3 names) chosen for observation report template [list of Q3 counter names] DP

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2255

Observed object class Description : Value range : Class of object the user wants to observe

V11

Object : Type : occupationState Description :

[bsc / btsSiteManager / bts / pcmCircuit / adjacentCellHandOver / transceiverZone / transceiverEquipment (V12 only) / omc (V12 only) / md (V12 only) / machine (V12 only)] report template DP

Whether the PCM TS used by the terrestrial circuit is occupied by an SS7 channel This attribute is significant provided the xtp object is unlocked.

Value range :

[preempted / notPreempted] preempted . . . . . . . . The terrestrial circuit is mapped on a time slot occupied by an SS7 channel on the Ater interface. notPreempted . . . . . The PCM time slot is available for the traffic. xtp DD This parameter is only available for BSC 2G V12

Object : Type : Note :

offsetLoad Class 3 O1 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks :

Load offset applied by the bsc to the cell selection process [0 to 63] dB adjacentCellHandOver 0 Handover decision according to adjacent cell priority and load (TF716 V12) DP [C/M]: This attribute must be in the range [0 to 63]. [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2256

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

Notes :

When set to 0, no offset is effective. This parameter is set to 0 for the cells that do not belong to the related bsc object. V12

offsetPriority Class 3 O2 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Feature : Checks : Note :

Priority offset applied by the bsc to the cell selection process [1 to 5] adjacentCellHandOver 1 DP Handover decision according to adjacent cell priority and load (TF716 V12) [C/M]: This attribute must be in the range [1 to 5]. [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. 1 is the highest priority.

OMC notification number Description : Value range : Object : Type : omuId Description : To select OMCR manager notifications with a given number Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. [0 to 2147483646] Alarm and notification logs Filter DP V13 Identifier of the omu object class. This identifier is allocated by the MDR at object creation, depending on the shelf and slot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attribute cannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC e3 and TCU e3. [0 to 2147483646] omu DP

Value range : Object : Type : on error Description : Value range : Object : Type :

Whether to stop running commands when an applicative error is detected by the system (stop) [stop / continue] commandFile Run DP

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2257

operationalState Description : Value range : ISO state [enabled / disabled]

V13

The state parameter combinations for the atmRm object are as follows:
administrative State {} {} {} {} {} operationalState disabled disabled disabled disabled enabled availabilityStatus notInstalled {} failed dependency {}

Object : Feature : Type : operationalState Description : Value range :

atmRm BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DD

ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the bsc object are as follows:

administrative State locked unlocked unlocked unlocked unlocked

operational State disabled disabled disabled disabled enabled

availability Status {} {} dependency failed {}

Meaning The BSC has just been created or locked. The BSC is in restart or BDA build phase. The BSS/OMCR link is not created or the BSC database is not built. The BSC refuses every command, including resetting. The BSS/OMCR link and the associations with the BSC are established, and the BSC database is built.

Object : Type :

bsc DD

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2258

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

operationalState Description : Value range : ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the bscMdInterface object are as follows:
operational State disabled disabled availability Status {} {} Meaning The BSS/OMCR link has been locked by a user. The link has just been created and the connection is not established yet (initial state). The link is down. The connection cannot be reestablished. The connection is established.

administrative State locked unlocked

unlocked unlocked unlocked

disabled disabled enabled

dependency failed {}

Object : Type : operationalState Description : Value range :

bscMdInterface DD

ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the bts object are as follows:
operational State disabled disabled availability Status {} dependency Meaning The cell has just been created or locked. The radio site is not working or the TDMA frames are not correctly configured. The radio site is working and the number of TDMA frames correctly configured for the cell is reached. The radio cell is being released following a soft release command.

administrative State locked unlocked

unlocked

enabled

{}

shutting Down

enabled

busy

Object : Type :

bts DD

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2259

operationalState Description : Value range : ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the btsSiteManager object are as follows:
administrative State locked unlocked unlocked unlocked operationa l State disabled disabled disabled disabled availability Status {} {} dependenc y failed Meaning The site has just been created or locked. Downloading in the site BCF is in-progress. The PCM link used for the site LAPD signaling is faulty. Loss of Level 3 dialogue or configuration Abis message not correctly acknowledged or downloading problem The PCM is available for LAPD signaling, the Level 3 dialogue is established, and the configuration and Abis connection with the site BCF are OK.

unlocked

enabled

{}

Object : Type : operationalState Description : Value range :

btsSiteManager DD

ISO state. disabled means that the BSC cannot send the messages to the OMCR agent. [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the callPathTrace object are as follows:

administrative State locked

operational State enabled

usageState idle

Meaning Call path tracing has just started in the BSC or has been stopped by the operator. Call path tracing is in-progress and messages are forwarded to the OMCR agent.

unlocked

enabled

busy

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2260

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

administrative State unlocked unlocked

operational State enabled disabled

usageState idle

Meaning Call path tracing is stopped (end-of-session criterion is true). Call path tracing is in-progress but messages are not forwarded to the OMCR agent.

Object : Type : operationalState Description : Value range :

callPathTrace DD V13 ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the cc object are as follows:
operationalState disabled disabled disabled disabled enabled availabilityStatus notInstalled {} failed dependency online

Object : Feature : Type : operationalState Description : Value range :

cc BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DD V13 ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the cem object are as follows:

administrative State {} {}

operationalState disabled disabled

availabilityStatus notInstalled {}

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2261

administrative State {} {} {}

operationalState disabled disabled enabled

availabilityStatus failed dependency {}

Object : Feature : Type : operationalState Description : Value range :

cem BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DD V13 ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the cn object are as follows:

administrative State {} {} {} {}

operationalState disabled disabled disabled enabled

availabilityStatus {} failed degraded online

Object : Feature : Type : operationalState Description : Value range : Object : Type : operationalState Description : Value range :

cn BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DD

ISO state [enabled / disabled] efd DD V13 ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the g3BscEqp object are as follows:

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2262

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

administrative State {} {} {}

operationalState disabled enabled disabled

availabilityStatus {} {} dependency

Object : Feature : Type : operationalState Description : Value range :

g3BscEqp BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DD V13 ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the g3Transcoder object are as follows:

administrative State {} {} {} {} {}

operationalState disabled disabled disabled enabled enabled

availabilityStatus {} failed dependency degraded {}

Object : Feature : Type : operationalState Description : Value range :

g3TranscoderEqpt BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DD V13 ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the iem object are as follows:

administrative State {} {} {}

operationalState disabled disabled disabled

availabilityStatus not installed {} failed

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2263

administrative State {} {}

operationalState disabled enabled

availabilityStatus dependency {}

Object : Feature : Type : operationalState Description : Value range :

iem BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DD V13 ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the in object are as follows:
availabilityStatus dependency {} degraded {} failed

operationalState disabled disabled enabled disabled enabled

Object : Feature : Type : operationalState Description : Value range :

in BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DD

ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the lapdLink object are as follows:
availability Status dependency failed {} Loss of Level 1 SICD board faulty or TSCB faulty (Ater LAPD link) or BSCB faulty (Abis LAPD link) The Level 1 is established and the SICDs, RCBs, and related internal PCMs are working. Meaning

operational State disabled disabled enabled

Object : Type :

lapdLink DD

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2264

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

operationalState Description : Value range : ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the log object are as follows:

operational State disabled disabled enabled

availability Status {} logFull {}

Meaning The disk message saving partition is full (current alarm log). The disk message saving partition is full (current observation or trace log). The messages are actually saved in the partition.

Object : Type : operationalState Description : Value range :

log DD V13 ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the lsaRc object are as follows:

operationalState disabled disabled enabled disabled enabled

availabilityStatus dependency {} degraded {} failed

Object : Feature : Type :

lsaRc BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DD

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2265

operationalState Description : Value range : ISO state. disabled means that the BSC cannot send the messages to the OMCR agent. [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the mdScanner object are as follows:
availability Status {} {offDuty} {} {offDuty} Meaning The observation is running but the messages cannot be forwarded to the OMCR agent. The observation is stopped and the messages cannot be forwarded to the OMCR agent. The observation is running and the messages are forwarded to the OMCR agent. The observation is stopped and the messages are forwarded to the OMCR agent.

operational State disabled disabled enabled enabled

Object : Type : operationalState Description : Value range :

mdScanner DD V13 ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the mms object are as follows:

administrative State locked

operationalState {}

availabilityStatus {}

Object : Feature : Type : operationalState Description : Value range :

mms BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DD V13 ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the omu object are as follows:

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2266

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

administrative State locked

operationalState {}

availabilityStatus {}

Object : Feature : Type : operationalState Description : Value range :

omu BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DD

ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the pcmCircuit object are as follows:

administrative State locked unlocked unlocked

operational State disabled disabled disabled

availability Status {} dependency failed

Meaning The PCM has just been created or locked. The TCU is faulty (A interface PCMs). The DDTI board or the internal PCM partner is faulty, or the connection is down. The DDTI board and the internal PCM partner are working and the connection is established.

unlocked

enabled

{}

Object : Type :

pcmCircuit DD

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2267

operationalState Description : Value range : ISO state [enabled / disabled]

V12

The state parameter combinations for the pcu object are as follows:
administrative State locked unlocked operational State disabled disabled availability Status {} dependency Meaning The PCU has just been created or locked. The Level 2 is not established or the connection with the BSC is down (external PCM). The PCU is working.

unlocked

enabled

{}

Object : Feature : Type : operationalState Description : Value range :

pcu GPRS (SV407 V12) DP V12 ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the pcu object are as follows:

operational State disabled disabled enabled

availability Status {} dependency {}

Meaning The pcusn has just been created. The pcusn object does not work, or the PCM link does not work. The pcusn object is working.

Object : Feature : Type :

pcusn GPRS (SV407 V12) DP

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2268

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

operationalState Description : Value range : ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the signallingLink object are as follows:
administrative State locked unlocked operational State disabled disabled availability Status {} dependency Meaning The SS7 link has just been created or locked. The PCM carrying the SS7 link is faulty or there is no MTP2 message between the BSC and the MSC. The CCS7 board is faulty. The PCM and CCS7 board are working and MTP2 messages are exchanged between the BSC and the MSC.

unlocked unlocked

disabled enabled

failed {}

Object : Type : operationalState Description : Value range :

signallingLink DD V13 ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the sw8kRm object are as follows:

administrative State {} {} {} {} {}

operationalState disabled disabled disabled disabled enabled

availabilityStatus not installed {} failed dependency {}

Object : Feature : Type :

sw8kRm BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DD

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2269

operationalState Description : Value range : ISO state [enabled / disabled]

V13

The state parameter combinations for the tmu object are as follows:
administrative State locked unlocked {} {} {} {} operationalState disabled disabled disabled disabled enabled enabled availabilityStatus not installed {} failed dependency degraded {}

Object : Feature : Type : operationalState Description : Value range :

tmu BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DD

ISO state. disabled means that the BSC cannot send the messages to the OMCR agent. [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the traceControl object are as follows:

administrative State locked

operational State enabled

Meaning Call tracing has not started or has been stopped, and the messages are forwarded to the OMCR agent. Call tracing has been stopped and the messages cannot be forwarded to the OMCR agent. Call tracing is in-progress in the BSC and the messages are forwarded to the OMCR agent. Call tracing is in-progress but the messages cannot be forwarded to the OMCR agent.

locked unlocked unlocked

disabled enabled disabled

Object : Type :

traceControl DD

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2270

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

operationalState Description : Value range : ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the transceiver object are as follows:
operational State disabled disabled availability Status dependency failed Meaning The parent cell is not working or no TRX/DRX is available for the TDMA frame. The BTS has refused the TDMA frame configuration or is using the partnered TRX/DRX for BCCH filling purposes. The parent cell is working, a TRX/DRX is available for the TDMA frame, and the BTS has accepted the TDMA frame configuration.

enabled

{}

Object : Type : operationalState Description : Value range :

transceiver DD

ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations transceiverEquipment object are as follows: for the

administrat iveState locked unlocked unlocked unlocked

operational State disabled disabled disabled disabled

availability Status {} {} dependency failed

Meaning The TRX/DRX has just been created or locked. Downloading in the TRX/DRX is in-progress. The parent radio site or the parent cell or the PCM link partner is not working. The TRX/DRX is assigned to BCCH filling by the BTS or loss of Level 3 dialogue or Abis configuration message not correctly acknowledged or downloading problem or status regression.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2271

administrat iveState unlocked

operational State enabled

availability Status {}

Meaning The parent cell is working, a PCM is available fo the TRX/DRX, and the Level 3 dialogue is established. The TRX/DRX is being released following a soft release command.

shutting Down

enabled

{}

Object : Type : operationalState Description : Value range :

transceiverEquipment DD

ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the transcoder object are as follows:
operational State disabled disabled availability Status {} dependency Meaning The TCU has just been created or locked. The SICD, RCB, TSCB, or internal PCM partner is faulty or the Level 2 is not established or the connection with the BSC is down (external PCM). The TCU is working.

administrative State locked unlocked

unlocked

enabled

{}

Object : Type : operationalState Description : Value range :

transcoder DD

ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the transcoderBoard object are as follows:
operational State disabled disabled availability Status {} {} Meaning The TCB has just been created or locked. Downloading in the TCB is in-progress.

administrative State locked unlocked

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2272

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

administrative State unlocked unlocked

operational State disabled disabled

availability Status dependency failed

Meaning The parent TCU is not working. The UTE board or internal PCM partner is faulty or downloading problem or a severe error was detected. The TCB is working.

unlocked

enabled

{}

Object : Type : operationalState Description : Value range :

transcoderBoard DD V13 ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the trm object are as follows:
operationalState disabled disabled disabled disabled enabled availabilityStatus not installed {} failed dependency {}

administrative State locked unlocked {} {} {}

Object : Feature : Type : operationalState Description : Value range :

trm BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209 DD

ISO state [enabled / disabled] The state parameter combinations for the xtp object are as follows:
operational State disabled disabled usage State idle idle availability Status {} dependency Meaning The CIC has just been created or locked. The PCM link partner is faulty.

administrative State locked unlocked

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2273

administrative State unlocked unlocked unlocked shutting Down

operational State disabled enabled enabled enabled

usage State idle idle busy busy

availability Status failed {} {} {}

Meaning The CIC is preempted. The CIC is working and traffic-free. The CIC is working and traffic-busy. The CIC is being released following a soft release command.

Object : Type :

xtp DD

otherServicesPriority Class 3 O3 Description : Index in the table allocPriorityTable for a TCH allocation request (in signaling mode) whose cause is other services This priority is used in primo-allocations or when an SDDCH cannot be allocated for overload reasons. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : output classes Description : Value range : List of authorized output classes that define a terminal output domain. Output classes grant access to various types of data. [login window / OMCR browser / alarm window / performance monitor] When the login window class is authorized, the Login window is automatically displayed on the terminal screen outside work sessions. terminal profile DP [0 to 17] bts 17 DP

Object : Type :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2274

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

output classes Description : Value range : List of authorized output classes that define a users output domain. Output classes grant access to various types of data. [OMCR browser / alarm window / performance monitor / command file manager / security manager / SMSCB manager / description window / job scheduler window / alarm log window / system session log window / call traces window / Unix window / notification log window / notification window / relay manager/ alarm criteria] The notification log window class gives access to the system notification log, while the notification window class gives access to the user notification log. user profile DP

Object : Type : owner Description : Value range : Object : Type :

Name of the user who created the command file on the OMCR [case sensitive] commandFile DP

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2275

P
packetAckTime Class 3 Description : V12 This parameter is composed of the following attributes: dwAckTime upAckTime The deactivation value is 64 for both of them. Refer to these entries in this Dictionary. pagingOnCell Class 3 P1 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : pan Class 3 Description : Enable or disable paging requests in a cell [enabled / disabled] bts enabled DP [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked. V12 This parameter is composed of the following attributes: panInc panDec panMax Refer to these entries in this Dictionary. panDec Class 3 (pan) Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks : Note : V12 V9

The MS counter N3102 is decremented by panDec each time PUAN timer expires [0 (4s), 1 (8s), 2 (12s), 3 (16s), 4 (20s), 5 (24s), 6 (28s), 7 (32s)] bts 0 GPRS (SV407 V12) DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. If the MS counter equals 0, an abnormal release is performed.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2276

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

panInc Class 3 (pan) Description :

V12

The MS counter N3102 is incremented by panInc each time a PUAN message which allows the transmit window to go forward is received [0 (4s), 1 (8s), 2 (12s), 3 (16s), 4 (20s), 5 (24s), 6 (28s), 7 (32s)] bts 0 GPRS (SV407 V12) DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. If the MS counter equals 0, an abnormal release is performed. V12

Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks : Note :

panMax Class 3 (pan) Description :

Maximum value of the counter N3102 (used in case of block acknowledgment time out), set by the MS at each cell reselection [0 (4s), 1 (8s), 2 (12s), 3 (16s), 4 (20s), 5 (24s), 6 (28s), 7 (32s)] bts 0 GPRS (SV407 V12) DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. If the MS counter equals 0, an abnormal release is performed.

Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks : Note :

parameter(s) Description : List of parameters to define when running the command file Their generic format is $XXX, where $ identifies such a parameter and XXX is a string of uppercase, alphanumerical characters that does not contain spaces. commandFile DP

Object : Type :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2277

partialRecordCriteriaType Description : Value range : Criterion that defines the type of partial records to generate in the BSC [event type / numbered / timed / no partial] event type . . . . . . . . The BSC generates partial records each time a handover is successful (partialRecordCriteriaEvent Type = handover). numbered . . . . . . . . The BSC generates partial records every <N> successful handovers (partialRecordCriteriaNb Event = [1 to 64]). timed . . . . . . . . . . . The BSC generates partial records every <N> seconds (partialRecord CriteriaTimer = [1 to 60]). no partial . . . . . . . . The BSC does not generate partial records. If no partial is selected, trace data are only recorded at the end of each traced call. If the traceControl object is locked before the end of a call, all related data are lost. traceControl DP [M]: The traceControl object is locked.

Object : Type : Checks :

particular intervention Description : Value range : Object : Type : password Description : Value range : Object : Type : Users current password as defined in the users profile. It is not displayed. [case sensitive] user profile Change password DP Type of action associated with an alarm criteria in the specific configuration [noAlarm / critical / major / minor] alarm criteria DP

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2278

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

password Description : Users password. It begins with a letter, contains at least one nonalphabetical character among the first eight characters, and is case sensitive. [6 characters min] user profile Create/Set DP [C/M]: The password begins with a letter and contains one non-alphanumerical character among the first eight characters. [C/M]: The password is at least sixcharacter long. password duration Description : Value range : Maximum time during which the users current password is valid [2 to 2147483646] days When a password validity duration runs out, the password must be changed on opening the next work session. The users access to MMI commands is barred until the password is changed. Refer to the password status entry. user profile DP

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

Object : Type : pcmCircuit Description :

Identifier of a pcmCircuit object defined with regard to a bsc object (Abis,Ater, or Agprs interface). It is related to the number of the DDTI board to which the PCM described link is physically connected in the BSC. PCM links are identified by the DDTI boards to which they are connected in the BSC. A PCM link connected to DDTI board no.i has a reference equal to 2i or 2i+1 (each board manages two links at a time). See to NTP < 22 >, which give the relationship between the number of a board and its physical location in the BSC equipment cabinet. When the PCM link is allotted to a site on the Abis interface, it is also identified by a reference number defined with regard to the site (pcmCircuitBtsSiteManager). Refer to the bscSitePcmList entry in the Dictionary.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2279

Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Checks :

[0 to 47] pcmCircuit (Abis, Ater, and Agprs interfaces) GPRS (SV407 V12) Id [C]: The maximum number of external PCM links allotted to a BSC depends on its type and architecture:
12000/6000 T2 T3 T4 20 28 40

BSC T1 external PCMs 12

T5 48

[C]:

The number of external PCM links allotted to a BSC on the Ater interface depends on the number of TCUs linked to the BSC (one TCU uses one link). The software object related to the parent bsc object is created.

[C]:

[C/D]: If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked. [D]: [D]: If the application database of the related BSC is built, the pcmCircuit object is locked. If the application database of the related BSC is not built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command. No btsSiteManager object (Abis PCM) or transcoder object (Ater PCM) or pcu object (Agprs PCM) refers to the pcmCircuit object. No mdScanner object describing a temporary observation refers to the pcmCircuit object (no observation is running on the concerned PCM).

[D]:

[D]:

pcmCircuit Description : Identifier of a pcmCircuit object defined with regard to a transcoder object (A interface). It is related to the number of the TDTI board to which the PCM described link is physically connected in the TCU. PCM links are identified by the TDTI boards to which they are physically connected in the TCU.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2280

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

PcmCircuit 0 1 2 3

TDTI N 0 1 1 2 2

Port N 0 0 1 0 1

Unused

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

[0 to 3] pcmCircuit (A interface) Id [C]: The number of PCM links connected to a remote transcoder on the A interface is limited to maxPcmCTPerTranscd (static configuration data). [C]: The parent transcoder object is created. [C]: <maxTranscdBPerTranscd> transcoderBoard objects are created for the parent transcoder object. [C/D]: If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked. [D]: If the application database of the related BSC is built, the pcmCircuit object is locked. [D]: If the application database of the related BSC is not built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command. [D]: No signallingLink or xtp object refers to the pcmCircuit object.

pcmCircuitBsc Description : Identifier of a PCM link (pcmCircuit object) used by a radio site defined with regard to the BSC. It is related to the number of the DDTI board to which the link is physically connected in the BSC. Refer to the bscSitePcmList entry in the Dictionary, which defines the relationship between these two attributes. [0 to 2147483646] btsSiteManager DP

Value range : Object : Type :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2281

pcmCircuitBtsSiteManager Description : Identifier of the PCM link defined with regard to the BTS. It is related to the number of the DTI or PCMI board to which the link is physically connected in the BTS. Refer to the bscSitePcmList entry in the Dictionary, which defines the relationship between these two attributes. Value range : Object : Type : pcmCircuitId Description : Identifier of the PCM link used by a LAPD link Since all radio sites have a switching facility, the BSC can directly allocate the PCM link that supports a LAPD link. Value range : Object : Type : [0 to 47] lapdLink DD [0 to 5] btsSiteManager DP

pcmCircuitId Class 2 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Identifier of the PCM link used by an SS7 channel on the A interface, defined with regard to the TCU [0 to 3] signallingLink DP [C/M]: The pcmCircuit object is created for the transcoder object referenced by the signallingLink object (transcoderId). [C/M]: If the described link is PCMA no.3, the time slot used by the SS7 channel (timeSlotNumber) is in the range [1 to 27] if the PCM link is an E1 link and in the range [1 to 20] if the PCM link is a T1 link. Since the last four time slots of that link are not mapped on the Ater interface, they are unusable (refer to the transcoderMatrix entry in the Dictionary). [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the signallingLink object is locked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2282

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

pcmCircuitId Class 2 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Identifier of the PCM link used by a TCU on the Ater interface, defined with regard to the BSC [0 to 47] transcoder DP [C/M]: The pcmCircuit object is created for the parent bsc object. [C/M]: It is not used on the Abis interface by a btsSiteManager object nor on the Ater interface by another transcoder object dependent on the same parent bsc object. [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked, and the transcoder object and the signallingLink objects that refer to it are locked.

Note :

This parameter is only available for BSC 2G

pcmCircuitId Class 2 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Identifier of the PCM link used by a terrestrial circuit on the A interface, defined with regard to the TCU [0 to 3] xtp DP [C/M]: The pcmCircuit object is created for the transcoder object referenced by the xtp object (transcoderId). [C/M]: If the described link is PCMA no.3, the time slot used by the terrestrial circuit (timeSlotNumber) is in the range [1 to 27] if the PCM link is an E1 link and in the range [1 to 20] if the PCM link is a T1 link. Since the last four time slots of that link are not mapped on the Ater interface, they are unusable (refer to the transcoderMatrix entry in the Dictionary). [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the xtp object is locked.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2283

pcmErrorCorrection Class 2 P2 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Feature : Checks :

V12

Whether the bts uses the new ETF (Enhanced TRAU Frame) frame (set to 1) or the ETSI Rec 08.60 frame (set to 0). [0 / 1] bts 1 DP PCM error correction (FM660 V12) [C/M] This attribute can be set to 1 only if enhancedTRAUFrameIndication attribute is set to available or active [M]: The parent bsc is unlocked and the bts object is locked. This parameter is only available for BTSs equipped with non mixed DCU4 or DRX transceiver architecture. V12

Note :

pcmNbr Class 2 (gprsPcuCrossConnectList) Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks : Note : Number of the PCM used for Agprs interface

[0 to 47] pcu 0 GPRS (SV407 V12) DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the pcu object is locked. This parameter is only available for BSC 2G V8

pcmTimeSlotNumber Class 2 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Scheduled time slot of a radio site on the Abis interface

[1 to 31] if the PCM link is an E1 link [1 to 24] if the PCM link is a T1 link btsSiteManager DP [C/M]: The scheduled time slot is masked in the bstSiteManager object radioSiteMask, so it cannot be allotted by the BSC. [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsSiteManager object is locked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2284

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

Notes :

The relation scheduled time slot = teiBtsSiteManager + 1 is always true at BTS level. It can be false at BSC level provided a PCM switching matrix is used between the BSC and the BTS; otherwise, it is true.

pcmType Class 3 Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Checks : Interface on which the PCM link is used [pcmA / pcmAbis / pcmAter / pcmAgprs] pcmCircuit GPRS (SV407 V12) DP [M]: If the current attribute value is pcmA, no signallingLink or xtpobject refers to that object (pcmTimeSlotNumber). If the current attribute value is pcmAbis, no btsSiteManager object refers to that object (bscSitePcmList). If the current attribute value is pcmAter, no transcoder object refers to that object (pcmCircuitId). If the current attribute value is pcmAgprs, no pcu object refers to that object (bscPcuPcmRefList). pcmAbis is forbidden for pcmCircuitId equals 0, 2, 4, or 6. The parent bsc object is unlocked. V12 Identifier of a pcu object defined with regard to a bsc object [0 to 2147483646] pcu GPRS (SV407 V12) Id

[M]:

[M]:

[M]:

[M]: [M]: pcu Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2285

pcuLapdEqptRefList Class 2 Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Checks :

V12

List of LAPD equipment numbers used by the pcu object [0 to 12] values in the range [0 to + infinite] pcu GPRS (SV407 V12) DP [C/M]: All the referred LAPD equipment object instances of this attribute must exist [C/M]: The sapi attribute of the referred lapdLink object instances must have been set to OML. The associatedInterface attribute of the referred lapdLink object instances must have been set to Agprs. [C/M]: A lapdLink object instance can be referred by only one pcu object instance [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the pcu object is locked.

Note : pcusn Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : pcuSNName Description :

This parameter is only available for BSC 2G V12 Identifier of a pcusn object [0 to 255] pcusn GPRS (SV407 V12) Id V12 Reference name of a PCUSN object on the OMCR. It begins with a letter and is case sensitive.

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

[30 characters max] pcusn DP [C/M]: The name of a pcuSN is unique to the OMCR.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2286

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

pcuSNReserved1 Class 3 Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Attribute reserved for future use [32768 to 32767] pcusn GPRS (SV407 V12) DP

V12

pcuSNReserved2 Class 3 Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Attribute reserved for future use [32768 to 32767] pcusn GPRS (SV407 V12) DP

V12

penaltyTime Class 3 P3 Description :

V8

Timer used by an idle mobile before reselecting a cell (C2 criterion) When a mobile places the cell on the list of strongest carriers, it starts a timer that stops after penaltyTime seconds. This timer is reset when the mobile removes the cell from the list. For the entire timer duration, the reselection criterion (C2) is assigned a negative temporaryOffset value. Refer to the cellReselectOffset entry in the Dictionary.

Value range :

Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Checks :

[20 to 640, by steps of 20] seconds. The value 640 is reserved and indicates that the temporary offset is ignored in the reselection criterion (C2) calculation. It also changes the sign in the C2 formula. bts AR 264 20 DP [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2287

perceived severity Description : To select messages according to the priority The alarm processing priority provides an indication of how it is perceived that the capability of the managed object has been affected. Refer to the alarmPriority entry in the Dictionary where the priority levels are explained. [cleared / critical / indeterminate / major / minor / warning] Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Alarm and notification logs Filter DP

Value range : Object : Type :

periodCCCHLoadIndication Class 3 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Remark : periodicity Description : Value range : Object : Condition : Type : Time between two runs if the job is to be periodically run [1 to 2147483646] minute(s) job To define if it is a periodic job. DP Periodicity at which the BTS sends the CCCH payload to the BSC (9.2 is the only value accepted) [0.00 to 2147483646] second bts DP [C/M]: The only value accepted by the system is 9.2. [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. Since the system accepts only one value for this attribute, changing it has no meaning.

plmnPermitted Class 3 Description : List of NCC of the PLMNs on which MSs are allowed to take measurements for handovers. Listening to the PLMN to which the cell belongs must be authorized. [0 to 7] bts DP [M] :

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

The parent bsc object is unlocked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2288

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

PODType Description : Value range : Object : Type : pointCode Class 1 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : pointCode Class 1 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : BSC identifier in the SS7 network (Origin Point Code) in ETSI SS7 protocol [0 to 16383] in ANSI SS7 protocol [0 to 16777215] signallingPoint DP [M] : The parent bsc object is locked. V13 MSC identifier in the SS7 network (Destination Point Code) in ETSI SS7 protocol [0 to 16383] in ANSI SS7 protocol [0 to 16777215] signallingLinkSet DP [M] : The parent bsc object is locked. Type of the BSC or BTS involved, as defined in the Physical Objects Dictionary [BSC1GT / BSC2GT / BTSoutdoor / BTSindoor / BTSmicro / BTSsmart / BTSoutdoor2G] alarm criteria DP

portEthernetOperational Description : Operational state of the OMU external Ethernet port. ISO operational state (enabled/disabled).

This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS. Value changes are not notified to the Manager. This attribute is relevant for BSC e3. Value range : Object : Type : Feature : [enabled/disabled] omu DD AR 1209 V13.1

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2289

portEthernetStatus Description :

V13

Availability status of the OMU module external Ethernet port. ISO availability status ({}, {dependency}, {failed}). This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS. Value changes are not notified to the Manager. This attribute is relevant for BSC e3.

Value range : Object : Type : Feature : port0X25Status Description :

[{} / {dependency} / {failed}] omu DD AR 1209 V13.1 V13 Operational state of the OMU module external X.25 port 0 ISO operational state (enabled/disabled). This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS. Value changes are not notified to the Manager. This attribute is relevant for BSC e3.

Value range : Object : Type : Feature : port1X25Status Description :

[{} / {dependency} / {failed}] omu DD AR 1209 V13.1 V13 Availability status of the OMU external X.25 port 1. ISO availability status ({}, {dependency}, {failed}). This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS. Value changes are not notified to the Manager. This attribute is relevant for BSC e3.

Value range : Object : Type : Feature :

[{} / {dependency} / {failed}] omu DD AR 1209 V13.1

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2290

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

portChosen Class 2 Description : Value range : Number of the SUN port to use on the OMCR end [port0 / port1 / automaticChoice (selection by the OMCR agent)] If the port is not uniquely selected, it will be dynamically assigned by the OMCR agent. Selecting automaticChoice is recommended since it allows the OMCR agent to reconfigure the port currently used when a problem occurs. bscMdInterface DP [M] : The bscMdInterface object is locked.

Object : Type : Checks : portUsed Description : Value range :

Number of the SUN port currently used [port0 / port1] This dynamic attribute identifies the OMCR port currently used. It can be different from portChosen since the OMCR agent switches the transport connection with a BSC over to the other port as and when needed. No information is displayed unless the BSS/OMCR link is established. bscMdInterface DD V13 Indicates the position of a module in a shelf [1 to 15] atmRm, cc, cem, iem, lsaRc, mms, omu, sw8kRm, tmu, trm DD AR 1209 V13.1

Object : Type : positionInShelf Description : Value range : Object : Type : Feature :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2291

powerBudgetInterCell Class 3 P4 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : powerClass Description : Value range : Transmission power class of a TDMA frame [powerClass5 (GSM 900 network, GSMR network, EGSM, or GSM 900 GSM 1800 network) powerClass1 (GSM 1800 network, GSM 1900 network, or GSM 1800 GSM 900 network)] transceiver powerClass1 DP [C]: The attribute value complies with the type of network in which the TDMA frame is used. Refer to the standardIndicator entry in the Dictionary (attribute of the parent bts object). This attribute cannot be modified. Authorization to perform intercell handovers for power budget [enabled / disabled] handOverControl enabled DP [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked.

Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

Restrictions :

[M]:

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2292

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

powerControl Description : Identifier of a powerControl object that defines the power control management parameters in a cell. A bts object may reference one and only one object of this type. [0 to 2147483646] powerControl Id [C]: The associated bts object is created and the powerControl object is not created for that object.

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

[C/D]: If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked and the associated bts object is locked. [M]: [D]: [D]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. The associated bts object is not referenced, except by an handOverControl object. If the application database of the related BSC is not built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command. [M/D]: The powerControl object is created.

powerControlIndicator Class 3 P5 Description : Whether MS signal strength measurements on BCCH measurements include

BCCH measurements must not be included when the following two conditions are met: The radio channel hops at least on two different frequencies, including the BCCH frequency. Power control on the downlink is used. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [include BCCH measurements / do not include BCCH measurements] bts include BCCH measurements DP [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2293

powerDownlink Description :

V8 Power gain in the BTS-to-MS direction used by the speech processing algorithm in a TCB This parameter is a component of the algorithm Used attribute. Refer to this entry in the Dictionary.

Value range : Type : Object : Default value :

[15 to +15] dB DP transcoderBoard 0

powerIncrStepSize Class 3 P6 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Step for increasing MS or BTS txpwr when using step by step algorithm [2, 4, 6] dB powerControl 4 dB DP [M]: [M]: [M]: Note :
lRxLevDLP + powerIncStepSize uRxLevDLP. lRxLevULP + powerIncStepSize uRxLevULP.

The parent bsc object is unlocked.

This parameter is significant only when the BTS uses the standard step by step power control algorithm.

powerRedStepSize Class 3 P7 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Step for reducing MS or BTS txpwr when using step by step algorithm [2, 4] dB powerControl 2 dB DP [M]: [M]: [M]: Note :
uRxLevDLP powerRedStepSize lRxLevDLP. uRxLevULP powerRedStepSize lRxLevULP.

The parent bsc object is unlocked.

This parameter is significant only when the BTS uses the standard step by step power control algorithm.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2294

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

powerUplink Description :

V8 Power gain in the MS-to-BTS direction used by the speech processing algorithm in a TCB This parameter is a component of the algorithm Used attribute. Refer to this entry in the Dictionary.

Value range : Type : Object : Default value :

[15 to +15] dB DP transcoderBoard 0 V12

preemptionAuthor Class 3 P8 Description : Value range : Defines the preemption management [forbidden authorizedWithRelease authorizedForcedHO] signallingPoint forbiden DP ASCI (GSMR V12) [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked. authorizedForcedHO option is not available.

Object : Default value : Type : Feature : Checks : Note :

preSynchroTimingAdvance Class 3 P9 Description :

V10

Predefined timing advance used in a presynchronized handover procedure between the serving cell and this neighbor cell. This value of timing advance is used when the parameter synchronized is set to pre sync HO with timing advance. The operator defines a predefined timing advance when a phase 2 MS goes from the serving cell to this neighbor cell approximately at the same place (railway, highway).

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

[1 to 35] (km) adjacentCellHandOver Refer to parameter synchronized DP [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2295

priority Class 2 P10 Description : Priority level of a TDMA frame. Among the set of TDMA frames attached to a cell, the one carrying the cell BCCH must always be allotted the highest priority [0]. At least <minNbOfTDMA> TDMA frames related to a cell (refer to this entry in the Dictionary) must be successfully configured for the cell to be working. They include the TDMA frame carrying the cell BCCH and those with the highest priority(ies). If this is true when the cell is brought into service, then, the cell will be working. Otherwise, its operationalState will be disabled and its availabilityStatus will be {dependency}. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 255] transceiver DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the associated bts object is locked. V13

privateMmsOmuRef Description :

Pointer to the associated omu object instance for private MMS, NULL for sharedmirrored MMS. This attribute cannot be modified. It is set by the MDR at MMS creation.

Value range : Object : Type : Feature : probable cause Description :

[0 to 2147483646] mms DP AR 1209 V13.1

To select messages according to the numerical value of the ISO probableCause field Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. The following table indicates the messages displayed according to the probable cause.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2296

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

Alarm type Communications

Probable cause Execution failure of a MD request by the BSC Call establishment error Communication protocol error Communication subsystem failure Corrupt data Degraded signal DTEDCE interface error LAN error Local node transmission error Loss of frame Loss of signal Receive failure Remote node transmission error Transmit failure

Value 62 4 5 6 9 12 13 25 27 28 29 40 42 54 58 14 18 21 30 60 15 21 23 24 30 35 37 40 41 49 50 52 54 55 59 61 2 7 9 17 32 39 46

Environmental

External alarm loop Enclosure door open Fire detected Heating, ventilation, or cooling system Material supply exhausted

Equipment

Equipment absent Equipment malfunction Heating, ventilation, or cooling system problem Input/output device error Input device error Material supply exhausted Power problem Processor problem Receive failure Receiver failure Storage capacity problem Temperature unacceptable Timing problem Transmit failure Transmitter failure

ProcessingError

Cause of restart or switchover No response Application subsystem failure Configuration or customization error Corrupt data File error Out of memory Queue size exceeded Software error

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2297

Alarm type

Probable cause Software program abnormally terminated Software program error Storage capacity problem Underlying resource unavailable Version mismatch

Value 47 48 49 56 57 63 8 34 39 43 44 45 51

QualityOfService

Shutdown Congestion Performance degraded Queue size exceeded Resource at or nearing capacity Response time excessive Retransmission rate excessive Threshold crossed

Value range : Object : Type :

[1 to 150] Alarm and notification logs Filter DP

processorLoadSupConf Class 3 L10 Description :

V8

Threshold used in the load control algorithm by the BSC The table hereafter gives the % of the theorical load usable values for each type of board.

value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

OMU (level 1, 2, 3) 8090100 8090100 8090100 100100100 8090100 8090100 8090100 8090100

Other boards 8090100 90100100 758595 100100100 8090100 90100100 758595 506070

Comments nominal value permissive value restrictive value simplex mode (see Note 1) nominal value (see Note 2) permissive value (see Note 2) restrictive value (see Note 2) exceptional value (see Note 3)

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2298

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

value 8 9

OMU (level 1, 2, 3) 8090100 8090100

Other boards 8090100 90100100

Comments reserved value (see Note 4) reserved value (see Note 4)

Note 1:

This value must be used when the operator wants to decrease the impact induced by the simplex mode. For these attribute values (4, 5, and 6), the CPU weighing factor of the OMU board is more restrictive than for the attribute values 0 to 2, and this factor must be used in case of high load on this board. This value must be used in case of exceptional events, in order to manage high blocking rate on the Air and A interface. The thresholds of these two sets of parameters are modifiable by using the BSC data config functionality.

Note 2:

Note 3:

Note 4:

Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Checks : Remark :

[0 to 9] (V11) [0] (V12) bsc BSC overload management (FM877 V12) 1 DP [M] : The bsc object is unlocked. C1400, C1506, C1803, C1834, and C1835 counters allow to check BSC overload problems. This parameter was used in the previous releases only to control the load on the BSC CPU boards.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2299

R
rACHLoadAveragingSlots Class 3 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Remark : Number of RACH access on which RACH measurements are performed (2000 is the only value accepted) [0 to 65535] bts DP [C/M]: The only value accepted by the system is 2000. [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. Since the system accepts only one value for this attribute, changing it has no meaning. V8

radChanSelIntThreshold Class 3 R1 Description :

Maximum interference level on free radio channels, below which the channels are ranged in the group of allocation priority channels The information is used to first allocate the free channels with the lowest interference level. The levels depend on the thresholdInterference attribute value defined for the cell. Refer to this entry in the Dictionary. The BSC distributes the free radio channels among two groups: The first group contains the list of channels with a measured averaged interference level equal to or lower than the defined level. The second group contains the list of channels with a measured averaged interference level higher than the defined level, and recently released channels for which no measurement is available. Four resource pools are defined for each SDCCH or TCH type of channel: low interference level radio channels that are authorized to hop low interference level radio channels that are not authorized to hop

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2300

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

high interference level radio channels that are authorized to hop high interference level radio channels that are not authorized to hop Channels are allocated cyclically inside each pool.

128

108

106

104

102

dBm

THRESHOLDINTERFERENCE = 2 THRESHOLDINTERFERENCE = 1

THRESHOLDINTERFERENCE = 4

THRESHOLDINTERFERENCE = 3

Level 0

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4
radChanSelIntThreshold = 4

radChanSelIntThreshold = 0

radChanSelIntThreshold = 2

radChanSelIntThreshold =1

radChanSelIntThreshold = 3

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

[0 to 4] handOverControl 1 DP [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked. V12

radioAllocator Class 2 (gprsBtsLockExtendedConf) Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Checks : Radio allocator type used in the cell [voice + dataCircuit, voice + dataCircuit + packetData] bts GPRS (TF1121 V12) voice + dataCircuit DP [M]:

The parent bsc object is unlocked and the bts object is locked.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2301

radioLinkTimeOut Class 2 Description : Maximum value of the counter (S) associated with the downlink SACCH messages, beyond which the radio link is cut off. It is lower than or equal to t3109. Mobiles comply with system operating conditions when the counter (S) is assigned a value lower than or equal to t3109. If the receiver is unable to decode a downlink SACCH message (BTS-to-MS direction), the counter is decreased by 1. If the message is received, the counter is increased by 2. When the counter goes down to zero, the radio link is declared faulty.

0
radio link failure decoded expected but not decoded

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

[4 to 64, by steps of 4] SACCH frames (1 unit = 480 ms on TCHs, 470 ms on SDCCHs) bts 20 SACCH DP [C/M]: radioLinkTimeOut t3109. [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the bts object is locked.

Notes :

The rlf1 attribute serves the same goal on the uplink. The system does not check that the values of the two attributes are consistent.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2302

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

radioSiteMask Class 2 Description : Definition of the PCM time slots that can be used by a site. TS n is masked when bit n is set to 0, it can be used when bit n is set to 1 in the binary field. The alarm mask is immediately displayed in the hexadecimal field just below. The alarm mask can be set using the hexadecimal field as well as the binary field. TS 0 (least significant bit) is always masked since it cannot be used. The mask defines the time slots that can be used in each PCM link allotted to a given radio site. Time slot allocation is managed by the BSC; a time slot available on a site can be used either by a radio time slot for traffic purposes or by a LAPD link which does not carry the link with the site BCF for signaling. A PCM E1 link carries thirty-two time slots. The radioSiteMask of a site using E1 links is as follows:
radioSiteMask = xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx0 | TS31 | 23 | 15 7 | | TS0

A PCM T1 link carries twenty-four time slots. The radioSiteMask of a site using T1 links is as follows:
radioSiteMask = 0000000xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx0 | TS31 | 23 | 15 7 | | TS0

Sites that do not share PCM links may be assigned the full set. In a BTS chain, the scheduled time slots of each radio site must be allotted in ascending order (TS1, TS2, TS3, etc.), beginning with the site closest to the BSC. Refer to the pcmTimeSlotNumber entry. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [32-bit mask] btsSiteManager DP [C/M]: TS 0 cannot be assigned. [C/M]: If PCM T1 links are used, TSs 25 to 31 cannot be assigned.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2303

[C/M]: The radioSiteMask of all sites sharing a same PCM link (drop and insert connections) are dissociated. [M]: The scheduled time slot of the radio site (pcmTimeSlotNumber) is masked [0] since it cannot be used. The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsSiteManager object is locked.

[M]:

radioSiteName Description : Reference name of a multiple site object on the OMCR. It begins with a letter and is case sensitive. The name of a multiple site can be used in all MMI commands to reference the multiple site on the OMCR. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [30 characters max] multiple site DP [C/M]: The name of a multiple site is unique to the OMCR. V8

radResSupBusyTimer Class 3 R2 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

Maximum time that SDCCH or TCH can be continuously occupied without generating an alarm [1 to 18] hours bsc 3 DP [M]: The bsc object is unlocked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2304

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

radResSupervision Class 3 R3 Description :

V8

Indicates whether radio resources are controlled at the cell level (both busy resources and free resources) When no control is performed, no alarm related to the use or non-use of an SDCCH or TCH is generated. Refer to the radResSupBusyTimer and radResSupFreeTimer entries in the Dictionary.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Note :

[true / false] bts true DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. radResSupBusyTimer and radResSupFreeTimer can be set automatically by the OMCR calendar function. The activation of this feature does not induce any signaling or CPU overload. Only the BSSOMCR link is overloaded at a rate of radResSupBusyTimer or radResSupFreeTimer.

radResSupFreeTimer Class 3 R4 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : reception time Description : To select messages received at that time

V8

Maximum time an SDCCH or TCH can be continuously free without generating an alarm [1 to 18] hours bsc 18 DP [M]: The bsc object is unlocked.

Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Value range : Object : Type : [<date>,<time>] Alarm and notification logs Filter DP

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2305

Record reference Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Identifier of a user call as recorded in a call monitoring data file [0 to 63] Call monitoring Display (SDO) DP [A]: [A]: It is in the range [0 to 63]. This parameter is mandatory when a user call report (Events option) or a radio measurements report (Measurements option) is requested. It can be undefined when a synthesis report (Synthesis option) is requested. In that case, a summary of all user recorded calls is displayed.

[A]:

redundantPcmNumber Description : Number of the redundant PCM link defined on BSC end This dynamic attribute is displayed provided the btsSiteManager object redundantPcmPresence attribute value is true. Value range : Object : Type : Remark : [0 to 47] btsSiteManager DD A redundant link is not normally used for traffic or signalling connections.

redundantPcmPresence Class 2 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Presence of a redundant PCM link on a radio site [true / false] btsSiteManager DP [M]: If the attribute value is true, the object bscSitePcmList attribute includes two items, one identifies the PCM active link, and the other identifies the PCM redundant link. The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsSiteManager object is locked.

[M]:

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2306

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

refPeriod Description : Value range : Object : Condition : Type : refPeriod Description : Reference counting period excessiveAnomalyRate function used by the Reference counting period when a counter is involved [0 to 345600] seconds alarm criteria To define if a counter is associated with the criteria. DP

This attribute is not used by the detection outOfRangeCounter function. In that case, the reference period is set as follows: For cumulative counters, the thresholds define total values not to be reached during a one minute reference period. For load or value counters, the thresholds define maximum or minimum average values not to be reached during a 1 minute reference period, except for the PCM unavailability counters for which they define total values not to be reached during the reference observation period. The BSS observation counter threshold crossing detection mechanism is described in NTP < 07 >. Value range : Object : Type : relatedSoftwares Description : [0 to 2147483646] minutes mdWarning if detectionFunction = excessiveAnomalyRate DP V13 This attribute identifies the list of software that are separately identifiable. This list represents the unit of software that is ready to be used by the equipment. This attribute is allocated by the MDR at object creation. This attribute cannot be modified by the Manager. [0 to 10] executableSoftware DP

Value range : Object : Type :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2307

relay Description : Identifier of a BSS alarm relay which activates an external alarm loop when the counter of immediate unacknowledged alarms shows a nonzero value for one of the BSSs assigned to the relay BSS relays are used to transfer the state of the associated BSS immediate action alarm counters to remote sites. A BSS relay can be associated with several BSCs. Conversely, a BSC can be simultaneously assigned to several relays. Value range : Object : Type : Reminder : [4 to 64] relay Id OMCR relays are used to transfer the state of system alarm counters to remote sites and are not managed by users.

remoteSsuState Description : Value range : State of the remote subsystem (BSSAP) [inService / outOfService] inService . . . . . . . . . The MSC BSSAP service is working for the BSC. outOfService . . . . . . The MSC BSSAP service is not working. signallingLinkSet DD

Object : Type : repetition rate Description :

Periodicity of short message broadcasting Each concerned BSC repeatedly sends the selected short message to the BTSs covering the selected cells at the repetition rate defined by the user. Each BTS repeatedly broadcasts the short message to all mobiles under its control, using the same repetition rate.

Value range : Object : Type :

[2 sec / 30 sec / 1 min / 2 min / 4 min / 8 min / 16 min / 32 min] short message Start broadcast DP

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2308

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

Report range Description : Value range : Object : Type : Notes :

V11 Time period chosen over which the counter values are read. [5 min / 15 min / 30 min / 60 min / 2 hours / 6 hours / 12 hours / 24 hours] report template DP The authorized values for OFS observation type are 60 min, 2 hours, 6 hours, 12 hours, and 24 hours. The authorized values for ORT and Performance Monitor observation types are 5 min, 15 min, 30 min, 60 min, and 2 hours. V11 Identifier of the report template object defined with regard to the bsc object [30 characters max] report template DP

report template Description : Value range : Object : Type : reportObjLevel Description : Level of the report to edit. Level of the report to edit

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

Fill in only when editing a permanent bsc report. Examples: bsc = all or bsc = 1 & bsc = 2. [adjacentCellHandOver / bsc / bts / transceiverZone / hardwareTcu3G] Display xxx report DP [A]: If specific objects are entered, they all belong to the same class. V12

reserved1 Class 2 (gprsPcuLockExtendedConf) Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Checks : Attribute reserved for future use

[0 to 255] pcu GPRS (SV407 V12) DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the pcu object is locked.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2309

reserved1 Class 2 (gprsTranscvLockExtendedConf) Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks : GPRS (SV407 V12) DP [M]: Attribute reserved for future use [0 to 255] transceiver

V12

The parent bsc object is unlocked and the transceiver object is locked. V12

reserved2 Class 2 (gprsPcuLockExtendedConf) Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Checks : Attribute reserved for future use [0 to 255] pcu GPRS (SV407 V12) DP [M]:

The parent bsc object is unlocked and the pcu object is locked. V12

reserved2 Class 2 (gprsTranscvLockExtendedConf) Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks : GPRS (SV407 V12) DP [M]: Attribute reserved for future use [0 to 255] transceiver

The parent bsc object is unlocked and the transceiver object is locked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2310

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

reserved3 (T3168) Class 3 (gprsBtsExtendedConf) Description :

V12

This timer is used at the MS side to define when to stop waiting for the Packet UL Assignment message after sending a Packet Resource Request message. [0 (500 msec) 1 (1000 msec) 2 (1500 msec) 3 (2000 msec) 4 (2500 msec) 5 (3000 msec) 6 (3500 msec) 7 (4000 msec)] bts GPRS (SV407 V12) DP 0 [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. V12

Value range :

Object : Feature : Type : Default value : Checks :

reserved3 Class 2 (gprsPcuLockExtendedConf) Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Checks : Attribute reserved for future use [0 to 255] pcu GPRS (SV407 V12) DP [M]:

The parent bsc object is unlocked and the pcu object is locked. V12

reserved3 Class 2 (gprsTranscvLockExtendedConf) Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Checks : Attribute reserved for future use [0 to 255] transceiver GPRS (SV407 V12) DP [M]:

The parent bsc object is unlocked and the transceiver object is locked.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2311

reserved4 (T3192) Class 3 (gprsBtsExtentedConf) Description :

V12

Wait for DL TBF release after reception of the final block. This timer T3192 is used on the MS side to define when the MS received all the RLC data blocks. When the timer expires, the MS releases the resources associated with the TBF and begins to monitor its paging group (DRX mode). [0 (500 msec) 1 (1000 msec) 2 (1500 msec) 3 (0 msec) 4 (80 msec) 5 (120 msec) 6 (160 msec) 7 (200 msec)] bts GPRS (SV407 V12) DP 0 [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. V12

Value range :

Object : Feature : Type : Default value : Checks :

reserved4 Class 2 (gprsPcuLockExtendedConf) Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Checks : Attribute reserved for future use

[0 to 255] pcu GPRS (SV407 V12) DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the pcu object is locked. V12

reserved4 Class 2 (gprsTranscvLockExtendedConf) Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks : Attribute reserved for future use [0 to 255] transceiver

GPRS (SV407 V12) DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the transceiver object is locked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2312

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

reserved5 Class 3 (gprsBtsExtendedConf) Description : Attribute reserved for future use

V12

This parameter allows to configure the MAC mode to be used in UL direction. Value range : [0 to 255] In V12.4c release, only USF is provided. Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks : 0 = USF. Value 0 selected: USF bts 0 GPRS (SV407 V12) DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. V12

reserved5 Class 2 (gprsPcuLockExtendedConf) Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Checks : Attribute reserved for future use [0 to 255] pcu GPRS (SV407 V12) DP [M]:

The parent bsc object is unlocked and the pcu object is locked. V12

reserved5 Class 2 (gprsTranscvLockExtendedConf) Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks : GPRS (SV407 V12) DP [M]: Attribute reserved for future use [0 to 255] transceiver

The parent bsc object is unlocked and the transceiver object is locked.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2313

resetCircuitRepeat Class 1 Description :

V8

Whether the RESET CIRCUIT message is repeated on bssMap19 timer elapse if the acknowledgment message was not received from the MSC (Phase II compliance) [false] signallingPoint False DP [C/M]: The only accepted value is false. [M]: The parent bsc object is locked. Since the system accepts only one value for this attribute, changing it has no meaning. V8

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Remark :

retransDuration Class 2 R5 Description :

Maximum number of occurrences of a same paging sub-group that separates the first and the last transmissions of the same paging message. [0 to 22] bts 10 DP [M]:

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

The parent bsc object is unlocked and the bts object is locked. [C/M]: retransDuration (delayBetweenRetrans + 1) x nbOfRepeat

retry on error Description : Whether commands are rerun when the system detects an application error This parameter has priority over the on error parameter. When its value is True, the errored command is rerun; when it is False, the on error parameter is analyzed. The errors involved, the time between reruns, and the maximum number of reruns are defined in static configuration data. [true / false] (default is False) commandFile Run DP

Value range : Object : Type :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2314

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

rlf1 Class 2 R6 Description :

V8 Value to compute the initial and maximum value of the (CT) counter used in the BTS radio link control algorithm The FP runs the following algorithm to monitor the uplink SACCHs (MS-to-BTS direction): The CT counter is reset to zero when the FP receives a CHANNEL ACTIVATION message. On each occurence of an uplink SACCH, the following occurs: if the channel is decoded and CT = 0, then CT = 4 * rlf1 + 4 if the channel is decoded and CT 0, then CT = min (rlf1, CT+rlf2) if the channel is not decoded, then CT = max (0, CTrlf3) When the CT counter goes down to zero, the radio link is broken and the BTS sends a CONNECTION FAILURE INDICATION message to the BSC. [0 to 15] bts 4 DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the bts object is locked. The radioLinkTimeOut attribute serves the same goal on the downlink. The system does not check that the values of the two attributes are consistent. V8 Step value by which the (CT) counter is increased by the radio link control algorithm when an uplink SACCH is decoded Refer to the rlf1 entry. [1 to 4] SACCH frames bts 2 DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the bts object is locked.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Notes :

rlf2 Class 2 R7 Description :

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2315

rlf3 Class 2 R8 Description :

V8 Step value by which the (CT) counter is decreased by the radio link control algorithm when an uplink SACCH is not decoded Refer to the rlf1 entry.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

[1 to 4] SACCH frames bts 1 DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the bts object is locked.

rmpConfState Description : Value range : State of radio measurement processing in the TDMA frame [configured / not configured / not significant] configured: The CURRENT CELL PARAMETER, NEIGHBOUR CELL PARAMETER (and EXTENDED NEIGHBOUR CELL PARAMETER when more than sixteen defined neighbor cells) messages have been acknowledged by the BTS. not configured: The messages have not been acknowledged by the BTS. If a CURRENT CELL PARAMETER message is not acknowledged, the notification 1258 Non response during the configuration of the remote L1M is issued. If a NEIGHBOUR CELL PARAMETER or EXTENDED NEIGHBOUR CELL PARAMETER message is not acknowledged, the notification 1259 Negative acknowledgement of a distant L1M command is issued. not significant: The BTS has not sent the messages to the BSC (either the TDMA frame is not working or SYS INFO was not acknowledged). transceiver DD

Object : Type :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2316

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

rndAccTimAdvThreshold Class 3 R9 Description :

V8

MS-to-BTS distance beyond which mobile access requests to a cell are refused. It defines the maximum timing advance value accepted. The effective timing advance value is broadcast in the CHANNEL REQUIRED message sent by the BTS to the BSC. If it is above the user defined threshold, the BSC ignores the request.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

[2 to 35] km (nonextended mode) [2 to 120] km (extended mode) bts 35 (nonextended cell), 90 (extended cell) DP [C/M]: The maximum distance is 35 km if the bts object extended cell attribute is false. [C/M]: The maximum distance is 120 km if the extended cell attribute of the bts object is true. [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

Note :

The number of access requests that are refused for that reason is accounted by the BSC (permanent bsc observation counter 1161/6) and fed back to the OMCR. V12

routingArea Class 2 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Feature : Type : Checks : Note : [M]:

GPRS Cell Global Identifier (locationAreaCode + cellIdentity + routingArea) [0 to 255] bts 0 GPRS (SV407 V12)

The parent bsc object is unlocked and the parent bts is locked.

A Routing Area is necessarily included in a Location Area.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2317

runCallClear Class 3 R10 Description : Number of Measurement Results messages that must be received before the call clearing algorithm in a cell is triggered [1 to 31] SACCH frames (1 unit = 480 ms on TCHs, 470 ms on SDCCHs) bts 16 [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

Value range : Object : Default value : Checks :

runHandOver Class 3 R11 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Number of Measurement Results messages that must be received before the handover algorithm in a cell is triggered. [1 to 31] SACCH frames (1 unit = 480 ms on TCHs, 470 ms on SDCCHs) bts 1 DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

runPwrControl Class 3 R12 Description : Number of Measurement Results messages that must be received before the power control algorithm in a cell is triggered. [1 to 31] SACCH frames (1 unit = 480 ms on TCHs, 470 ms on SDCCHs) bts 4 DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2318

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

rxLevAccessMin Class 3 R13 Description : Minimum signal strength level received by the mobiles for being granted access to a cell. The information is sent to MS prior to registering. As an example, a threshold level of 104 dBm corresponds to an acceptable BER of approximately 102 (minimum recommended value). Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [less than 110, 110 to 109, ... , 49 to 48, more than 48] dBm bts less than 110 dBm DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

rxLevDLIH Class 3 R14 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Maximum interference level in BTS-to-MS direction, beyond which an intra cell handover may be triggered [less than 110, 110 to 109, ... , 49 to 48, more than 48] dBm handOverControl 85 to 84 dBm DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2319

rxLevDLPBGT Class 3 R15 Description :

V11

Downlink signal strength threshold above which handovers for power budget are inhibited In certain issues, the operator may want to prevent handover for power budget in case of the received level in the serving cell is good enough so that a handover would not improve the situation. This parameter shall be set such as rxLevDLPBGT lRxLevDLH.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Notes :

[less than 110, 110 to 109,..., 49 to 48, more than 48] dBm adjacentCellHandOver more than 48 DP [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked This parameter shall be disabled by setting it to its default value: more than 48 (dBm). This parameter is only available for DCU4 or DRX transceiver architecture. It shall be disabled for DCU2 architecture.

rxLevHreqave Class 3 R16 Description : Number of signal strength measurements performed on a serving cell, used to compute arithmetic strength averages in handover and power control algorithms [1 to 10] number of measurement results handOverControl 8 DP [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2320

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

rxLevHreqaveBeg Class3 R17 Description :

V11

Number of measurement reports on current cell for signal strength arithmetic average for early handover mechanism Refer to the rxLevHreqave entry in the Dictionary. This parameter is coupled with hoMarginBeg and rxNCellHreqaveBeg use.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Notes :

[1 to 10] handOverControl 2 DP [M] : The parent bsc is unlocked. This parameter shall be set such as rxLevHreqaveBeg rxLevHreqave. This parameter is only available for DCU4 or DRX transceiver architecture.

rxLevHreqt Class 3 R18 Description : Number of arithmetic averages taken into account to compute the weighted average signal strength in handover and power control algorithms. Each is calculated from rxLevHreqave signal strength measurements on a serving cell. [1 to 16] handOverControl 1 DP [C/M]: It is equal to the number of weights in rxLevWtsList (refer to this entry in the Dictionary). [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2321

rxLevMinCell Class 3 R19 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Minimum signal strength level received by MS for being granted access to a neighbor cell [less than 110, 110 to 109, ... , 49 to 48, more than 48] dBm adjacentCellHandOver 95 to 94 dBm (GSM 900), 93 to 92 (GSM 1800) DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

rxLevULIH Class 3 R20 Description : Value range : Maximum interference level in MS-to-BTS direction, beyond which an intra cell handover may be triggered [less than 110, 110 to 109, ... , 49 to 48, more than 48] dBm, without Uplink Mapping Feature activated. [less than 117, ... , more than 42] dBm, when the Uplink Mapping Feature is used. handOverControl Uplink Mapping (TF 876) 85 to 84 dBm DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Checks :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2322

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

rxLevWtsList Class 3 R21 Description : Values of weights to be used for signal strength weighed average The L1M function first calculates rxLevHreqave arithmetic averages from raw measurements, and balances rxLevHreqt averages among those with the weights defined in rxLevWtsList. Each arithmetic average is partnered with one weight in the list. Weight/average associations are set in the order which the weights are recorded. The latest computed arithmetic average is always partnered with the first weight in the list. Super-average = [ (averagei x weighti)] / 100, i = 1 to rxLevHreqt Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [0 to 100] % handOverControl 100 DP [M]: [M]: The number of weights in the list is equal to rxLevHreqt and their sum equals 100. The parent bsc object is unlocked.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2323

S
sapi Description : Value range : Object : Type : Restrictions : scannerId Description : Value range : Identifier of the mdScanner object describing the observation [0 to 2147483646] 0 identifies the OMCR permanent manager observation. For a BSS observation or the OMCR agent permanent observation, this parameter must match the reference number of an mdScanner object. Display xxx report DP [A]: If the request concerns a BSS observation or the OMCR agent permanent observation, the related mdScanner object is created. Service Access Point Indicator that defines the type of LAPD link use [RSL / OML] lapdLink DP [M]: This attribute cannot be modified.

Object : Type : Checks :

scannerId Description : Value range : Identifier of the mdScanner object describing the observation [0 to 2147483646] 0 identifies the OMCR permanent manager observation. For a BSS observation or the OMCR agent permanent observation, this parameter must match the reference number of an mdScanner object. List observation messages DP [A]: If the request concerns a BSS observation or the OMCR agent permanent observation, the related mdScanner object is created.

Object : Type : Checks :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2324

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

sequenceNumber Description : Object : Type : serial number Description : 3 fields (geographical scope, message code, update number) which identify a particular message from the source and type indicated by the Message Identifier and are altered every time the message with a given Message Identifier is changed [geographical scope, message code, update number] geographical scope. .[immediate cell wide normal PLMN wide normal location area wide normal cell wide] message code . . . . . [0 to 1023] differentiate messages from same source and type (same Message Identifier) update number . . . . [0 to 15] Object : Type : differentiate older and newer versions of the same message short message Display broadcast characteristics DP Trace record identification number traceFileReady DP

Value range :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2325

serial number Description : 3 fields (geographical scope, message code, update number) which identify a particular message from the source and type indicated by the Message Identifier and are altered every time the message with a given Message Identifier is changed [geographical scope, message code, update number] geographical scope. .[immediate cell wide normal PLMN wide normal location area wide normal cell wide] message code . . . . . [0 to 1023] differentiate messages from same source and type (same Message Identifier) update number . . . . [0 to 15] Object : Type : differentiate older and newer versions of the same message short message Display broadcast characteristics DP V10

Value range :

session context saving mode Description : Value range : Object : Type : shelfNumber Description : Value range : Object : Type : Feature : Indicates the position of a module in a shelf Session context saving mode [automatic when logout / on user request] user profile DP

V13

[0 to 1] atmRm, cc, cem, iem, lsaRc, mms, omu, sw8kRm, tmu, trm. DP AR 1209 V13.1 V13.1

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2326

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

short message Description : Identifier (name) of a short message on the OMCR A message name identifies the short message on the OMCR; it is not relayed to the BSC during broadcasting. It can be changed by the Rename command (see the new name entry in the Dictionary). Setting a short message characteristics does not affect the current broadcast of the message. The change will be effective when a new broadcast command is launched. A short message broadcasting is identified on the OMCR by a unique serial number assigned by the system when broadcasting is initiated (refer to this entry in the Dictionary). Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [case sensitive, 20 characters max] short message Id C]: [M]: [D]: sicBoardsInt Description : Value range : State of the BSC chain SIC boards. Each board is identified by its type [SICD / SICX / CCS7] and a number in the type. [working / fault] working . . . . . . . . . The SIC board initialized. was correctly The name of a short message is unique to the OMCR. The short message is created. The short message is not being broadcast.

fault . . . . . . . . . . . . An error has been detected on the board. The number of SICX, SICD, and CCS7 boards in a BSC depends on its hardware architecture. Refer to the bscType entry in the Dictionary. bsc Display chain information DD This parameter is only available for BSC 2G

Object : Type : Note :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2327

signallingLink Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Identifier of a signallingLink object defined with regard to a signallingLinkSet object [0 to 2147483646] signallingLink Id [C]: The number of signaling links controlled by a BSC is limited to maxSigLPerSigLS (static configuration data).

[C/M]: The referenced pcmCircuit object (pcmCircuitId) is assigned to the A interface and depends on the same transcoder object (transcoderId) as the signallingLink object. [C/M]: The referenced PCM,TS pair (pcmCircuitId and timeSlotNumber) is not already assigned to a signallingLink or xtp object dependent on the same transcoder object, and the time slot is not mapped on the TS used by the OMC channel on the Ater interface. [C/M]: If the SS7 link uses PCMA link no.3 (pcmCircuitId), the timeSlotNumber is in the range [1 to 27] if the PCM link is an E1 link or in the range [1 to 20] if the PCM link is a T1 link. Since the last four time slots of that link are not mapped on the Ater interface, they are unusable (refer to the transcoderMatrix entry in the Dictionary). [C/D]: If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked. [D]: [D]: If the application database of the related BSC is built, the signallingLink object is locked. If the application database of the related BSC is not built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command. No mdScanner object refers to the signallingLink object (no observation is running on that object).

[D]:

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2328

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

signallingLinkResState Description : Value range : SS7 channel resource state [blocked / inhibited / inhibitedLocal / inhibitedDistant / inhibitedLocalDistant / inhibitedBlocked / notInhibitedNotBlocked] inhibited . . . . . . . . . . . . . state enforced by SetInhibit command a user

inhibitedLocal . . . . . . . . state enforced by a user inhibitedDistant . . . . . . . state enforced by the MSC inhibitedLocalDistant . . state enforced by a user and the MSC blocked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . state enforced by the MSC following a loss of dialogue between MTP2 and MTP3 signallingLink DD

Object : Type : signallingLinkSet Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

Identifier of a signallingLinkSet object describing a BSCMSC link on MSC end [0 to 2147483646] signallingLinkSet Id [C]: [C]: [D]: The signallingLinkSet object is not created for the parent signallingPoint object. If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked. The application database of the related BSC has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2329

signallingPoint Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Identifier of a signallingPoint object describing a BSCMSC link on BSC end [0 to 2147483646] signallingPoint Id [C]: [C]: [C]: [D]: The signallingPoint object is not created for the parent bsc object. The software object related to the parent bsc object is created. If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked. The application database of the related BSC has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command.

signallingPointType Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Remark : Whether the BSCMSC link acts as an STP (Signaling Transfer Point) [STP / noSTP (only value accepted)] signallingPoint noSTP DP [C/M]: The only value accepted by the system is noSTP. Since the system accepts only one value for this attribute, changing it has no meaning.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2330

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

signallingTerminalNumber Class 2 Description : Number of the CCS7 port used by an SS7 channel in the BSC = 2 x number of the mother CCS7 board [0 to 1] + port number [0 to 1] [0 to 1] (BSC 6000 types 1, 2), [0 to 3] (BSC 6000 types 3, 4, 5), [0 to 1] (BSC 12000 type 1), [0 to 3] (BSC 12000 types 2, 3, 4), [0 to 5] (BSC 12000 type 5). signallingLink DP [C/M]: The port number is one-of-a-kind to the BSC (a CCS7 port controls one and only one SS7 link). [M]: Note : The parent bsc object is unlocked and the signallingLink object is locked.

Value range :

Object : Type : Checks :

This parameter is only available for BSC 2G V12

sigPReserved1 Class 3 S1 Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Checks : Notes :

Reduction factor used to reduce the BSC capacity, so as to adjust the BSC capacity to the MSC. [32768 to 32767] Only 0 to 9 values are taken into account. signallingPoint BSC capacity control (FM1251.1 V12) 0 DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

If the sigPReserved1 parameter is set to 0, the number of RAD_CNX contexts is not reduced, and the BSC capacity is full. If the sigPReserved1 parameter is set to 9, the number of RAD_CNX contexts is reduced, and the BSC capacity is reduced by 90%.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2331

sigPReserved2 Class 3 S2 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Attribute reserved for future use [32768 to 32767] signallingPoint 0 DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

V12

siteGsmFctList Class 2 S3 Description : Value range : List of up to 14 elements that identify the GSM functions configured in a site BCF [entityMgt / download / siteMgt / abisSig / abisTraf / rfTrans / rfRecep / cellMgt / fhMgt / tdmaMgt / tsMgt / gsmTime / car0Fil / freqMgt]

Routing mode
The routing mode of the messages handled by the GSM functions, which enables the Abis interface to identify the GSM entity to which the messages are sent, and the maximum response time of each GSM function are summarized in the following table.
GSM function Routing mode Without centralized O&M GSM entity Management downloading site Management abis Signalling Management abis Traffic Management radio frequency Transmission radio frequency Reception cell Management frequency hopping Management relative tei relative tei relative tei bcf bcf bcf not implemented bcf relative tei With centralized O&M bcf relative tei bcf bcf bcf bcf none bcf bcf 10 seconds 32 seconds 120 seconds 120 seconds 120 seconds 120 seconds 0 second 120 seconds 30 seconds Response time

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2332

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

GSM function

Routing mode Without centralized O&M With centralized O&M bcf bcf none none bcf

Response time

tdma Management time slot Management gsmTime carrier 0 Filling frequency Management

relative tei relative tei not implemented not implemented bcf

30 seconds 30 seconds 0 second 0 second 120 seconds

Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

btsSiteManager site Mgt/abisSig DP [C/M]: Each function occurs once in the list. [C/M]: The entityMgt, download, tdmaMgt, and tsMgt functions are included in the list. [C/M]: The freqMgt function is only allowed for a BTS using cavity coupling. [M]: The fhMgt function is included in the list if bts objects dependent on the btsSiteManager object are authorized to hop (btsIsHopping ). The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsSiteManager object is locked.

[M]: Note :

The GSM functions whose routing mode is not implemented must not be included in the list. See the preceding table. The GSM entities managing these GSM functions are BCF and TRX.

siteName Description : Reference name of a radio site on the OMCR. It begins with a letter and is case sensitive. The name of a site can be used in all MMI commands to reference the site on the OMCR. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [30 characters max] btsSiteManager DP [C/M]: The name of a site is unique to the OMCR.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2333

slc Class 2 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Code of an SS7 channel. It is identical on BSC and MSC ends. [0 to 15] signallingLink DP [C/M]: The code of an SS7 link is one-of-a-kind to the BSC. [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the signallingLink object is locked. V9

small to large zone HO priority Class 3 Description :

External priority of inter-zone handovers from the inner zone to the outer zone in a concentric cell This attribute is defined if the associated bts object describes a concentric cell.

Value range : Object : Default value : Condition : Type : Checks :

[0 to 17] handOverControl 17 To define if the associated bts object describes a concentric cell DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. V9

smoke detector Class 2 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

Presence or absence of the optional equipment smoke detector in S4000 Oudoor, S4000 Smart or S8000 Outdoor [Present / Absent] btsSiteManager DP [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsSiteManager object is locked

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2334

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

smsCB Class 3 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Whether broadcasting of short messages in unacknowledged mode is authorized in a cell [used / unused] bts used DP [M]: The attribute value is used if the channelType of one of the channel objects dependent on the bts object is bcchSdcch4CBCH or sdcch8CBCH. The parent bsc object is unlocked.

[M]: Remark :

Configuration of logical channels and broadcast of short messages are managed by two separate OMCR functions. When a short message broadcast is started, the presence of a CBCH in the channelType of a channel object dependent on a concerned bts object is checked. However, the SMSCB function is not aware of changes made to that attribute. Consequently, withdrawing a CBCH from the configuration will stop any short message broadcast in the concerned cell without the SMSCB function knowing.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2335

software Description : Identifier of a software object The software object class allows users to manage the software releases of bsc objects (BSC), btsSiteManager objects (BCF), transceiverEquipment objects (TRX), and transcoderBoard objects (TCB). Software objects are managed by the OMCR Software Management function. The software objects have four attributes: sWVersionBackUp, sWVersionFallback, sWVersionNew, and sWVersionRunning. They are managed by the system according to the following user commands: Download, Activate new version, and Return to previous version. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 2147483646] software Id Checks common to all software objects: [C]: [C]: [D]: The software object is not created for the parent managed object. The sWVersionRunning attribute is defined (nonzero value). If the application database of the related BSC is not built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command. The sWVersionRunning attribute matches the bscType of the bsc object.

Additional checks performed on the software-bsc object: [C]:

[C/D]: If the application database of the related BSC is built, the bsc object is locked. [D]: All objects dependent on the bsc object are deleted.

Additional checks performed on the software-btsSiteManager object: [C/D]: If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsSiteManager object is locked. [D]: All objects dependent on the btsSiteManager object are deleted.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2336

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

Additional check performed software-transceiverEquipment object:

on

the

[C/D]: If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked, the parent bts object is locked, and the transceiverEquipment object is locked. Additional check performed on the software-transcoderBoard object: [C/D]: If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked and the transcoderBoard object is locked. softwareLabel Description : V13 This attribute is a Manager comment about the related software. This attribute is modified by the Manager. Value changes are notified to the Manager. [0 to 80] executableSoftware DP

Value range : Object : Type : source indicator Description :

To select messages according to the source of the operation Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.

Value range : Object : Type : specific problems Description :

[resource operation / management operation / unknown] Alarm and notification logs Filter DP

To select messages according to a (cause, fault number) pair This parameter allows to select a fault number with one or more associated causes. Refer to these entries in the Dictionary.

Object : Type :

Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Alarm and notification logs Filter DP

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2337

speechMode Class 3 Description :

V8

List of the speech algorithms associated with channel use modes in the cell The full rate value refers to the standard algorithm. The enhanced full rate value only applies when all the TCUs linked to the BSC are equipped with TCB2 boards (refer to the version entry in the Dictionary).

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

[full rate / enhanced full rate] bts full rate DP [C/M]: The full rate value is mandatory; it must be defined in the list. [C/M]: The enhanced full rate value is defined in the list if at least one of the TCUs linked to the BSC is equipped with TCB2 boards. [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. V8

speechMode Class 3 Description :

List of the speech algorithms associated with channel use modes on the A interface The full rate value refers to the standard algorithm. The enhanced full rate value only applies when all the TCUs linked to the BSC are equipped with TCB2 boards.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

[full rate / enhanced full rate] signallingPoint full rate DP [C/M]: The full rate value is mandatory; it must be defined in the list. [C/M]: The enhanced full rate value is defined in the list if at least one of the TCUs linked to the BSC is equipped with TCB2 boards. [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2338

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

speechOnHoppingTs Class 3 (gprsBtsLockExtendedConf) Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Default value : Checks : Attribute reserved for future use [true, false] bts GPRS (SV407 V12) DP false [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

V12

speechVersionAsscomp Class 1 S4 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

V12

Whether the Speech version element is used or not in the ASSIGN COMPLETE messages (Phase II compliance). [false / true] signallingPoint true DP [M]: The parent bsc object is locked. V12

speechVersionHoperf Class 1 S5 Description :

Whether the Speech version element is used or not in the HANDOVER PERFORMED messages (Phase II compliance) [false / true] signallingPoint DP [M]:

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

The parent bsc object is locked. V12

speechVersionHoreq Class 1 S6 Description :

Whether the Speech version element is used in the HANDOVER REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE messages (Phase II compliance) [false / true] signallingPoint true DP [M]: The parent bsc object is locked.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2339

speechVersionHorqd Class 1 S7 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

V12

Whether the Speech version element is used or not in the HANDOVER REQUIRED messages (Phase II compliance). [false / true] signallingPoint true DP [M]: The parent bsc object is locked. V10

standard indicator AdjC Class 3 S8 Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Checks : Note : Type of network in which this neighbor cell is working

[gsm / extended gsm / dcs1800 / pcs1900 / R gsm / gsmdcs (V12) / dcsgsm (V12)] adjacentCellHandover Dualband cell management (TF875 V12) gsm DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. gsmdcs and dcsgsm are only available for S8000 DRX transceiver architecture. V10

standard indicator AdjC Class 3S9 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Feature : Checks : Note : Type of network in which this neighbor cell is working

[gsm / extended gsm / dcs1800 / pcs1900 / R gsm / gsmdcs (V12) / dcsgsm (V12)] adjacentCellReselection gsm DP Dualband cell management (TF875 V12) [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. gsmdcs and dcsgsm are only available for S8000 DRX transceiver architecture.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2340

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

standardIndicator Class 2 Description : Type of network in which the cell is working

V9

From the value given to this attribute, the OMCR determines the network frequency band and the frequencies that can be used by all radio entities (cells and radio time slots) in the related site. Value range : Object : Type : Feature : Checks : [gsm / extended gsm / dcs1800 / pcs1900 / R gsm / gsmdcs (V12) / dcsgsm (V12)] bts DP Dualband cell management (TF875 V12) [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the bts object is locked.

GSM 900 network (gsm) The GSM 900 frequency band is 2*25 MHz wide and includes 124 pairs of carrier frequencies, numbered [1 to 124], which are 200 kHz apart: Uplink direction (MStoBTS) = 890 to 915 MHz Downlink direction (BTStoMS) = 935 to 960 MHz A frequency N corresponds to the following Uplink frequency: f1 = 890 + 0.2xN MHz where N = [1 to 124] For the Downlink frequency there is the following shift: f2 = f1 + 45 MHz EXTENDED GSM network (extended gsm) The extended GSM frequency band is 2*35 MHz wide and includes 174 pairs of carrier frequencies, numbered [0 to 124] and [975 to 1023], which are 200 kHz apart: Uplink direction (MStoBTS) = 880 to 915 MHz Downlink direction (BTStoMS) = 925 to 960 MHz A frequency N corresponds to the following Uplink frequency: f1 = 880.2 + 0.2x(N 975) MHz where N = [975 to 1023] f1 = 890 + 0.2xN MHz where N = [0 to 124]

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2341

For the Downlink frequency there is the following shift: f2 = f1 + 45 MHz Note : The extended GSM frequency band defined hereabove is the definition of the ETSI. GSMR network (R gsm) The GSMR frequency band is 2*39 MHz wide and includes 194 pairs of carrier frequencies, numbered [0 to 124] and [955 to 1023], which are 200 kHz apart: Uplink direction (MStoBTS) = 876 to 915 MHz Downlink direction (BTStoMS) = 921 to 960 MHz A frequency N corresponds to the following Uplink frequency: f1 = 876.2 + 0.2x(N 955) MHz where N = [955 to 1023] f1 = 890 + 0.2xN MHz where N = [0 to 124] For the Downlink frequency there is the following shift: f2 = f1 + 45 MHz Note : The GSMR frequency band defined hereabove is the definition of the ETSI. GSM 1800 network (dcs1800) The GSM 1800 frequency band is 2*75 MHz wide and includes 374 pairs of carrier frequencies, numbered [512 to 885], which are 200 kHz apart: Uplink direction (MStoBTS) = 1710 to 1785 MHz Downlink direction (BTStoMS) = 1805 to 1880 MHz A frequency N corresponds to the following Uplink frequency: f1 = 1710.2 + 0.2x(N 512) MHz where N = [512 to 885] For the Downlink frequency there is the following shift: f2 = f1 + 95 MHz GSM 1900 network (pcs1900) The GSM 1900 frequency band is 2*60 MHz wide and includes 299 pairs of carrier frequencies, numbered [512 to 810], which are 200 kHz apart: Uplink direction (MStoBTS) = 1850 to 1910 MHz

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2342

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

Downlink direction (BTStoMS) = 1930 to 1990 MHz A frequency N corresponds to the following Uplink frequency: f1 = 1850.2 + 0.2x(N 512) MHz where N = [512 to 810] For the Downlink frequency there is the following shift: f2 = f1 + 80 MHz GSM 900 GSM 1800 network (gsmdcs) The primary band is GSM 900 (see above GSM 900 Network paragraph). The secondary band is GSM 1800 (see above GSM 1800 Network paragraph). GSM 1800 GSM 900 network (dcsgsm) The primary band is GSM 1800 (see above GSM 1800 Network paragraph). The secondary band is GSM 900 (see above GSM 900 Network paragraph). Note : gsmdcs and dcsgsm are only available for S8000 DRX transceiver architecture. V13 ISO State [hotStandby / coldStandby / providingService] atmRm, cem, iem, lsaRc, omu, sw8kRm DD AR 1209 V13.1

standbyStatus Description : Value range : Object : Type : Feature : start date Description :

Date on which data were first recorded in the log (default is the current date) Date format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.

Value range : Object : Type :

[<date>] System session log Filter DP

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2343

start time Description : Absolute time of first job run (default is the current date and time) Absolute time format entry forms are detailed NTP < 130 >. in

If date matches the current date, set time to a value at least one minute after the current time. Value range : Object : Type : start time Description : Start of system log reading on the requested start date (default is 00:00) Time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Value range : Object : Type : [<time>] System session log Filter DP [<date>,<time>] job DP

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2344

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

startAlarmFilter Description : Condition for triggering an alarm when no counter is involved The following fields can be combined in the logical expression:
Parameter administrativeState availabilityStatus bsc equipment name bsc model Cause btsSiteManager model bts equipment name equipment processor number faultNumber operationalState perceived severity postMortem usageState Notification type state change state change alarm alarm alarm alarm alarm alarm alarm state change alarm alarm state change Operators = = = = < = > = = < = > < = > = = = =

The following logical operators can be used in the logical expression: & stands for the logical AND. | stands for the logical OR. ! stands for the logical NOT. The postMortem field can take two values, either before BSC restart or after BSC restart. They have the following meaning: before BSC restart means that the notification issued by the BSC was received by the OMCR agent without the BSC having restarted (nominal conditions).

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2345

after BSC restart means that the notification was issued by the BSC, then, the BSC was restarted before the OMCR agent received the notification. These notifications do not trigger alarms. Value range : Object : Condition : Type : [logical expression] alarm criteria To define if no counter is associated to the criterion. DP

startAlarmThreshold Description : Maximum counting value in the reference period, above which a start-of-alarm message is sent. The value must be checked by users. This attribute defines a maximum value read at the end of the defined refPeriod. It must be greater than endAlarmThreshold. Threshold changes are effective when the OMCR is restarted. Value range : Object : Type : [0.00 to 2147483646] mdWarning if detectionFunction = excessiveAnomalyRate DP

startAlarmThreshold Description : Minimum (thresholdLow) / maximum (thresholdHigh) counting value in the reference period, below/above which a start of lower threshold/upper threshold alarm message is sent. The value must be checked by users. If thesholdType = thresholdLow, this attribute defines a minimum value for a one minute reference period (or the counter collecting period for PCM unavailability counters), below which a start of lower threshold alarm message is sent. It must be lower than startAlarmThreshold low. If thesholdType = thresholdHigh, this attribute defines a maximum value for a one minute reference period (or the counter collecting period for PCM unavailability counters), above which a start of upper threshold alarm message is sent. It must be greater than startAlarmThreshold high. Threshold changes are effective when the OMCR is restarted.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2346

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

Value range : Object : Type : Remark :

[0.00 to 2147483646] mdWarning if detectionFunction = outOfRangeCounter DP

The treshold limits depend on the associated counter. The BSS counter threshold crossing detection mechanism is described in NTP < 07 >. startCounterThreshold Description : Value range : Object : Condition : Type : startTime Description : Value range : Object : Condition : Type : startTime Description : Date and time at which the temporary observation started This information is provided by the system and indicates the exact time when the observation counters are collected for the first time. Value range : Object : Type : [<date> <time>] mdScanner Display DI Date and time at which files were restored on the OMCR agent disks [<date> <time>] log Display This attribute is significant and displayed only when the log object describes a log restored on the OMCR agent disks. DP Minimum counting threshold when a counter is involved [0 to 100] alarm criteria To define when a counter is associated with the criterion. DP

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2347

stopTime Description : Value range : Object : Condition : Type : stopTime Description : Date and time at which the temporary observation will stop Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [<date>,<time>] mdScanner Create temporary observation DP [C]: [C]: Restrictions : stopTime startTime > mdGranularityPeriod minutes stopTime startTime < 1440 minutes (24 hours) Date and time at which the OMCR agent will purge the restored files [<date> , <time>] log Display This attribute is significant and displayed only when the log object describes a log restored on the OMCR agent disks. DP

[M]: This attribute cannot be modified. Stop the observation if necessary by deleting the mdScanner object and restart it by creating a new mdScanner object with the appropriate attributes.

subChanId Description : AGCH subchannel number: Do not fill in when the channelType of the radio time slot is tchFull or mainBCCH [0 to 7] when channelType = sDCCH or sdch8CBCH, [0 to 3] otherwise channel Set channel state DP [A]: The parent btsSiteManager and bts objects are unlocked.

Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Reminder :

A BCCH or a CBCH cannot be blocked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2348

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

subject Description : Identifier (name) of a user message in the OMCR It is displayed in the Inter-user message manager window of the message addressees and allows them to identify the message before reading. Value range : Object : Type : Suffix Description : Optional string of characters to add to the name of the call monitoring data files when saved in the OMCR When a suffix is defined, a call monitoring data file transferred to the OMCR by running the Transfer command is saved under the name SDO_CM_BSCnnn_<Suffix>.yyyymmdd, where nnn identifies the BSC hosting the data file (if bsc = 5, then nnn is read 005) and yyyymmdd is the file saving date. See to NTP < 07 >. Value range : Object : Type : summary Description : Object : Type : Text explaining the goal of the command file commandFile DP [10 characters max] Call monitoring Transfer (SDO) DP [40 characters max] user message Id

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2349

supportingTransceiverEquipment Description : Identifier of the TRX associated with the TDMA frame by the BSC This dynamic attribute allows the user to know the TDMATRX/DRX association established by the BSC. It is displayed provided the transceiver object operationalState is enabled. Refer to this entry in the Dictionary. If the TRX/DRX is declared faulty because of a frequency loss, the system takes the following actions: attempt to reconfigure the associated TDMA frame on the redundant TRX/DRX if there is no redundant TRX/DRX, reconfiguration of the TDMA frame on another TRX/DRX if its priority is higher than the priority of the TDMA frame currently configured If the associated TDMA frame cannot be reconfigured for some reason, all frames that were using the frequency lost by the TRX/DRX will be disturbed. Value range : Object : Type : Remark : [0 to 2147483646] transceiver DD Only BTSs using cavity coupling manage dynamic reconfiguration of hopping frequencies. V13 Identifier of the sw8kRm object class. This identifier is allocated by the MDR at object creation, depending on the shelf and slot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attribute cannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC e3 and TCU e3. [0 to 2147483646] sw8kRm DP

sw8kRmId Description :

Value range : Object : Type :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2350

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

sWVersionBackUp Description : Reference number of the backup software release. It is identical to sWVersionRunning. Refer to the sWVersionRunning entry in the Dictionary. [Bsxabvcdefgh (BSC software) / XXXabcdef (others)] software DP

Value range : Object : Type :

sWVersionFallBack Description : Reference number of the previous software release. It is updated following a version change command. Refer to the sWVersionRunning entry in the Dictionary. This attribute is undefined when the object is created. As a result of an Activate new version command, the system updates the sWVersionFallBack attribute with the reference of the software release previously running in the related BSS entity. As a result of a Return to previous version command, the system sets the sWVersionFallBack attribute undefined. [Bsxabvcdefgh (BSC software) / XXXabcdef (others)] software DP

Value range : Object : Type : sWVersionNew Description :

Reference number of the new software release. It is updated following a download or version change command. Refer to the sWVersionRunning entry in the Dictionary. This attribute is undefined when the object is created. As a result of an Activate new version command, the system sets the sWVersionNew attribute undefined. As a result of a Download or Return to previous version command, the system updates the sWVersionNew attribute with the reference of the software release downloaded or that was presently running in the related BSS entity. [Bsxabvcdefgh (BSC software) / XXXabcdef (others)] software DP

Value range : Object : Type :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2351

sWVersionRunning Description : Reference number of the software release currently running. It is defined by the user at object creation time and is updated following version change commands. This parameter identifies the type and version of the software currently running in the related BSS entity. Check the BSS delivery descriptor file to fill it in when creating the software object. As a result of an Activate new version or Return to previous version command, the system updates the sWVersionRunning attribute with the reference of the software release newly activated in the related BSS entity. The following tables show the reference number formats for each type of BSS entity driven by software. BSC software: Format = BSxabvcdefgh
Field BSx ab v cd ef gh Meaning Type of software Version number Reserved Sub-version number Edition number Revision factor [01 .. 99] [01 .. 99] [01 .. 99] Value x = [1 .. 3] [09 .. 32]

BTSs and all TCUs software: Format = XXXabcdef


Field XXX Meaning Type of software Value BCF : BCF/BC1/BC2 TRX : TRX/DRX TCB : TCB [08 .. 32] BCF : [A .. H] TRX : [A .. H] TCB : [A .. H] BCF : [1 .. 8] TRX : [1 .. 8] TCB : [1 .. 8] BCF : [01 .. 32] TRX : [01 .. 32] TCB : [01 .. 64]

ab c

Version number Sub-version number

Edition number

ef

Revision factor

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2352

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

[Bsxabvcdefgh (BSC software) / XXXabcdef (others)] software DP [C]: [C]: The attribute is defined (nonzero value). The first three letters of the reference number match the type of the managed object related to the software object. For a software-bsc object, the version number complies with the bscType of the parent bsc object.

[C]:

synchronized Class 3 S1S2 Description : Value range : Whether the neighbor cell and the associated serving cell are synchronous, that is attached to the same BTS [not synchronized cells / synchronized cells / pre sync HO with timing advance / pre sync HO, default timing advance] not synchronized cells: the neighbor cell and the serving cell are not attached to the same BTS. synchronized cells: the neighbor cell and the serving cell are attached to the same BTS pre sync HO with timing advance: the handover procedure between the neighbor cell and the serving cell is presynchronized with the GSM Real Time Difference between the neighbor cell and the serving cell in the HANDOVER COMMAND message pre sync HO, default timing advance: a predefined timing advance is used in the presynchronized handover procedure between the serving cell and the neighbor cell. Refer to preSynchroTimingAdvance parameter. Object : Default value : Type : Checks : adjacentCellHandOver not synchronized cells DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2353

synchronizing PCM Description : Value range : Object : Type : Synchronizing PCM choice (on Ater interface)

V10

[synchro mic 0, synchro mic 2, synchro mic 4, synchro mic 6, synchro internal clock] bsc DD

syntheticFaultNumber Description : Value range : Object : Condition : Type : Checks : system state Description : Value range : State of the configurable BSC boards and state of the traffic to the MSC The following is a list of equipment in alphabetical order: active passive link [opened / closed] bsc . . . . . . . . . . . . . [simplex / duplex] chain . . . . . . . . . . . . [active / passive] chain . . . . . . . . . . . . [ready / not ready] ECI DDTI ALA SWM initialisation [allowed / not allowed] reset MSCL . . . . . . . [in progress / not in progress] Object : Type : other chain . . . . . . . [ready / not ready] bsc Display chain information DD Synthetic fault number to assign to the alarm when a counter is involved [39500 to 39549] alarm criteria To define when a counter is associated to the criterion. DP [C/M]: The number is in the range [39500 to 39549].

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2354

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

T
t3101 Class 3 T1 Description : BSC timer triggered during the immediate assignment procedure. Use the suggested system value. It is set on transmission of CHANNEL ACTIVATION by the BSC and canceled on receipt of ESTABLISH INDICATION sent by the BTS. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : t3103 Class 3 T2 Description : BSC timer triggered during the handover procedure. Use the suggested system value. It is set on transmission of HANDOVER COMMAND by the BSC and canceled on receipt of either HANDOVER COMPLETE or HANDOVER FAILURE sent by the MS (intra-bss handover), or CLEAR COMMAND sent by the MSC (inter-bss handover). At expiry of T3103, the channel is released. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [2 to 255] seconds (t3103 < bssMapT8) bts 5 seconds DP [C/M]: t3103 < bssMapT8 (attribute of the parent bsc object ) [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. [2 to 255] seconds bts 3 DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2355

t3107 Class 3 T3 Description : BSC timer triggered during the assignment command procedure. Use the suggested system value. It is set on transmission of ASSIGN COMMAND by the BSC and canceled on receipt of either ASSIGN COMPLETE or ASSIGN FAILURE sent by MS. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : t3109 Class 3 T4 Description : BSC timer triggered during the SACCH deactivation procedure. Use the suggested system value. It is set on receipt of DEACTIVATE SACCH ACKNOWLEDGE sent by the BTS and canceled on receipt of RELEASE INDICATION sent by the BTS. If the timer expires, a RF CHANNEL RELEASE message is sent to the BTS and a RF CHANNEL RELEASE ACK is expected. Mobiles comply with system operating conditions when the counter (S) associated with SACCH messages is assigned a value below or equal to t3109. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [2 to 255] seconds (t3109 radioLinkTimeout) bts 12 seconds DP [C/M]: t3109 radioLinkTimeout [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. [2 to 255] seconds bts 10 seconds DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2356

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

t3111 Class 3 T5 Description : BSC timer triggered during the radio resource clearing procedure. Use the suggested system value. It is set on receipt of RELEASE INDICATION sent by the BTS. On elapse, the BSC sends RF CHANNEL RELEASE. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : t3122 Class 3 T6 Description : Minimum time that mobiles must wait before issuing a channel allocation request when an immediate assignment has failed. [0 to 255] seconds bts 10 seconds DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. V12 [1 to 255] seconds bts 2 seconds DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

T3172 Class 3 (gprsBtsExtendedConf) Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Default value : Checks :

Value of the timer started by the mobile on reception of a Packet Access Reject message (in seconds) [1 to 255] bts GPRS (SV407 V12) DP 5 [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2357

target Bda Description : Value range : Target BDA for the Online reset command

V11 See to NTP < 130 >. [running / new / old] running for BDA Edition reset online (i.e. basic BDA change without prototype BDA change) new or old for BDA Version reset on line (i.e. BSC upgrades with prototype BDA change) bsc Online reset DP For a V10 BSC this parameter is not requested for the Online reset command.

Object : Type : Note :

teiBtsSiteManager Class 2 Description : TEI address of the site BCF in the LAPD protocol In a BTS chain, the TEI addresses must be allocated in ascending order (TEI0, TEI1, TEI2, etc.), beginning with the BTS closest to the BSC. In a BTS loop configuration, the TEI addresses must be allocated in ascending order (TEI0, TEI1, TEI2, etc.), beginning with the BTS directly linked to the BSC that uses DTI board no.0 for the Abis link input. The following TEI values 3, 7, 11, 15, 19, 23 , and 27 are forbidden when T1 PCMs on Abis interface are used. The relationship between internal E1 PCM TSs (DTI, PCMI or CPCMI) or BSC (DDTI) and external PCM TSs is the following:
E1 T1 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 5 4 6 5 7 6 8 9 7 10 8 11 9 12 13 10 14 11 15 12

E1 T1

16

17 13

18 14

19 15

20

21 16

22 17

23 18

24

25 19

26 20

27 21

28

29 22

30 23

31 24

E1 PCM TSs 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, and 28 are not mapped onto T1 PCM TSs. The scheduled or rendezvous TSs (=teiBtsSiteManager +1) cannot be defined on these internal E1 PCM TSs

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2358

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

[0 to 15] btsSiteManager DP [C/M]: The number of TEI addresses allotted to a LAPD channel is limited to maxTeiPerLapdCh (static configuration data). [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsSiteManager object is locked.

teiLapdLink Description : TEI address of the LAPD link in the LAPD protocol. It is updated by the OMCR agent according to the TEI address allotted by the user to the entity (BCF, TRX/DRX, TCU) using the LAPD link. [0 to 127] lapdLink Display DP [C/M]: This attribute is not managed by users.

Value range : Object : Type : Restrictions :

teiTransceiverEqpt Class 2 Description : TEI address of the TRX/DRX in the LAPD protocol For more information on BTS TEI numbering rules, see to NTP < 07 >. [32 to 39] (monosectorial site), [32 to 47] (bisectorial site), [32 to 55] (trisectorial site), [32 to 63] (hexasectorial site) transceiverEquipment DP [C/M]: The number of TEI addresses allotted to a LAPD channel is limited to maxTeiPerLapdCh (static configuration data). [C/M]: The TEI address is not assigned to another transceiverEquipment object dependent on the same bts object. [M]: No mdScanner object refers to the transceiverEquipment object (no observation is running on the TRX/DRX or the parent cell). [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked, the parent bts object and the transceiverEquipment object are locked.

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2359

teiTranscoder Class 2 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : TEI address of the TCU in the LAPD protocol [0 to 126] transcoder DP [C/M]: The TEI address is not assigned to another transcoder object dependent on the same bsc object. [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the transcoder object is locked.

[C/M]: 0 teiTranscoder 126 temporaryOffset Class 3T7 Description : V8

Negative offset applied during Penalty Time for reselecting a cell (C2 criterion) This negative offset is applied during the entire penaltyTime duration and allows to prevent speeding mobiles from selecting the cell. Refer to the cellReselectOffset entry in the Dictionary.

Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Checks : terminal name Description :

[0 to 70, by steps of 10] dB bts AR 264 70 DP [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked.

Name of a terminal as defined in its profile (default is the logged-in users terminal) Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

[case sensitive] System session log Filter DP [A]: The terminal is known to the OMCR.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2360

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

terminal profile Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Identifier (name) of an OMCR terminal [case sensitive, 1 character min] terminal profile Id [C]: The name of a terminal is unique to the OMCR. [M/D]: The terminal profile object is created.

text Description : Comment to display before running the next command The Echo : text = blah blah blah command can be inserted anywhere in a command file, and as many times as necessary. The text is displayed as it is in session logs when the command file is run. [unlimited number of characters] commandFile Echo command DP

Value range : Object : Type : text Description : Value range : Object : Type : text Description : Value range : Object : Type :

Contents of a short message. It is broadcast as it is. [93 characters max] short message DP

Contents of a user message. It is sent as it is. [unlimited number of characters] user message DP V9

TFH or RWM Class 2 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

Presence or absence of the optional equipment microwave terminal in S4000 Outdoor [Present / Absent] btsSiteManager DP [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsSiteManager object is locked

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2361

thresholdCCCHLoadIndication Class 3 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Remark : Threshold used by the BTS to inform the BSC about a CCCH congestion (104 is the only value accepted) [0 to 2147483646] dB bts DP [C/M]: The only value accepted by the system is 104. [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. Since the system accepts only one value for this attribute, changing it has no meaning.

thresholdInterference Class 2 T8 Description : List of four thresholds defined in ascending order, used to sort idle channels on the basis of measured interference levels This attribute, together with the averagingPeriod attribute, allows to manage interferences in a radio cell. The classification is used by the radio resource allocator. The interference processing algorithm for a cell is as follows: For each idle radio channel, the BTS permanently measures the signal strength level RXLEV. When averagingPeriod Measurement results messages have been received, the L1M function in the BTS calculates interference level averages, sorts the idle channels according to the five defined interference levels (Level 0 corresponds to the lowest interference level), and sends the information to the BSC.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2362

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

128

108

106

104

102

dBm

thresholdInterference = 2 thresholdInterference = 1

thresholdInterference = 4

thresholdInterference = 3

Level 0

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4
radChanSelIntThreshold = 4

radChanSelIntThreshold = 0

radChanSelIntThreshold = 2

radChanSelIntThreshold =1

radChanSelIntThreshold = 3

The BSC tallies the interference levels and, if the temporary interference observation is running for the bsc object, sends the channelIdleLevelMax and channelIdleLevelEch counters every <mdGranularityPeriod> minutes to the OMCR agent. Refer also to C1619 permanent observation counters. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [128 to 0] dBm handOverControl 100 90 80 70 DP [C/M]: The thresholds are defined in ascending order. [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the associated bts object is locked.

thresholdType Description : Type of thresholds managed The startAlarmThreshold and endAlarmThreshold attribute values, which trigger permanent BSS observation counter threshold overflow messages, depend on the type of thresholds managed by the mdWarning object. Refer to these entries in the Dictionary. Value range : Object : Type : [thresholdLow / thresholdHigh] mdWarning if detectionFunction = outOfRangeCounter DP

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2363

timeBetweenHOConfiguration Class 3 T9 Description :

V9

Whether the HOPingpongTimeRejection timer can be used in a BSS when processing handovers Refer to bts object bts time between HO configuration and adjacentCellHandOver object HOPingpongTimeRejection attributes in this Dictionary of Parameters. [used / not used] bsc General protection against pingpong handovers (TF821 V12) used DP [M]: The bsc object is unlocked.

Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Checks :

timerPeriodicUpdateMS Class 3 T10 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Remark : Time between two location update requests [0 to 255] 1/10th of hour. 0 means that no periodic location update is requested. bts 60 DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. The operator must be aware that the input of low values for this attribute causes an important traffic load during the location update procedures. For instance, entering the value 1 for this attribute leads to that all Mobiles will execute an update of their LAC every 6 minutes.

timeSlotNumber Description : PCM time slot used by a LAPD link Since all radio sites house a switching facility, the BSC can directly map the LAPD link onto a PCM time slot. [1 to 24] (GSM 1900 network) [1 to 31] (other networks) lapdLink DD The LAPD link with a radio site BCF always uses TSn = pcmTimeSlotNumber (radio site scheduled time slot). Refer to this entry in the Dictionary.

Value range : Object : Type : Remark :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2364

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

timeSlotNumber Class 2 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : PCM time slot used by an SS7 channel on the A interface [1 to 24] (GSM 1900 network) [1 to 31] (other networks) signallingLink DP [C/M]: The time slot is not already assigned on the A interface to a signallingLink or xtp object dependent on the same bsc object and is not mapped on the TS used by the OMC channel on the Ater interface. [C/M]: If the SS7 link uses PCMA link no.3 (pcmCircuitId), the time slot is in the range [1 to 27] if the PCM link is an E1 link or in the range [1 to 20] if the PCM link is a T1 link. Since the last four time slots of that link are not mapped on the Ater interface, they are unusable (refer to the transcoderMatrix entry in the Dictionary). [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the signallingLink object is locked.

timeSlotNumber Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : PCM time slot used by a terrestrial circuit on the A interface [1 to 24] (GSM 1900 network) [1 to 31] (other networks) xtp DP [C]: The time slot is identical to the mscPcmTsNumber component of the xtp object cic attribute (refer to this entry in the Dictionary). The time slot is not already assigned on the A interface to an xtp or signallingLink object dependent on the same bsc object, and is not mapped on the TS used by the OMC channel on the Ater interface.

[C]:

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2365

[C]:

If the terrestrial circuit uses PCMA link no.3 (pcmCircuitId), the time slot is in the range [1 to 27] if the PCM link is an E1 link or in the range [1 to 20] if the PCM link is a T1 link. Since the last four time slots of that link are not mapped on the Ater interface, they are unusable (refer to the transcoderMatrix entry in the Dictionary).

Restrictions :

[M]: This attribute cannot be modified due to its relationship with the mscPcmTsNumber component of the cic attribute. V13 Identifier of the tmu object class. This identifier is allocated by the MDR at object creation, depending on the shelf and slot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attribute cannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC e3 and TCU e3. [0 to 2147483646] tmu DP

tmuId Description :

Value range : Object : Type :

traceConstraintList Description : List of logical expressions that allow to filter the information to display. The following filter criteria are used: [bsPower / bssTraceType / bssTraceTypeUsed / establishmentCause / hoCauseClass / hoClauseValue / hoRrResult / mobileId / msPower / pcm / recordingEntity / rrCause / timeSlot / timingAdvance / tracedBts / traceRecId / traceReferenceCrit / trStartTime / trStopTime. / trxIdrxId] See to NTP < 130 >. Trace data display DP

Object : Type :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2366

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

traceControl Description :

V8 Identifier of a traceControl object defined with regard to the md object It describes the Call tracing function of a BSC. A traceControl object is created in locked state. Unlock the objet to start collecting data in the related BSC.

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

[0 to 2147483646] traceControl Id [C]: The traceControl object is not created for the md object.

[C/M/D]: The application database of the related BSC is not being built. [C/M/D]: If the application database of the related BSC is built, the BSS/OMCR link is established and no audit is in-progress in the BSC. [M/D]: traceDayAccessed Description : Date of data recording Date format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >. Setting this parameter limits the display to trace data recorded on the specified day. Value range : Object : Type : traceFileName Description : Name of a call tracing or call path tracing data file on the OMCR agent disks. The naming rules are described in NTP < 07 >. traceFileReadyRecord DP [<date>] Trace data display DP The traceControl object is created.

Object : Type :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2367

traceInfoRequested Description : Value range : List of information to display with respect to the type See to NTP < 129 >. [abisInfo / bsicInfo / bssMapInfo / btsInfo / ChannelInfo / cicInfo / dtapInfo / handoverInfo / manufacturerExtInfo A and Ater / manufacturerExtInfo Abis / measurementInfo / msClassmarkInfo / powerControlInfo / rrInfo / timingAdvanceInfo / trxInfo / txPowerInfo] Trace data display DP

Object : Type : traceReference Description : Value range : Object : Type :

Reference of a trace message received from the MSC [0 to 63] (Phase I) [0 to 65535] (Phase II) traceFileReadyRecord DP V9

traffic PCM allocation priority Class 2 T11 Description :

Allocation priority of a TDMA frame on the covering site PCMs This attribute is used in case of Abis PCM reconfiguration. [0 to 255] transceiver DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the parent bts object is locked.

Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Note :

0 should be assigned to the highest priority frame(s). V12

transcdBReserved1 Class 3 T12 Description : Value range : Type : Object : Default value : Checks : Attribute reserved for future use [32768 to 32767] DP transcoderBoard 0 [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2368

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

transcdBReserved2 Class 3 T13 Description : Value range : Type : Object : Default value : Checks : transceiver Description : Attribute reserved for future use [32768 to 32767] DP transcoderBoard 0 [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

V12

Identifier of a transceiver object defined with regard to a bts object It defines the parent transceiver object.

Value range : Object : Type : Checks : transceiver Description :

[0 to 15] channel Id [C]: The transceiver object is created.

Identifier of a transceiver object defined with regard to a bts object By definition, a TDMA frame is related to a cell, a cell is related to a site, and a site is related to a BSC. In all MMI commands, a transceiver object can be referred to by the sequence siteName.cellName.transceiver, where siteName and cellName respectively identify the covering site and cell by name. A TDMA frame is brought in service on the network at creation time. It is working when the parent bts object is unlocked.

Value range : Object : Type :

[0 to 15] transceiver Id

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2369

Checks :

[C]:

The maximum number of TDMA frames controlled by a BSC depends on its type and hardware version, as shown in the following table:
BSC 12000/6000 T3 160

T1 120

T2 120

T4 160

T5 160

[C]:

The number of TDMA frames per cell is limited to 16, regardless of the type of the BSC that controls the cell. The handOverControl and powerControl objects are created for the parent bts object. If the parent bts object describes a concentric cell, two transceiverZone objects are created for that object.

[C]: [C]:

[C/D]: If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked and the parent bts object is locked. [D]: If the application database of the related BSC is not built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command. V9

transceiver equipment class Class 2 Description : Class of a TRX/DRX

The class of a TRX/DRX sets, among others, its maximum transmission power. The attribute possible values have the following meaning: Class 1 corresponds to GSM 900 class 5 or GSM 1800/1900 class 1 (20W to 40W transmitters). Class 2 corresponds to GSM 900 class 6 which is not supported or GSM 1800/1900 class 2 (10W to 20W transmitters).

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2370

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

[0 (reserved) / 1 / 2] transceiverEquipment DP [M]: Concentric cell: If the TRX/DRX is partnered with a TDMA frame, its class matches the TRX/DRX class allotted to the zone to which the TDMA frame belongs (refer to the next entry). The parent bsc object is unlocked and the transceiverEquipment object is locked. V9

[M]:

transceiver equipment class Description :

Class of the TRX/DRXs partnered with the TDMA frames of the zone The class of a TRX/DRX sets, among others, its maximum transmission power. Refer to the previous entry.

Value range : Object : Type : Restrictions : Note :

[1 / 2] transceiverZone DP [M]: This attribute cannot be modified.

The transceiverZone objects are only created for bts objects that describe concentric cells. V9

transceiver zone Ref Class 2 Description : Value range : Object : Condition : Type : Checks :

Identifier of the transceiverZone object that defines the zone to which a TDMA frame belongs in a concentric cell [0 (large or outer zone) / 1 (small or inner zone)] transceiver To define if the covering cell is concentric DP [C]: [M]: The referenced transceiverZone object is created for the parent bts object. The parent bsc object is unlocked and the parent bts object is locked.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2371

transceiverEquipment Description : Identifier of a transceiverEquipment object defined with regard to a bts object It defines the related transceiverEquipment object. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 15] software Id [C]: The transceiverEquipment object is created.

transceiverEquipment Description : Identifier of a transceiverEquipment object defined with regard to a bts object By definition, a TRX/DRX is related to a cell, a cell is related to a site, and a site is related to a BSC. In all MMI commands, a transceiverEquipment object can be referred to by the sequence siteName.cellName.transceiverEquipment, where siteName and cellName respectively identify the covering site and cell by name. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 15] transceiverEquipment Id [C]: The number of TRX/DRXs per site is limited to 24, regardless of the type of the BSC that controls the site. The number of TRX/DRXs per cell is limited to 16, regardless of the type of the BSC that controls the cell. The handOverControl and powerControl objects are created for the parent bts object. The referenced lapdLink objects (lapdLinkOMLRef and lapdLinkRSLRef) are created for the parent bsc object. If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked and the parent bts object is locked.

[C]:

[C]: [C]:

[C]:

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2372

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

[D]:

If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked, the parent btsSiteManager and bts objects are locked, and the transceiverEquipment object is locked. If the application database of the related BSC is not built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command. No traceControl or callPathTrace object refers to the transceiverEquipment object (the BSC Call tracing or Call path tracing function does not monitor that object). V9

[D]:

[D]:

transceiverZone Description :

Identifier of a transceiverZone object that describes the large zone or the small zone of a concentric cell The transceiverZone objects are only significant for the bts objects that describe concentric cells. Two transceiverZone objects are created for each created concentric bts object; one describes the large or outer transmission zone, and the other describes the small or inner transmission zone.

Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

[0 (large or outer zone) / 1 (small or inner zone)] transceiverZone Id [C]: The associated bts object is created and the transceiverZone object is not created for that object. The number of transmission zones in a concentric cell equals 2. Each transceiverZone object is one-of-a-kind to the associated bts object.

[C]:

[C/D]: If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked and the associated bts object is locked. [M]: [D]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. If the application database of the related BSC is not built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command. No transceiver object transceiverZone object. refers to the

[D]:

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2373

transcoder2GEqptId Description :

V13

Identifier of the transcoder2GEqpt object class. This identifier is allocated by the MDR at object creation. The only value allocated by the MDR is 0. This attribute cannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for TCU 2G. [1 to 255] transcoder2GEqpt DP V13

Value range : Object : Type :

transcoder3GEqptId Description :

Identifier of the transcoder3GEqpt object class. This identifier is allocated by the MDR at object creation. The only value allocated by the MDR is 0. This attribute cannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for TCU e3. [0 to 0] transcoder3GEqpt DP

Value range : Object : Type : transcoder Description :

Identifier of a transcoder object defined with regard to a bsc object It defines the parent transcoder object.

Value range :

Object : Type : Checks :

[0 to 6] (BSC 6000, E1 PCM network), [0 to 8] (BSC 6000, T1 PCM network), [0 to 11] (BSC 12000, E1 PCM network), [0 to 13] (BSC 12000, T1 PCM network). pcmCircuit (A interface) Id [C]: The transcoder object is created.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2374

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

transcoder Description : Value range : Identifier of a transcoder object defined with regard to a bsc object [0 to 6] (BSC 6000, E1 PCM network), [0 to 8] (BSC 6000, T1 PCM network), [0 to 11] (BSC 12000, E1 PCM network), [0 to 13] (BSC 12000, T1 PCM network) [0 to 33] (BSC 30000, E1 PCM network) [0 to 33] (BSC 30000, T1 PCM network). transcoder Id [C]: The number of remote transcoders linked to a BSC is limited to maxTranscdPerBsc (static configuration data). [C]: The software object related to the parent bsc object is created. [C]: The referenced lapdLink object (lapdLinkOMLRef) is created for the parent bsc object. [C]: If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked. [D]: If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked and the transcoder object is locked. [D]: If the application database of the related BSC is not built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command.

Object : Type : Checks :

transcoder Description : Identifier of a transcoder object defined with regard to a bsc object It defines the parent transcoder object. [0 to 6] (BSC 6000, E1 PCM network), [0 to 8] (BSC 6000, T1 PCM network), [0 to 11] (BSC 12000, E1 PCM network), [0 to 13] (BSC 12000, T1 PCM network). transcoderBoard Id [C]: The transcoder object is created.

Value range :

Object : Type : Checks :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2375

transcoderAlarmList Description :

V13

This attribute is relevant only for BSC 2G. Activation state of the internal alarm loops of the transcoder. The manager may either display it (in French) without previous decoding, or decode provided raw data for displaying in English. This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS. Value changes are not notified to the Manager. [KO/OK] transcoder2GEqpt DP

Value range : Object : Type :

transcoderAlarmMask Class 3 Description : Configuration of external alarms in a TCU [xx]: The external alarm loop is monitored (not monitored) when bit 0 is set to 1 (0), bit 1 indicates whether operating anomalies of the TCU external clock are notified (1) or not (0) to the OMCR. transcoder 11 DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Note :

This parameter is only available for BSC 2G

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2376

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

transcoderBoard Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Identifier of a transcoderBoard object defined with regard to a transcoder object [0 to 7] (GSM 1900 network) [0 to 9] (other networks) transcoderBoard Id [C]: The number of transcoding boards housed in a TCU is limited to maxTranscdBPerTranscd (static configuration data). If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked. If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked and the transcoderBoard object is locked. If the application database of the related BSC is not built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command.

[C]: [D]:

[D]:

transcoderBoard Description : Identifier of a transcoderBoard object defined with regard to a transcoder object It defines the related transcoderBoard object. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [0 to 7] (GSM 1900 network) [0 to 9] (other networks) software-transcoderBoard Id [C]: The transcoderBoard object is created.

transcoderBoardIntState Description : Value range : TCB internal state [working / fault] working . . . . . . . . . The board is working. Object : Type : fault . . . . . . . . . . . . An error was detected on the board. transcoderBoard DD

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2377

transcoderId Class 2 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Identifier of the remote transcoder linked to the PCM link that carries the SS7 channel on the A interface [0 to 13] signallingLink DP [C/M]: The referenced transcoder object is created and the pcmCircuit object used by the signallingLink object (pcmCircuitId) is related to that object. [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the signallingLink object is locked.

transcoderId Class 2 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Identifier of the remote transcoder linked to the PCM link that carries the terrestrial circuit on the A interface [0 to 13] xtp DP [C/M]: The referenced transcoder object is created and the pcmCircuit object used by the xtp object (pcmCircuitId) is related to that object. [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the xtp object is locked.

transcoderIntPcmIntState Description : Value range : State of the TCU internal PCM links. Each link is identified by a serial number n = [0 to 15]. [0 to 15] [working / fault] working . . . . . . . . . The internal PCM is working. fault . . . . . . . . . . . . An error was detected on the PCM link. transcoder DD This parameter is only available for BSC 2G

Object : Type : Note :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2378

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

transcoderMatrix Description : Configuration of the TCU switching matrix = mapping PCM Ater TS <=> PCM A TS This attribute describes the relation between the TSs of the four PCM A links used by the TCU (A interface) and the TSs of the PCM Ater link used by the TCU (Ater interface). The following tables show the correspondence when PCM E1 or T1 links are used. transcoder Display DP [C/M]: This attribute is not managed by users. PCM E1 links
TS PCM Ater 1 (LAPD channel) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 PCM A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29 2 6 10 14 18 22 26 30 TS PCM A no equivalence 2 6 10 14 18 22 26 30 3 7 11 15 19 23 27 31 3 7 11 15 19 23 27 31 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29

Object : Type : Restrictions :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2379

TS PCM Ater 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

PCM A 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

TS PCM A 1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29 2 6 10 14 18 22 26 30 2 6 10 14 18 22 26 30 3 7 11 15 19 23 27 31

3 7 11 15 19 23 27 31 4 8 12 16 20 24 28

4 8 12 16 20 24 28 1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29

PCM T1 links
TS PCM Ater 1 (LAPD channel) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 PCM A 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 9 13 17 21 1 5 9 13 17 21 TS PCM A no equivalence 2 6 10 14 18 22 2 6 10 14 18 22 3 7 11 15 19 23 3 7 11 15 19 23 4 8 12 16 20 24 4 8 12 16 20 24

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2380

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

TS PCM Ater 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

PCM A 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 5 9 13 17 21 1 5 9 13 17 21 2 6 10 14 18 22 2 6 10 14 18 22

TS PCM A 3 7 11 15 19 23 3 7 11 15 19 23 4 8 12 16 20 24 4 8 12 16 20 24

transcvEReserved1 Class 3 T14 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Attribute reserved for future use [32768 to 32767] transceiverEquipment DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

V12

transcvEReserved2 Class 3 T15 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : trmId Description : Attribute reserved for future use [32768 to 32767] transceiverEquipment DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

V12

V13 Identifier of the trm object class. This identifier is allocated by the MDR at object creation, depending on the shelf and slot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attribute cannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC e3 and TCU e3. [0 to 2147483646] trm DP

Value range : Object : Type :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2381

tSCBNumber Description :

V13 This attribute is significant only for BSC 2G. This attribute indicates which is the number of the TSCB (Transcoder Signalling Concentration Board) board, managing the signalling for transcoders, and the number of the BSCB (BTS signalling Concentration Board) board, managing the signalling for BTS. This board is redundant at BSC level. [0 to 13] bsc2GEqpt DP V13 This attribute is significant only for BSC 2G. xSCB Boards Use: indicates the internal state and LAPD mapping for each created TSCB and BSCB board. This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS. Value changes are notified to the Manager. [0 to 14] bsc2GEqpt DP V8 Configuration of the radio TDMA frame time slots This dynamic attribute indicates, for each time slot, the reconfiguration state, the type of logical channel supported, the frequency channel used (absoluteRFChannelNo) if the time slot does not hop, the list of frequency channels used (mobileAllocation), the maio, and the hoppingSequenceNumber if the time slot hops.

Value range : Object : Type : tSCBUse Description :

Value range : Object : Type : tsConfiguration Description :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2382

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

When frequency hopping is used if reconfiguration state is true, it means that BSC has recalculated the frequency hopping law following the loss of one or several TRX (defence of TDMA carrying the BCCH. If reconfiguration state is false, it means that the TDMA configuration is the original one. When frequency hopping is not used, this boolean has no meaning and would be set to false. Value range : Object : Type : Remark : [true / false] transceiver DD Since the time slots are reconfigured after each dynamic reconfiguration of the hopping frequencies, the data can be different from those defined by the user when creating the channel objects.

txPowerMaxReduction Class 2 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [C/M]: The only value accepted by the system is 0 dB. [M]: Remark : The parent bsc object is unlocked and the transceiver object is locked. Maximum transmission power level allowed in a TDMA frame (attenuation versus bsTxPowerMax) per transceiver [0 to 30 by step of 2] dB. 0 is the only value accepted. transceiver 0 DP

Since the system accepts only one value for this attribute, changing it has no meaning.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2383

type Description : Value range : Type of data to archive or restore [faults / observations / trace data / backup / other data] Fault data are stored in the /MD/notif partition on the OMCR agent disks. Observation data are stored in the /MD/obs partition on the OMCR agent disks. Trace data are stored in the /MD/trace_function partition on the OMCR agent disks. Backup data are stored on the OMCR agent disks. Other data files are defined in the /MD/config partition on the OMCR agent disks. md Archive DP

Object : Type : type Description : Value range :

Type of data to archive or restore [faults / observations / trace data / backup / other data] Fault data are restored to the /MD/restored/notif partition on the OMCR agent disks. Observation data are restored to the /MD/restored/obs partition on the OMCR agent disks. Trace data are restored in the /MD/restored/trace_function partition on the OMCR agent disks. Other data files are restored to their source directory on the OMCR agent disks. md Restore DP

Object : Type :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2384

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

type Description : Value range : Type of data to archive or restore [faults / observations / trace data / backup / other data] Fault data are stored in the /CMN/base/save_rest partition on the OMCR manager disks. Observation data are stored in the /OMC/obs partition on the OMCR manager disks. Trace data are stored in the /CMN/base/save_rest partition on the OMCR manager. Backup data are stored on the OMCR manager disks. Other data files are defined in the /OMC/data partition on the OMCR manager disks. omc Archive DP

Object : Type : type Description : Value range :

Type of data to archive or restore [faults / observations / trace data / backup / other data] Fault data are restored to the /CMN/base/save_rest partition on the OMCR manager disks. Observation data are restored to the /OMC/obs partition on the OMCR manager disks. Trace data are restored to the /CMN/base/save_rest partition on the OMCR manager disks. Other data files are restored to their source directory /OMC/data on the manager disks. omc Restore DP

Object : Type :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2385

type Description : Value range : Type of observation report [single observed instance / several observed instance]

V11

single observed instance . . . . . . . .several observed counters on a single object several observed instance . . . . . . . single counter observed on several objects report template DP V10

Object : Type :

Type of data to be purged Description : Value range : Object : Type : Type of display Description : Value range : Object : Type : Choice of the observation counter display mode [Chart / Table / Text] report template DP Type of the OMC data to be purged [traceData] omc Data purge DP

V11

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2386

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

U
unequippedCircuit Class 1 Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Default value : Type : Checks : Remark : V8

Whether the UNEQUIPPED CIRCUIT messages are used (Phase II compliance) [false / true] signallingPoint Unequipped circuit and circuit group block (UF1169.1 V12) False DP [C/M]: The only accepted value is false in V10 and V11. [M]: The parent bsc object is locked. Since the system accepts only one value for this attribute in V10 and V11, changing it has no meaning.

unknownNCellWarning Class 3 Description : Whether feedback of measurements performed by mobiles on neighbor cells that are unknown to the BSC is allowed When feedback of measurements is enabled, notifications with codano 1260 are generated. These notifications indicate that measurements are performed on cells which use the same BCCH as a neigbor cell of the serving cell but have different BSICs. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [enabled / disabled] bts disabled DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2387

unmasked users alarms Class 2 Description :

V9

Configuration of the user (unprotected) external alarm loops controlled by the BTS. When an alarm is unmasked, it means the relevant equipment is monitored by the BTS. There are 6 user alarms per cabinet on the S8000 Outdoor (up to 18 user alarms = 3 cabinets * 6 user alarms per cabinet). on the S8002 BTS (up to 6 user alarms = 1 cabinet * 6 user alarms) A user alarm is used when an external equipment is inserted in the BTS (for instance a microwave terminal) and does not require a new DLU. [All masked, Base 1, Base 1 to 2, Base 1 to 3, Base 1 to 4, Base 1 to 5, Base 1 to 6, Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1, Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1 to 2, Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1 to 3, Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1 to 4, Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1 to 5, Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1 to 6, Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1 to 6 Ext1 1 to 2, Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1 to 6 Ext1 1 to 4, Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1 to 6 Ext1 1 to 6] For instance: Base 1: the first user alarm in the Base cabinet is unmasked Base 1 to 2: the first and second user alarm in the Base cabinet are unmasked Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1: The 6 user alarms in the Base cabinet and the first one in the Extension cabinet 0 are unmasked btsSiteManager DP [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsSiteManager object is locked V12

Value range :

Object : Type : Checks :

upAckTime Class3 (packetAckTime) Description : Value range : Object : Feature : Type : Checks :

Time defining the period for the acknowledgments for UL transfers [1 to 64] steps 100 ms for uplink transfer (step size is 500 msec) transceiver GPRS (SV407 V12 and TF1220 V12.4c) DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2388

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

upgradeStatus Description :

V13 Stands whether an upgrade has currently been performed, is still in progress or not. This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS. Value changes are notified to the manager.

Value range : Object : Type : Feature :

[notInProgress / inProgress / performed] atmRm, cc, cem, iem, omu, sw8kRm, tmu, trm. DD AR 1209 V13.1 V12

uplinkMappingChannelNumber Class 2 U1 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Feature : Checks :

Channel number used for uplink mapping as the monitored TS [1 to 7] bts 7 DP Uplink mapping (TF876 V12) [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the bts object is locked.

[C/M]: The attribute must contain an even value in case of an extended cell (2, 4, 6). In case of a multi CCCH cell it must contain an odd value (1, 3, 5, 7). uplinkMappingFreq Class 2 U2 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Feature : Checks : Frequency (f0) used for uplink mapping [0 to 1023] bts 0 DP Uplink mapping (TF876 V12) [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the bts object is locked. V12

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2389

uplinkMappingMeasurementMode Description : This attribute is relevant from V11 BTS. This attribute indicates if the uplink mapping is active (TRUE) or inactive (FALSE) on the BTS. Once active BTS sends collected data to BSC. This attribute is modified by the Manager. This attribute can be modified only if the bts object instance is locked. This attribute can be modified only if the bscobject instance is unlocked. Value range : Type : [false / true] DP V12

uplinkMappingProcessingMode Class 3 U3 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Feature : Checks : Whether uplink mapping is active on the BSC or not [disabled / enabled] bsc disabled DP Uplink mapping (TF876 V12) [M]: The bsc object is unlocked.

uplinkPowerControl Class 3U4 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

V8

Whether power control in the MS-to-BTS direction is authorized at cell level [enabled / disabled] powerControl enabled DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2390

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

uRxLevDLP Class 3 U5 Description : Upper strength threshold for BTS txpwr decrease for step by step algorithm It is greater than lRxLevDLP. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [less than 110, 110 to 109, ... , 49 to 48, more than 48] dBm powerControl 85 to 84 dBm DP [M]: [M]: [M]: Note :
lRxLevDLP + powerIncrStepSize uRxLevDLP uRxLevDLP powerRedStepSize lRxLevDLP

The parent bsc object is unlocked.

This parameter is significant only when the BTS uses the standard step by step power control algorithm.

uRxLevULP Class 3 U6 Description : Upper strength threshold for MS txpwr decrease for step by step algorithm It is greater than lRxLevULP. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : [less than 110, 110 to 109, ... , 49 to 48, more than 48] dBm powerControl 85 to 84 dBm DP [M]: [M]: [M]: Note :
lRxLevULP + powerIncrStepSize uRxLevULP uRxLevULP powerRedStepSize lRxLevULP

The parent bsc object is unlocked.

This parameter is significant only when the BTS uses the standard step by step power control algorithm.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2391

uRxQualDLP Class 3 U7 Description : Upper quality threshold to reduce BTS txpwr for step by step algorithm It is lower than or equal to lRxQualDLP. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Note : [less than 0.2, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.4 to 0.8, ... , 6.4 to 12.8, more than 12.8] % powerControl 0.2 to 0.4 DP [M]: [M]: uRxQualDLP lRxQualDLP The parent bsc object is unlocked.

This parameter is significant only when the BTS uses the standard step by step power control algorithm.

uRxQualULP Class 3 U8 Description : Upper quality threshold to reduce MS txpwr for step by step algorithm It is lower than or equal to lRxQualULP. Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Note : [less than 0.2, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.4 to 0.8, ... , 6.4 to 12.8, more than 12.8] % powerControl 0.2 to 0.4 DP [M]: [M]: uRxQualULP lRxQualULP The parent bsc object is unlocked.

This parameter is significant only when the BTS uses the standard step by step power control algorithm.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2392

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

usageState Description : Activity state of the Call path tracing function in the BSC Refer to the endSessionCriteriaType entry in the Dictionary and the operationalState entry related to the callPathTrace object which describes the possible state parameter combinations for this type of object. Value range : [idle / busy ] idle . . . . . . . . . . . . . The PCM time slot that conveys the terrestrial circuit is traffic-free. busy . . . . . . . . . . . . The PCM time slot conveys the terrestrial circuit is working and carrying traffic. callPathTrace DD

Object : Type : usageState Description :

ISO state Refer to the operationalState entry related to the xtp object which describes the possible state parameter combinations for this type of object.

Value range :

[idle / busy / active] idle . . . . . . . . . . . . . The PCM time slot that conveys the terrestrial circuit is traffic-free. busy . . . . . . . . . . . . The PCM time slot conveys the terrestrial circuit is working and carrying traffic. active . . . . . . . . . . . The PCM time slot that conveys the terrestrial circuit is active. xtp DD V11 Whether default counter list has to be used [yes] bscCounterList DP

Object : Type : use default list Description : Value range : Object : Type :

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2393

user name Description : Name of an OMCR user as defined in the users profile (default is the logged-in users name) Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected. Value range : Object : Type : Checks : [case sensitive] System session log Filter DP [A]: The related user profile object is created on the OMCR.

user profile Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Identifier (name) of an OMCR user [case sensitive, 2 characters min] user profile Id [C]: The name of a user is one-of-a-kind to the OMCR.

[M/D]: The user profile object is created. username Description : Value range : Object : Type : username Description : Value range : Object : Type : Name of the OMCR user, as defined in the users profile, who created the associated job [case sensitive] jobResult DD Name of the OMCR user, as defined in the users profile, who created the job [case sensitive] job DD

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2394

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

V
version Class 2 Description : Version number of the remote transcoder TCBs Version 1 TCB software only manages the FR (Full Rate) service.Version 2 TCB software manages both FR and EFR (Enhanced Full Rate) services. The following apply: All TCBs in a given TCU are the same version. All TCUs in a BSS must be equipped with Version 2 TCBs for the EFR service to be provided. [TCB_1 / TCB_2] transcoder TCB_2 DP [M]: The attribute value is TCB_2 if the speechMode attribute of the dependent transcoderBoard objects contains enhanced full rate. [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the transcoder object is locked. V12 V8

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

voiceBroadcastService Class 3 V1 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Feature : Authorize Voice Broadcast Service [enabled / disabled] signallingPoint disabled DP (GSMR V12)

voiceGroupCallService Class 3 V2 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Feature : Authorize Voice Group Call Service [enabled / disabled] signallingPoint disabled DP (GSMR V12)

V12

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2395

VSWR meter Class 2 Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks :

V9

Presence or absence of the optional equipment voltage stationary wave rate meter in S8000 Indoor or Outdoor [Present / Absent] btsSiteManager DP [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsSiteManager object is locked

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2396

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

W
workstation name Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Name of a workstation as defined in its profile (default is the logged-in users workstation) [case sensitive] omc Display workstation markers DP [A]: The terminal profile object describing the workstation is created on the OMCR.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2397

X
X25Port0Operational Description : V13

Operational State of the OMU module external X.25 port 0. ISO operational state (enabled/disabled). This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS. Value changes are not notified to the Manager. This attribute is relevant for BSC e3.

Value range : Object : Type : Feature :

[enabled / disabled] omu DD AR 1209 V13.1 V13

X25Port1Operational Description :

Operational State of the OMU module external X.25 port 1. ISO operational state (enabled/ disabled). This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS. Value changes are not notified to the Manager. This attribute is relevant for BSC e3.

Value range : Object : Type : Feature :

[enabled / disabled] omu DD AR 1209 V13.1

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2398

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

xSCBConfiguration Class 0 Description :

V8

Number of TSCBs and BSCBs that concentrate LAPD signaling in the BSC The TSCBs are used for TCU signaling on the Ater interface. The BSCBs are used for BTS signaling on the Abis interface. A BSC which manages BTS LAPD signaling concentration can control up to 138 radio sites with redundancy, or 147 radio sites without redundancy. When a BSC does not manage BTS LAPD signaling concentration, the number of radio sites it controls is limited to the number of SICD ports available, minus 1 (which is reserved for TCU LAPD signaling), that is 39 sites.

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

[2 to 14] bsc 2 DP [M]: The application database of the parent bsc is not built (bdaState = not built).

xSCBNumber Description : Number of the TSCB that concentrates TCU LAPD signaling in the BSC This dynamic attribute is managed by the BSC. Value range : Object : Type : Note : xSCBUse Description : State and assignment of the BSC TSCBs and BSCBs This dynamic attribute indicates, for each TSCB and BSCB housed in the BSC, its operational state and the list of the LAPD links it concentrates. Value range : Object : Type : [working / fault] bsc DD [0 to 13] bsc DD This parameter is only available for BSC 2G V8

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2399

xtp Description : Value range : Object : Type : Checks : Identifier of an xtp object (eXchange Termination Point) defined with regard to a bsc object [0 to 2147483646] xtp Id [C]: The number of terrestrial circuits linked to a BSC 12000 (BSC 6000) is limited to 1288 (840) if PCM E1 links are used and to 1440 (828) if PCM T1 links are used. The number of terrestrial circuits linked to a BSC 2000 is limited to 360. The software object related to the bsc object is created.

[C]:

[C/M]: The referenced pcmCircuit object (pcmCircuitId) is assigned to the A interface and depends on the same transcoder object (transcoderId) as the xtp object. [C]: The time slot used by the xtp object (timeSlotNumber) is identical to the mscPcmTsNumber component of the cic attribute.

[C/M]: The referenced PCM,TS pair (pcmCircuitId and timeSlotNumber) is not already assigned to an xtp or signallingLink object dependent on the same transcoder object, and the time slot is not mapped on the TS used by the OMC channel on the Ater interface. [C/M]: If the terrestrial circuit uses PCMA link no.3 (pcmCircuitId), the timeSlotNumber is in the range [1 to 27] if the PCM link is an E1 link or in the range [1 to 20] if the PCM link is a T1 link. Since the last four time slots of that link are not mapped on the Ater interface, they are unusable (refer to the transcoderMatrix entry in the Dictionary). [C]: [D]: If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked. If the application database of the related BSC is built, the parent bsc object is unlocked and the xtp object is locked.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2400

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

[D]:

If the application database of the related BSC is not built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDA command. No traceControl or callPathTrace object refers to the xtp object (the Call tracing and Call path tracing functions do not monitor that object).

[D]:

Restrictions :

[M]: The cic and timeSlotNumber attributes of an xtp object cannot be modified.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2401

Z
ZI bss Description : List of selected BSCs that defines a BSS zone of interest. Enter all to include all the BSCs created on the OMCR. If the ZI bss list should include only a subset of BSCs, fill in the list as follows: The Add button allows to add a BSC to the list. The Delete button allows to remove selected BSCs from the list. A BSS terminal zone of interest allows users to filter the unsolicited messages (output domain) that can be output on the terminal outside users work sessions according to the BSS entities that send them. terminal profile DP The user can enter a BSC in the list that is not created yet. When it is created, this BSC will be handle as the other BSCs already created.

Object : Type : Note :

ZI bss Description : List of selected BSCs that defines a BSS zone of interest. Enter all to include all the BSCs created on the OMCR. If the ZI bss list should include only a subset of BSCs, fill in the list as follows: The Add button allows to add a BSC to the list. The Delete button allows to remove selected BSCs from the list. A BSS users zone of interest defines the BSS entities the user is entitled to work on. It allows to filter both the MMI commands they can enter (command domain) according to the objects managed by these commands and the unsolicited messages (output domain) they have access to according to the BSS entities that send them. user profile DP The user can enter a BSC in the list that is not created yet. When it is created, this BSC will be handle as the other BSCs already created.

Object : Type : Note :

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2402

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

ZI omc Description : Whether output of unsolicited messages issued by the OMCR applications to a terminal is allowed when no user is logged in [OMC included / OMC excluded] terminal profile DP

Value range : Object : Type : ZI omc Description : Value range : Object : Type :

Whether user access to unsolicited messages issued by the OMCR applications is granted [OMC included / OMC excluded] user profile DP V9

zone frequency hopping Class 2 Description : Whether frequency hopping is authorised in the zone

Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks : Note :

If frequency hopping is not allowed in a zone, the channel objects that describe the radio time slots of the TDMA frames used in the zone cannot be allowed to hop. [hopping / not hopping] transceiverZone not hopping DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the associated bts object is locked. The transceiverZone objects are only created for bts objects that describe concentric cells. V9

zone frequency threshold Class 2 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

Minimum number of frequencies needed to allow frequency reconfiguration in the zone [1 to 64] transceiverZone 1 DP [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the associated bts object is locked.

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

2403

Note :

The transceiverZone objects are only created for bts objects that describe concentric cells. V9

zone Tx power max reduction Class 2 Z1 Description : Value range : Object : Default value : Type : Checks :

Attenuation vs bsTxPowerMax that defines the maximum TRX/DRX transmission power in the zone large zone = [0] dB, small zone = [1 to 55] dB transceiverZone 0 DP [C/M]: zone Tx power max reduction equals zero if the transceiverZone object describes the cell outer zone. It is greater than zero if the transceiverZone object describes the cell inner zone. [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the associated bts object is locked.

Note :

The transceiverZone objects are only created for bts objects that describe concentric cells.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

2404

Parameters listed in alphabetical order

Nortel Networks Confidential

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Objects and parameters evolution

31

APPENDIX A OBJECTS AND PARAMETERS EVOLUTION


This appendix presents BSS V13 and V12 configuration parameters and objects

A.1

New V13 parameters


Parameter administrativeState associatedTMUPosition atmRmId availabilityStatus bsc2GEqptId bsc3GEqptId bscList bscLogId bscName bscReset bscUsedAdr ccId cemId cnId coderPoolList configRefList CTU cable executableSoftwareId executableSoftwareName iemId inId interOmuEtherlinkOper lapd exists lapdlinkCallPLoad lsaPcmList lsaRcId lsaRc Reference maxNbrConsMess mmsId mmsUsage numberOfEnabledHDLCPorts omuId operationalState port Ethernet Operational Object cc, cem, cn, bsc3GEqpt, transcoder3GEqpt, iem, in, lsaRc, mms, omu, sw8kRm, tmu, trm btsSiteManager atmRm cc, cem, cn, bsc3GEqpt, transcoder3GEqpt, iem, in, lsaRc, mms, omu, sw8kRm, tmu, trm bsc2GEqpt bsc3GEqpt executableSoftware bscLog bsc bsc3GEqpt bscMdInterface cc cem cn transcoder3GEqpt executableSoftware iem executableSoftware executableSoftware iem in cn iem, lsaRc transcoder3GEqpt iem, lsaRc lsaRc iem bscLog mms mms iem, tmu omu atmRm, cc, cem, cn, bsc3GEqpt, transcoder3GEqpt, iem, in, lsaRc, mms, omu, sw8kRm, tmu, trm omu

BSS Parameter Dictionary

32

Objects and parameters evolution

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameter port Ethernet Status port0X25Status port1X25Status positionInShelf privateMmsOmuRef protocolUsed relatedSoftwares shelfNumber softwareLabel standbyStatus sw8kRmId tmuId transcoder2GEqptId transcoder3GEqptId transcoderAlarmList trmId tSCBNumber tSCBUse upgradeStatus X25Port0Operational X25Port1Operational

Object omu omu omu atmRm, cc, cem, iem, lsaRc, mms, omu, sw8kRm, tmu, trm mms bscMdInterface executableSoftware atmRm, cc, cem, iem, lsaRc, mms, omu, sw8kRm, tmu, trm executableSoftware atmRm, cem, iem, lsaRc, omu, sw8kRm sw8kRm tmu transcoder2GEqpt transcoder3GEqpt transcoder2GEqpt trm bsc2GEqpt bsc2GEqpt atmRm, cc, cem, iem, omu, sw8kRm, tmu, trm omu omu

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Objects and parameters evolution

33

A.2

New V12 parameters


Parameter additional supervised PCM 0 additional supervised PCM 1 additional supervised PCM 2 additional supervised PCM 3 additional supervised PCM 4 additional supervised PCM 5 additional unmasked users alarms adjCHOReserved3 adjCHOReserved4 administrativeState allocBitmap availabilityStatus availabilityStatus biZonePowerOffset bscGprsActivation btsLockedReserved2 bscPcuPcmRefList bscRefList bsCvMax btsReserved3 btsReserved4 btsSensitivity btsSensitivityInnerZone btsSMReserved1 btsSMReserved2 btsWithCavity codingScheme cpueNumber currentChannelHorqd Data14.4OnNoHoppingTs directedRetryPrio dLPwrValue drxTimerMax eMLPPThreshold enhancedTRAUFrameIndication geographical coordinates gprsAvgParam gprsCellActivation gprsPermittedAccess gprsPreemption gprsPreemptionProtection gprsPriority Object btsSiteManager btsSiteManager btsSiteManager btsSiteManager btsSiteManager btsSiteManager btsSiteManager adjacentCellHandOver adjacentCellHandOver pcu transceiver pcu pcusn adjacentCellHandOver handOverControl bsc bts pcu pcusn bts bts bts bts bts btsSiteManager btsSiteManager bts transceiver btsSiteManager signallingPoint bts bts transceiver bts signallingPoint bsc pcusn bts bts bts bts bts transceiver FM1189 FM1189 FM1189 FM1189 FM1189 FM1189 FM1158 FM1189 FM1189 SV407 SV407 SV407 SV407 TF875 SV407 V12 SV407 SV407 SV407 TF995 V12 SV407 SV407 V12 V12 PR1179 SV407 AR874 V12 V12 TF821 SV407 SV407 ASCI FM660 SV407 SV407 SV407 SV407 TF1121 TF1121 TF1121 Feature

BSS Parameter Dictionary

34

Objects and parameters evolution

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameter gprsTimerWaitPUAM gprsTimerWaitRLC hoMarginTiering hoMarginTrafficOffset HOPingpongCombination HOPingpongTimeRejection hoTraffic interferenceType longTbfLossThroughput longTbfSizeThreshold maxBsTransmitPowerInnerZone maxDnTbfP1P2Threshold maxDnTbfPerTs maxDwAssign maxNbrPDAAssig maxNbrPUDWithoutVChange maxNbrRLCEmptyBlock maxRach maxUpTbfP1P2Threshold maxUpTbfPerTs measurementProcAlgorithm minNbrsGprsTs msCapWeightActive msTxPwrMax2ndBand muxNumber N3103 N3105max nbrFreeTchBeforeAnticipation nbrFreeTchToEndAnticipation nbrTch NCHPosition numberOfPwciSamples offsetLoad offsetPriority operationalState operationalStatus packetAckTime pan pcmErrorCorrection pcmNbr pcu pcuLapdEqptRefList pcusn

Object bts bts handoverControl adjacentCellHandOver adjacentCellHandOver adjacentCellHandOver bsc bts adjacentCellHandOver bts bts bts bts bts bts transceiver transceiver transceiver bts bts bts bts bts bts bts pcusn bts bts bts bts pcu bts handOverCOntrol adjacentCellHandOver adjacentCellHandOver pcu pcusn transceiver bts bts pcu pcu pcu pcusn SV407 SV407 TF995 TF132 TF821 TF821 TF132 TF995 SV407 SV407 SV407 SV407 SV407 SV407 SV407 SV407 SV407 SV407 SV407 SV407 TF1089 TF1121 SV407 TF875 SV407 SV407 SV407 SV407 SV407 SV407 ASCI TF995 TF716 TF716 SV407 SV407 SV407 SV407 FM660 SV407 SV407 SV407 SV407

Feature

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Objects and parameters evolution

35

Parameter pcuSNName pcuSNReserved1 pcuSNReserved2 preemptionAuthor pwciHreqave radioAllocator reserved1 reserved1 reserved2 reserved2 reserved3 reserved3 reserved3 reserved4 reserved4 reserved4 reserved5 reserved5 reserved5 routingArea rxQualDLIH rxQualULIH selfTuningObs sigPReserved1 sigPReserved2 speechOnHoppingTs speechVersionAsscomp speechVersionHoperf speechVersionHoreq speechVersionHorqd T3172 transcdBReserved1 transcdBReserved2 transcvEReserved1 transcvEReserved2 uplinkMappingChannelNumber uplinkMappingFreq uplinkMappingMeasurementMode uplinkMappingProcessingMode voiceBroadcastService voiceGroupCallService

Object pcusn pcusn pcusn signallingPoint handOverControl bts pcu transceiver pcu transceiver bts pcu transceiver bts pcu transceiver bts pcu transceiver bts handOverControl handOverControl handOverControl signallingPoint signallingPoint bts signallingPoint signallingPoint signallingPoint signallingPoint bts transcoderBoard transcoderBoard transceiverEquipment transceiverEquipment bts bts bts bsc signallingPoint signallingPoint SV407 SV407 SV407 ASCI TF995 TF1121 SV407 SV407 SV407 SV407 SV407 SV407 SV407 SV407 SV407 SV407 SV407 SV407 SV407 SV407 TF819 TF819 TF995 V12 V12 SV407 V12 V12 V12 V12 SV407 V12 V12 V12 V12 TF876 TF876 TF876 TF876 ASCI ASCI

Feature

BSS Parameter Dictionary

36

Objects and parameters evolution

Nortel Networks Confidential

A.2.1

Parameter updates linked to new feature introduction


Parameter associatedInterface bsc equipment name bts time between HO configuration channelType concentric cell intraCell lapdConcentration lapdLink lapdTerminalNumber new power control algorithm pcmCircuit pcmType processorLoadSupConf rxLevULIH standard indicator standard indicator AdjC timeBetweenHOConfiguration Object lapdLink Alarm and notification logs Filter bts channel bts handOverControl lapdLink lapdLink lapdLink bts pcmCircuit pcmCircuit bsc handOverControl bts adjacentCellHandOver adjacentCellReselection bsc SV407 SV407 TF821 TF184 SV407 TF875 TF995 SV407 SV407 SV407 TF975 SV407 SV407 FM874 FM876 TF875 TF875 TF821 Feature

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Configuration parameter list

41

APPENDIX B CONFIGURATION PARAMETER LIST


Table B1 lists the configuration parameters of a BSS in alphabetical order, with their type, their class, and the object class to which they are related. The following should be noted: Dynamic data (DDs) and internal data (DIs) are not classified. Some permanent data (DPs) are not classified. This includes object administrativeState attributes, object name attributes, attributes that cannot be modified, and attributes that are not managed by users.
Parameter abisSpy absoluteRFChannelNo accessClassCongestion accessibilityState active (passive) chain disk state active (passive) chain Dmux state active (passive) chain ECI board state active (passive) chain REM link state active (passive) chain Sic board state active (passive) chain sic channels state active (passive) chain sls board state active (passive) chain state active (passive) chain switching capacity active (passive) chain tcu accessibility active (passive) chain ute board state active rem link activeChain adjacent cell umbrella Ref adjCHOReserved3 adjCHOReserved4 Type DP DP DP DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DP DP DP 3 3 3 Class 3 2 3 bts channel bts signallingLinkSet bsc bsc bsc bsc bsc bsc bsc bsc bsc bsc bsc bsc bsc bts adjacentCellHandOver adjacentCellHandOver Object class

BSS Parameter Dictionary

42

Configuration parameter list

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameter administrativeState

Type DP

Class

Object class bsc, bscMdInterface, bts, btsSiteManager, pcmCircuit, pcu, signallingLink, transceiverEquipment, transcoder, transcoderBoard, xtp, cc, cem, cn, bsc3GEqpt transcoder3GEqpt, iem, in, lsaRc mms, omu, sw8kRm, tmu, trm bsc transcoder transcoder transcoder transcoder

aLAIntState alarmListConverter alarmListFan alarmListFanBoard alarmListVCOTension AlgoId algorithm Used allocationState allocBitmap allocPriorityTable allocPriorityThreshold allocPriorityTimers allocWaitThreshold allOtherCasesPriority answerPagingPriority assignRequestPriority associatedInterface associatedTMUPosition atmRmId Attenuation auditBdaStatus auditState availabilityStatus

DD DD DD DD DD DP DP DD DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DI DI DD 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2

transcoderBoard transcoderBoard transceiver transceiver bts bts bts bts bts bts bts lapdLink btsSiteManager atmRm btsSiteManager bsc bsc bsc, bscMdInterface, bts, btsSiteManager, lapdLink, pcmCircuit, pcu, signallingLink, transceiver, transceiverEquipment, transcoder, transcoderBoard, xtp, cc, cem, cn bsc3GEqpt, transcoder3GEqpt iem, in, lsaRc, ms, omu, sw8kRm tmu, trm

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Configuration parameter list

43

Parameter averagingPeriod backupServer baseColourCode bCCHFrequency

Type DP DP DP DP

Class 2 2 3 2 3 3 md

Object class handOverControl bts adjacentCellHandOver bts adjacentCellHandOver adjacentCellReselection bsc bsc bsc bsc

bdaNewBscState bdaSelected bdaState bdaVersionNumber biZonePowerOffset bsc2GEqptId bsc3GEqptId bscAlarmMask bscArchitecture bscDateTime bscGprsActivation bscHopReconfUse bscList bscLogId bscMdInterfaceRef bscMdInterfaceVersionNumber bscMSAccessClassBarringFunction bscName bscPcuPcmRefList bscQueuingOption bscRefList bscReset bscSitePcmList bscTimeSlot bscType bscUsedAdr bsCvMax bscX25PrefAdr

DI DI DI DD DP DP DP DP DP DD DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DD DP DP DP DP

3 3 3 0 3 1 3 2 1 3 2 0 3 2

adjacentCellHandOver handOverControl bsc2GEqpt bsc3GEqpt bsc bsc bsc bsc bsc executableSoftware bscLog bsc bsc bsc bsc pcu signallingPoint pcusn bsc3GEqpt btsSiteManager channel bsc bscMdInterface bts bscMdInterface

BSS Parameter Dictionary

44

Configuration parameter list

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameter bscX25SecAdr bscX25UsedAdr bsPowerControl bssMapT1 bssMapT12 bssMapT13 bssMapT19 bssMapT20 bssMapT4 bssMapT7 bssMapT8 bssMapTchoke bssSccpConnEst bssSccpInactRx bssSccpInactTx bssSccpRelease bssSccpSubSysTest bsTxPwrMax bts time between HO configuration btsDescription btsHopReconfRestart btsIsHopping btsLockedReserved2 btsMSAccessClassBarringFunction btsReserved3 btsReserved4 btsSensitivity btsSensitivityInnerZone btsSiteManagerList btsSMReserved1 btsSMReserved2 btsThresholdHopReconf btsWithCavity buildState

Type DP DD DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DI DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DI

Class 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2

Object class bscMdInterface bscMdInterface powerControl bsc bsc bsc bsc bsc bsc bsc bsc bsc signallingPoint signallingPoint signallingPoint signallingPoint signallingPoint powerControl bts btsSiteManager bts bts bts bts bts bts bts bts multiple site btsSiteManager btsSiteManager bts bts bsc

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Configuration parameter list

45

Parameter callClearing callReestablishment callReestablishmentPriority ccId cellBarQualify cellBarred cellDeletionCount cellDtxDownlink cellIdentity

Type DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP

Class 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 3 3 3 2 bts bts bts cc bts bts bts bts

Object class

bts adjacentCellHandOver adjacentCellReselection bts bts bts bts bts adjacentCellHandOver bts cem channel channel channel signallingPoint signallingPoint signallingPoint signallingPoint xtp signallingPoint cn transcoder3GEqpt transceiver handOverControl handOverControl handOverControl handOverControl bts

cellName cellPagingState cellReselectHysteresis cellReselectOffset cellReselInd cellType cemId channel state channelType chanState chosenChannelAsscomp chosenChannelCompL3Info chosenChannelHoPerf chosenChannelHoReq cic circuitGroupBlock cnId coderPoolList codingScheme concentAlgoExtMsRange concentAlgoExtRxLev concentAlgoIntMsRange concentAlgoIntRxLev concentric cell

DP DD DP DP DP DP DP DP DD DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP

BSS Parameter Dictionary

46

Configuration parameter list

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameter configRef configRefList confusion counter list filename counters cpueNumber cpueOccurrence cRC CTU cable currentChannelHorqd cypherModeReject data mode 14.4 kbit/s data non transparent mode data transparent mode Data14.4OnNoHoppingTs dDTIIntState delayBetweenRetrans deltaUtc directedRetry directedRetryModeUsed directedRetryPrio distHreqt distWtsList diversity dLPwrValue drxTimerMax dtxMode duplex link state early classmark sending emergencyCallRestricted emergencyCallPriority eMLPPThreshold encrypAlgoAsscomp encrypAlgoCiphModComp

Type DP DP DP DP DP DP DD DP DD DP DP DP DP DP DP DD DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DD DP DP DP DP DP DP

Class 2 1 2 1 1 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1

Object class btsSiteManager executableSoftware signallingPoint bscCounterList bscCounterList btsSiteManager btsSiteManager pcmCircuit iem signallingPoint signallingPoint transcoderBoard bts signallingPoint bts signallingPoint bts pcmCircuit bts md adjacentCellHandOver bts bts handOverControl handOverControl bts transceiver bts bts bsc bts bts bts signallingPoint signallingPoint signallingPoint

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Configuration parameter list

47

Parameter encrypAlgoHoperf encrypAlgoHoreq encryptionAlgorSupported enhancedTRAUFrameIndication error concealment unit errorCorrectionMethod executableSoftwareId executableSoftwareName extCommsInt extended cell external alarm configuration external battery cabinet externalTime fhsRef forced handover algo geographical coordinates

Type DP DP DP DI DP DP DP DP DD DP DP DP DP DP DP DI

Class 1 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 2 3

Object class signallingPoint signallingPoint bsc bsc bts signallingLinkSet executableSoftware executableSoftware bsc bts btsSiteManager btsSiteManager md channel adjacentCellHandOver btsSiteManager bsc md pcu transcoder

gprsAvgParam gprsCellActivation gprsPermittedAccess gprsPreemption gprsPreemptionProtection gprsPriority gprsTimerWaitPUAM gprsTimerWaitRLC HandOver from signalling channel hardware configuration hardwareRef

DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3

bts bts bts bts bts transceiver bts bts handOverControl transceiverEquipment btsSiteManager transceiverEquipment transcoderBoard adjacentCellHandOver bts adjacentCellHandOver adjacentCellHandOver

hoMargin hoMarginBeg hoMarginDist hoMarginRxLev

DP DP DP DP

BSS Parameter Dictionary

48

Configuration parameter list

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameter hoMarginRxQual hoMarginTiering hoMarginTrafficOffset HOPingpongCombination HOPingpongTimeRejection hoppingSequenceNumber HOSecondBestCellConfiguration hoTraffic iemId iMSIAttachDetach incomingHandOver inId interBscDirectedRetry interBscDirectedRetryFromCell interCellHOExtPriority interCellHOIntPriority interferenceType interferer cancel algo usage interOmuEtherlinkOper intraBscDirectedRetry intraBscDirectedRetryFromCell intraCell intraCellHOIntPriority intraCellQueueing intraCellSDCCH lapdConcentration lapdexists lapdLinkCallPLoad lapdLinkOMLRef

Type DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DD DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DD DP DP

Class 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 0 2 2 2 0 1 2

Object class adjacentCellHandOver handOverControl adjacentCellHandOver adjacentCellHandOver adjacentCellHandOver frequencyHoppingSystem bsc bsc bts iem bts handOverControl in bsc bts bts bts adjacentCellHandOver bts cn bsc bts handOverControl bts bts handOverControl lapdLink iem, lsaRc transcoder3GEqpt transcoder btsSiteManager transceiverEquipment transceiverEquipment lapdLink signallingPoint btsSiteManager

lapdLinkRSLRef lapdTerminalNumber layer3MsgCyphModComp lightning protection

DP DP DP DP

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Configuration parameter list

49

Parameter locationAreaCode

Type DP

Class 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3

Object class adjacentCellHandOver adjacentCellReselection bts bts bts handOverControl powerControl handOverControl powerControl handOverControl powerControl handOverControl powerControl iem, lsaRc lsaRc iem channel md bts bts bts bts btsSiteManager bscLog transceiver transceiver transceiver bts bts bts bts md bts adjacentCellHandOver (A algorithm) adjacentCellHandOver (A algorithm) bts (B algorithm)

longTbfLossThroughput longTbfSizeThreshold lRxLevDLH lRxLevDLP lRxLevULH lRxLevULP lRxQualDLH lRxQualDLP lRxQualULH lRxQualULP lsaPcmList lsaRcId lsaRc Reference maio managerServer maxBsTransmitPowerInnerZone maxDnTbfP1P2Threshold maxDnTbfPerTs maxDwAssign maxNbOfCells maxNbrConsMess maxNbrPDAAssig maxNbrPUDWithoutVChange maxNbrRLCEmptyBlock maxNumberRetransmission maxRach maxUpTbfP1P2Threshold maxUpTbfPerTs mdId measurementProcAlgorithm microCellCaptureTimer microCellStability

DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP

BSS Parameter Dictionary

410

Configuration parameter list

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameter minNbOfTDMA minNbrGprsTs missDistWt missRxLevWt missRxQualWt mmsId mmsUsage mobileAllocation mobileCountryCode

Type DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP

Class 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 2 3 3 1 2 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 3 3 1 3 3 2 2 3 3 2 2 2 3 1 1 bts bts

Object class

handOverControl handOverControl handOverControl mms mms frequencyHoppingSystem bsc bts adjacentCellHandOver adjacentCellReselection bsc bts adjacentCellHandOver adjacentCellReselection bsc handOverControl bts handOverControl bts bts bts adjacentCellHandOver bts bsc pcusn bts transceiver bts bts bts pcu bts bts adjacentCellHandOver signallingPoint signallingLinkSet

mobileNetworkCode

DP

modeModifyMandatory msBtsDistanceInterCell msCapWeightActive msRangeMax msTxPwrMax msTxPwrMax2ndBand msTxPwrMaxCCH msTxPwrMaxCell multi band reporting multipleVocoders muxNumber N3103 N3105max nbOfRepeat nbrFreeTchBeforeAnticipation nbrFreeTchToEndAnticipation nbrTch NCHPosition networkColourCode networkIndicator

DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Configuration parameter list

411

Parameter new power control algorithm noOfBlocksForAccessGrant noOfMultiframesBetweenPaging notAllowedAccessClasses numberOfPwciSamples numberOfEnabledHDLCPorts numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans numberOfTCHFreeBeforeCongestion numberOfTCHFreeToEndCongestion numberOfTCHQueuedBeforeCongestion numberOfTCHQueuedToEndCongestion observationType occupationState offsetLoad offsetPriority omuId operationalState

Type DP DP DP DP DP DD DP DP DP DP DP DP DD DP DP DP DD

Class 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 bts bts bts bts

Object class

handOverControl iem, tmu bts bts bts bts bts bscCounterList xtp adjacentCellHandOver adjacentCellHandOver omu bsc, bscMdInterface, bts, btsSiteManager, lapdLink, pcmCircuit, pcu, signallingLink, transceiver, transceiverEquipment, transcoder, transcoderBoard, xtp, atmRm cc, cem, cn, bsc3GEqpt transcoder3GEqpt, iem, in, lsaRc mms, omu, sw8kRm, tmu, trm

otherServicesPriority packetAckTime pagingOnCell pan pcmCircuitBsc pcmCircuitBtsSiteManager pcmCircuitId

DP DP DP DP DP DP DD

3 3 3 3

bts transceiver bts bts btsSiteManager btsSiteManager lapdLink

BSS Parameter Dictionary

412

Configuration parameter list

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameter pcmCircuitId

Type DP

Class 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 2 3 3 3 3 1 3 2 3

Object class signallingLink transcoder xtp bts pcu btsSiteManager pcmCircuit pcu pcusn pcusn pcusn bts bts bts signallingLinkSet signallingPoint omu omu bscMdInterface omu omu bscMdInterface atmRm, cc, cem, iem, lsaRc, mms omu, sw8kRm, tmu, trm handOverControl transceiver bts transcoderBoard powerControl powerControl signallingPoint adjacentCellHandOver transceiver mms bsc bscMdInterface

pcmErrorCorrection pcmNbr pcmTimeSlotNumber pcmType pcuLapdEqptRefList pcuSNName pcuSNReserved1 pcuSNReserved2 penaltyTime periodCCCHLoadIndication plmnPermitted pointCode port0X25Status port1X25Status portChosen portEthernetOperational portEthernetStatus portUsed positionInShelf powerBudgetInterCell powerClass powerControlIndicator powerDownlink powerIncrStepSize powerRedStepSize preemptionAuthor preSynchroTimingAdvance priority privateMmsOmuRef processorLoadSupConf protocolUsed

DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DD DD DP DD DD DD DD DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Configuration parameter list

413

Parameter rACHLoadAveragingSlots radChanSellIntThreshold radioAllocator radioLinkTimeout radioSiteMask radioSiteName radResSupBusyTimer radResSupervision radResSupFreeTimer redundantPcmNumber redundantPcmPresence relatedSoftwares remoteSsuState reserved1 reserved1 reserved2 reserved2 reserved3 reserved3 reserved3 reserved4 reserved4 reserved4 reserved5 reserved5 reserved5 resetCircuitRepeat retransDuration rlf1 rlf2 rlf3 rmpConfState rndAccTimAdvThreshold routingArea runCallClear

Type DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DD DP DP DD DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DD DP DP DP

Class 3 3 2 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 3 2 3 bts

Object class handOverControl bts bts btsSiteManager multiple site bsc bts bsc btsSiteManager btsSiteManager executableSoftware signallingLinkSet pcu transceiver pcu transceiver bts pcu transceiver bts pcu transceiver bts pcu transceiver signallingPoint bts bts bts bts transceiver bts bts bts

BSS Parameter Dictionary

414

Configuration parameter list

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameter runHandOver runPwrControl rxLevAccessMin rxLevDLIH rxLevDLPBGT rxLevHreqave rxLevHreqaveBeg rxLevHreqt rxLevMinCell rxLevNCellHreqaveBeg rxLevULIH rxLevWtsList rxNCellHreqave rxQualDLIH rxQualHreqave rxQualHreqt rxQualULIH rxQualWtsList sapi selfTuningObs shelfNumber

Type DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP

Class 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 bts bts bts

Object class

handOverControl adjacentCellHandOver handOverControl handOverControl handOverControl adjacentCellHandOver handOverControl handOverControl handOverControl handOverControl handOverControl handOverControl handOverControl handOverControl handOverControl lapdLink handOverControl atmRm, cc, cem, iem, lsaRc mms, omu, sw8kRm tmu, trm signallingLink signallingPoint signallingLink signallingPoint signallingPoint btsSiteManager btsSiteManager signallingLink handOverControl btsSiteManager bts executableSoftware

signallingLinkResState signallingPointType signallingTerminalNumber sigPReserved1 sigPReserved2 siteGsmFctList siteName slc small to large zone HO priority smoke detector smsCB softwareLabel

DD DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP 2 3 3 2 2 3 2 3

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Configuration parameter list

415

Parameter speechMode speechOnHoppingTs speechVersionAsscomp speechVersionHoperf speechVersionHoreq speechVersionHorqd standard indicator AdjC standardIndicator standbyStatus supportingTransceiverEquipment sw8kRmId sWVersionBackUp sWVersionFallback sWVersionNew sWVersionRunning synchronized synchronizing PCM t3101 t3103 t3107 t3109 t3111 t3122 T3172 teiBtsSiteManager teiLapdLink teiTransceiverEqpt teiTranscoder temporaryOffset TFH or RWM thresholdCCCHLoadIndication thresholdInterference timeBetweenHOConfiguration

Type DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DD DD DP DP DP DP DP DP DD DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP

Class 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 2 2

Object class bts signallingPoint bts signallingPoint signallingPoint signallingPoint signallingPoint adjacentCellHandOver adjacentCellReselection bts atmRm, cem, iem, lsaRc omu, sw8kRm transceiver sw8kRm software software software software adjacentCellHandOver bsc bts bts bts bts bts bts bts btsSiteManager lapdLink transceiverEquipment transcoder bts btsSiteManager bts handOverControl bsc

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 2 3 2 3

BSS Parameter Dictionary

416

Configuration parameter list

Nortel Networks Confidential

Parameter timerPeriodicUpdateMS timeSlotNumber timeSlotNumber tmuId traffic PCM allocation priority transcdBReserved1 transcdBReserved2 transceiver equipment class transceiver zone Ref transcoderAlarmMask transcoderBoardIntState transcoder2GEqptId transcoder3GEqptId transcoderAlarmList transcoderId transcoderIntPcmIntState transcoderMatrix transcvEReserved1 transcvEReserved2 trmId tSCBNumber tSCBUse tsConfiguration txPwrMaxReduction unequippedCircuit unknownNCellWarning unmasked users alarms upgradeStatus uplinkMappingChannelNumber uplinkMappingFreq uplinkMappingMeasurementMode uplinkMappingProcessingMode

Type DP DD DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DP DD DP DP DP DP DD DP DP DP DP DP DP DD DP DP DP DP DD DP DP DP DP

Class 3 2 2 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 3 2 1 3 2 2 2 2 2 bts lapdLink

Object class

signallingLink xtp tmu transceiver transcoderBoard transcoderBoard transceiver transceiverZone transceiver transcoder transcoderBoard transcoder2GEqpt transcoder3GEqpt transcoder2GEqpt signallingLink xtp transcoder transcoder transceiverEquipment transceiverEquipment trm bsc2GEqpt bsc2GEqpt transceiver transceiver signallingPoint bts btsSiteManager atmRm, cc, cem, iem, omu sw8kRm, tmu, trm bts bts bts bsc

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Configuration parameter list

417

Parameter uplinkPowerControl uRxLevDLP uRxLevULP uRxQualDLP uRxQualULP usageState version voiceBroadcastService voiceGroupCallService VSWR meter X25Port0Operational X25Port1Operational xSCBConfiguration xSCBNumber xSCBUse zone frequency hopping zone frequency threshold zone Tx power max reduction

Type DP DP DP DP DP DD DP DP DP DP DD DD DP DD DD DP DP DP

Class 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 0 powerControl powerControl powerControl powerControl powerControl xtp transcoder

Object class

signallingPoint signallingPoint btsSiteManager omu omu bsc bsc bsc

2 2 2

transceiverZone transceiverZone transceiverZone

Table B1

Configuration parameter list

In the standard OMCR configuration, the disks of the active and backup servers are mirrored. Any change to the active server disks updates the standby server disks. A directory name specified in this chapter beginning with /xxx should be understood as /xxx_SRV when applied to the active server and /xxx_BKP when applied to the standby server. The various operands that can be applied to a parameter are detailed in NTP < 130 > as follows: in Paragraph 12.2.2, for scope & filter commands in Appendix A Filter parameter, for trace data display commands

BSS Parameter Dictionary

418

Configuration parameter list

Nortel Networks Confidential

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Index of parameters

A
abisSpy, 21 absoluteRFChannelNo, 21 access time end, 22 access time start, 22 accessClassCongestion, 22 accessibilityState, 23 acknowledged by, 23 acknowledgment time, 23 activationObject
callPathTrace, 24 traceControl, 24

active chain disk state, 24 active chain Dmux state, 24 active chain ECI board state, 25 active chain REM link state, 25 active chain Sic board state, 25 active chain sic channels state, 25 active chain sls board state, 25 active chain state, 26 active chain switching capacity, 26 active chain tcu accessibility, 26 active chain ute board state, 26 active rem link, 26 activeChain, 27 additional supervised PCM 0, 27 additional supervised PCM 1, 28 additional supervised PCM 2, 28 additional supervised PCM 3, 29 additional supervised PCM 4, 210 additional supervised PCM 5, 210 additional unmasked users alarms, 211 addresses, 212 adjacent cell umbrella ref, 212 adjacentCellHandOver, 213 adjacentCellReselection, 214 adjCHOReserved3, 214 adjCHOReserved4, 214 administrativeState, 222
alarm criteria, 215

BSS Parameter Dictionary

ii

Index of parameters

Nortel Networks Confidential

atmRm, 215 bsc, 215 bscMdInterface, 216 bts, 216 btsSiteManager, 218 callPathTrace, 219 cc, 220 cem, 220 cn, 220 efd, 221 g3BscEqp, 221 g3Transcoder, 221 iem, 221 in, 221 log, 222 lsaRc, 222 mdWarning, 222 mms, 223 omu, 223 pcmCircuit, 223 pcu, 223 signallingLink, 224 sw8kRm, 224 tmu, 224 traceControl, 224 transceiverEquipment, 225 transcoder, 226 transcoderBoard, 227 trm, 227 xtp, 227

aLAIntState, 228 alarm criteria


alarm criteria, 229 omc, 228

alarm number, 229 alarm severity, 230 alarm state, 230 alarmDuration, 230 alarmListConverter, 230 alarmListFan, 230 alarmListFanBoard, 231 alarmListVCOTension, 231 alarmPriority, 232 AlgoId, 233 algorithm Used, 233 allocationState, 234

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Index of parameters

iii

allocBitmap, 234 allocPriorityTable, 235 allocPriorityThreshold, 235 allocPriorityTimers, 236 allocWaitThreshold, 236 allOtherCasesPriority, 236 answerPagingPriority, 237 architecture, 237 assignRequestPriority, 237 associatedInterface, 238 associatedLog
callPathTrace, 238 mdScanner, 238 traceControl, 238

associatedTMUPosition, 238 atmRmId, 239 Attenuation, 239 auditBdaStatus, 240 auditState, 240 authorised user, 240 availabilityStatus
bsc, 241 bscMdInterface, 241 bts, 241 btsSiteManager, 241 lapdLink, 241 log, 241 mdScanner, 242 pcmCircuit, 241 pcu, 242 pcusn, 242 signallingLink, 241 transceiver, 241 transceiverEquipment, 241 transcoder, 241 transcoderBoard, 241 xtp, 242

averagingPeriod, 243

B
backup manager addresses, 244 backupServer, 244 baseColourCode
adjacentCellHandOver, 244 bts, 245

BSS Parameter Dictionary

iv

Index of parameters

Nortel Networks Confidential

bCCHFrequency
adjacentCellHandOver, 245 adjacentCellReselection, 246 bts, 246

bda activation type, 247 bdaNewBscState, 248 bdaSelected, 249 bdaState, 249 bdaVersionBuild, 250 bdaVersionNumber, 250 Beginning date, 250 beginSearchTime
Display custom report, 251 Display raw report, 251 List available temporary observations, 252 List observation messages, 252

biZonePowerOffset
adjacentCellHandOver, 253 handOverControl, 253

bsc
adjacentCellHandover, 255 adjacentCellReselection, 255 bsc, 254 bts, 255 btsSiteManager, 255 channel, 255 frequencyHoppingSystem, 255 handOverControl, 255 lapdLink, 255 multiple site, 255 pcmCircuit, 255 powerControl, 255 signallingLink, 255 signallingLinkSet, 255 signallingPoint, 255 software, 255 transceiver, 255 transceiverEquipment, 255 transceiverZone, 255 transcoder, 255 transcoderBoard, 255 xtp, 255

bsc equipment name, 255 BSC list, 256 bsc model, 257 BSC number, 257

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Index of parameters

bsc2GEqptId, 253 bsc3GEqptId, 254 bscAlarmMask, 257 bscArchitecture, 258 bscChainId, 258 bscCounterList, bscCounterList, 258 bscDateTime, 259 bscGprsActivation, 259 bscHopReconfUse, 260 bscIPFirstAdr, 260 bscIPSecondAdr, 261 bscList, 261 bscLogId, 261 bscMdInterface, 262 bscMdInterfaceRef, 262 bscMdInterfaceVersionNumber, 262 bscMSAccessClassBarringFunction, 262 bscName, 263 bscPcuPcmRefList, 263 bscQueueingOption, 264 bscRefList, 264 bscReset, 264 bscSitePcmList, 265 bscTimeSlot, 266 bscType, 267 bscUsedAdr, 267 bsCvMax, 268 bscX25PrefAdr, 268 bscX25SecAdr, 269 bscX25UsedAdr, 269 bsMsmtProcessingMode, 270 bsPowerControl, 270 bssMapT1, 270 bssMapT12, 271 bssMapT13, 271 bssMapT19, 271 bssMapT20, 272 bssMapT4, 272 bssMapT7, 272 bssMapT8, 273

BSS Parameter Dictionary

vi

Index of parameters

Nortel Networks Confidential

bssMapTchoke, 273 bssSccpConnEst, 274 bssSccpInactRx, 274 bssSccpInactTx, 274 bssSccpRelease, 275 bssSccpSubSysTest, 275 bsTxPwrMax, 275 bts
adjacentCellHandOver, 278 adjacentCellReselection, 278 bts, 277 channel, 278 frequencyHoppingSystem, 278 handOverControl, 278 powerControl, 278 software, 278 transceiver, 278 transceiverEquipment, 278 transceiverZone, 278

bts equipment name, 279 bts list, 280 bts time between HO configuration, 280 btsDescription, 281 btsHopReconfRestart, 281 btsIsHopping, 281 btsLockedReserved2, 283 btsMSAccessClassBarringFunction, 283 btsReserved3, 283 btsReserved4, 283 btsSensitivity, 284 btsSensitivityInnerZone, bts, 284 btsSiteManager
adjacentCellHandOver, 286 adjacentCellReselection, 286 bts, 286 btsSiteManager, 284 channel, 286 frequencyHoppingSystem, 286 handOverControl, 286 powerControl, 286 software, 286 transceiver, 286 transceiverEquipment, 286 transceiverZone, 286

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Index of parameters

vii

btsSiteManager model, 286 btsSiteManagerList, 287 btsSMReserved1, 287 btsSMReserved2, 287 btsThresholdHopReconf, 288 btsWithCavity, 288 buildState, 289

C
callClearing, 290 callPathObservationArea, 291 callPathTrace, 291 callPathTraceType, 292 callReestablishment, 292 callReestablishmentPriority, 293 capacityAlarmThreshold, 293 Cause, 294 ccId, 294 cellAllocation, 295 cellBarQualify, 296 cellBarred, 297 cellDeletionCount, 298 cellDtxDownLink, 299 cellIdentity
adjacentCellHandOver, 2100 adjacentCellReselection, 2100 bts, 2101

cellName, 2101 cellPagingState, 2102 cellReselectHysteresis, 2103 cellReselectOffset, 2105 cellReselInd, 2106 cellType
adjacentCellHandOver, 2106 bts, 2107

cemId, 2107 chain


Fault logs, 2108 softwarebsc, 2108

chainId
bsc Display chain information, 2108 bsc Suicide chain, 2108

BSS Parameter Dictionary

viii

Index of parameters

Nortel Networks Confidential

channel, channel, 2109 channel state, 2110 channelType, 2111 chanState, 2114 chosenChannelAsscomp, 2115 chosenChannelCompL3Info, 2115 chosenChannelHoPerf, 2115 chosenChannelHoReq, 2116 cic, 2117 circuitGroupBlock, 2118 circularFileId, 2118 circularFileState, 2119 clear time, 2119 cleared by, 2119 clearing cause, 2119 cnId, 2120 coderPoolList, 2120 codingScheme, 2120 command classes, 2122 command line, 2122 command number, 2122 commandFile
Command file editing, 2123 commandFile, 2123

comment
report template, 2123 short message, 2123

comments, 2124 ComputeSyntheticCounters, 2124 concentAlgoExtMsRange, 2124 concentAlgoExtRxLev, 2125 concentAlgoIntMsRange, 2126 concentAlgoIntRxLev, 2127 concentric cell, 2129 condition, 2130 configRef, 2132 configRefList, 2132 configurationType, 2133 confusion, 2133 Counter list, 2133

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Index of parameters

ix

counter list filename, 2133 counterId, mdWarning (outOfRangeCounter), 2134 counters, 2134 cpueNumber, 2134 cpueOccurence, 2135 cRC, 2136 creator, 2137 criteriaEventType, 2137 CTU cable, 2137 current log size, 2137 currentChannelHorqd, 2138 cypherModeReject, 2138

D
data mode 14.4 kbit/s, 2139 data non transparent mode
bts, 2139 signallingPoint, 2140

data transparent mode


bts, 2140 signallingPoint, 2141

Data14_4OnNoHoppingTs, 2141 date


Daily observation report, 2141 md Archive, 2142 md Restore, 2142 omc Archive, 2142 omc Restore, 2142

day intervention, 2142 Day to be purged, 2143 dDTIIntState, 2143 delayBetweenRetrans, 2143 deltaUtc, 2144 detectionFunction, 2144 directedRetry, 2145 directedRetryModeUsed, 2146 directedRetryPrio, 2147 directory, 2147 distHreqt, 2148 distWtsList, 2149 diversity, 2150

BSS Parameter Dictionary

Index of parameters

Nortel Networks Confidential

dLPwrValue, 2150 drxTimerMax, 2151 dtxMode, 2152 duplex link state, 2152 duration, 2152 dwAckTime, 2153

E
early classmark sending, 2154 efd, efd, 2154 efdType, 2155 eft
md, 2156 omc, 2156 software, 2157

emergencyCallPriority, 2158 eMLPPThreshold, 2159 encrypAlgoAsscomp, 2159 encrypAlgoCiphModComp, 2159 encrypAlgoHoperf, 2160 encrypAlgoHoreq, 2160 encryptionAlgorSupported, 2160 End date, 2161 end date, 2161 End of probative Phase Type, 2161 end time
job, 2162 system session log, 2162

endAlarmFilter, 2162 endAlarmThreshold


mdWarning (excessiveAnomalyRate), 2163 mdWarning (outOfRangeCounter), 2163

endCounterThreshold, 2164 endSearchTime


Display custom report, 2164 Display raw report, 2164 List available permanent observations, 2165 List available temporary observations, 2165 List observation messages, 2166

endSessionCriteriaType, 2166 enhancedTRAUFrameIndication, 2167

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Index of parameters

xi

equipment processor number, 2167 error concealment unit, 2167 errorCorrectionMethod, 2168 exclusive interval of codano, 2168 exclusive list of codano, 2168 executableSoftwareId, 2168 executableSoftwareName, 2169 extCommsInt, 2169 extended cell, 2170 external alarm configuration, 2170 external battery cabinet, 2172 externalTime, 2172

F
Family, 2175 faultNumber, 2176 fhsRef, 2177 forced handover algo, 2178 frequencyHoppingSystem, 2178

G
geographical coordinates
bsc, 2179 btsSiteManager, 2179 md, 2179 pcusn, 2179 transcoder, 2179

gprsAvgParam, 2180 gprsBtsExtendedConf, 2180 gprsBtsLockExtendedConf , 2181 gprsCellActivation, 2181 gprsPcuCrossConnectList, 2181 gprsPcuLockExtendedConf, 2182 gprsPermittedAccess, 2182 gprsPreemption, 2182 gprsPreemptionProtection, 2183 gprsPriority, 2183 gprsTimerWaitPUAM, 2183 gprsTimerWaitRLC, 2184 gprsTranscvLockBtsExtendedConf , 2184

BSS Parameter Dictionary

xii

Index of parameters

Nortel Networks Confidential

H
HandOver from signalling channel, 2185 handOverControl, 2185 hardware configuration, 2186 hardwareRef
btsSiteManager, 2186 transceiverEquipment, 2186 transcoderBoard, 2186

hexa text, 2187 hoMargin, 2187 hoMarginBeg, 2187 hoMarginDist, 2188 hoMarginRxLev, 2188 hoMarginRxQual, 2188 hoMarginTiering, 2188 hoMarginTrafficOffset, 2189 HOPingpongCombination, 2189 HOPingpongTimeRejection, 2190 hoppingSequenceNumber, 2191 HOSecondBestCellConfiguration, 2191 hoTraffic
bsc, 2192 bts, 2192

I
identifier
short message, 2193 software, 2193 softwarebsc, 2193

iemId, 2193 iMSIAttachDetach, 2194 inactivity timeout, 2194 inclusive interval of codano, 2194 inclusive list of codano, 2194 incomingHandOver, 2195 inhibitRequest, 2195 inId, 2195 interBscDirectedRetry, 2195 interBscDirectedRetryFromCell, 2196 interCellHOExtPriority, 2196

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Index of parameters

xiii

interCellHOIntPriority, 2196 interferenceType, 2197 interferer cancel algo usage, 2197 internal DMUX alarm state, 2197 internal DMUX state, 2199 internal PCM states, 2199 internal switching matrix, 2199 interOmuEtherlinkOper, 2200 intraBscDirectedRetry, 2200 intraBscDirectedRetryFromCell, 2200 intraCell, 2201 intraCellHOIntPriority, 2201 intraCellQueueing, 2201 intraCellSDCCH, 2202

J
job, 2203 jobResult, 2203

L
label
md Archive, 2204 md Display archive list, 2204 md Display label, 2204 md Restore, 2204 md Set label, 2204 omc Archive, 2204 omc Display archive list, 2204 omc Display label, 2204 omc Restore, 2204 omc Set label, 2204

language, 2204 lapdConcentration, 2205 lapdLink, 2206 lapdLinkCallPLoad, 2207 lapdLinkOMLRef


btsSiteManager, 2207 transceiverEquipment, 2208 transcoder, 2208

lapdLinkRSLRef, 2209 lapdTerminalNumber, 2210

BSS Parameter Dictionary

xiv

Index of parameters

Nortel Networks Confidential

layer3MsgCyphModComp, 2211 Level to process, 2211 lightning protection, 2211 line, 2211 locationAreaCode
adjacentCellHandOver, 2212 adjacentCellReselection, 2212 bts, 2212

log, log, 2213 logFullAction, 2213 longTbfLossThroughput, 2214 longTbfSizeThreshold, 2214 lRxLevDLH, 2214 lRxLevDLP, 2215 lRxLevULH, 2215 lRxLevULP, 2216 lRxQualDLH, 2216 lRxQualDLP, 2217 lRxQualULH, 2217 lRxQualULP, 2217 lsaRc Reference, 2218 lsaRcId, 2218

M
machine name
job, 2219 jobResult, 2219

mainNetworkBand, 2219 maio, 2219 managedObjectClass


alarmRecord, 2220 mdScanReportRecord, 2220 observationFileReadyRecord, 2220 stateChangeRecord, 2220 traceFileReadyRecord, 2220 traceLogRecord, 2220

managedObjectInstance
alarmRecord, 2220 mdScanReportRecord, 2220 observationFileReadyRecord, 2220 stateChangeRecord, 2220 traceFileReadyRecord, 2220 traceLogRecord, 2220

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Index of parameters

xv

Manager address type, 2221 Manager addresses, 2221 managerServer, 2221 manufacturerIntervention, 2221 marking type, 2222 max log size, 2222 maxAdjCHOARMPerBts, 2222 maxBscPerNetwork, 2222 maxBsTransmitPowerInnerZone, bts, 2223 maxBtsPerBtsSM, 2223 maxBtsPerNetwork, 2223 maxDnTbfP1P2Threshold, 2223 maxDnTbfPerTs, 2224 maxDwAssign, 2224 maxFileSize, 2224 maximum acknowledgment time, 2225 maximum alarm number, 2225 maximum clear time, 2225 maximum event time, 2226 maximum MD notification number, 2226 maximum OMC notification number, 2226 maximum reception time, 2227 maxLapdChPerBtsSM, 2227 maxNbOfCells, 2228 maxNbrConsMess, 2227 maxNbrPDAAssig, 2228 maxNbrRLCEmptyBlock, 2229 maxNbrWithoutVchange, 2229 maxNumberRetransmission, 2229 maxPcmCPerBtsSM, 2230 maxPcmCPerTranscd, 2230 maxRACH, 2230 maxRowCount, 2230 maxSigLPerSigLS, 2231 maxTeiPerLapdCh, 2231 maxTranscdBPerTranscd, 2231 maxTranscdPerBsc, 2231 maxUpTbfP1P2Threshold, 2232 maxUpTbfPerTs, 2232 md, 2232

BSS Parameter Dictionary

xvi

Index of parameters

Nortel Networks Confidential

MD notification number, 2232 mdArchive, 2233 mdConfirm, 2233 mdFileName, 2233 mdGranularityPeriod
mdScanner, 2234 mdScanReportRecord, 2234 observationFileReadyRecord, 2235

mdId, 2236 mdLog, 2236 mdObjectList


Display xxx report, 2237 List observation messages, 2237 mdScanner, 2236

mdScanner, 2237 mdScannerType


Display xxx report, 2238 List observation messages, 2238 Load formulae, 2239 mdScanner, 2239

mdStorageDuration, 2240 mdTransferMode, 2240 mdWarning, mdWarning, 2240 measurementProcAlgorithm, 2241 mergeEft
md Create EFT, 2241 md Validate EFT, 2241 omc Download and validate EFT from gigatape to md, 2242

microCellCaptureTimer, 2242 microCellStability, 2242 minimum acknowledgment time, 2243 minimum alarm number, 2243 minimum clear time, 2243 minimum event time, 2244 minimum MD notification number, 2244 minimum OMC notification number, 2244 minimum reception time, 2245 minNbOfTDMA, 2245 minNbrGprsTs, 2245 missDistWt, 2246 missRxLevWt, 2246 missRxQualWt, 2247

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Index of parameters

xvii

mmsId, 2247 mmsUsage, 2247 mobileAllocation, 2248 mobileCountryCode


adjacentCellHandOver, 2248 adjacentCellReselection, 2249 bsc, 2249 bts, 2250

mobileNetworkCode
adjacentCellHandOver, 2250 adjacentCellReselection, 2251 bsc, 2251 bts, 2251

modeModifyMandatory, 2252 monitoredObjectClass, 2252 monitoredObjectInstance, 2253 monitoredSpecificProblemsList, 2253 month, 2253 msBtsDistanceInterCell, 2253 msCapWeightActive, 2254 msRangeMax, 2254 msTxPwrMax, 2255 msTxPwrMax2ndBand, 2255 msTxPwrMaxCCH, 2256 msTxPwrMaxCell, 2257 multi band reporting, 2258 multiple site, 2258 multipleVocoders, 2259 muxNumber, 2259

N
N3103, 2260 N3105max, 2260 nAvgl, 2260 nAvgT, 2261 nAvgW, 2261 nbOfRepeat, 2261 nbrFreeTchBeforeAnticipation, 2262 nbrFreeTchToEndAnticipation, 2262 nbrTch, 2262 NCHPosition, 2263

BSS Parameter Dictionary

xviii

Index of parameters

Nortel Networks Confidential

network protocolUsed, 2264 networkColourCode


adjacentCellHandOver, 2264 bts, 2265

networkIndicator
signallingLinkSet, 2265 signallingPoint, 2266

new name, 2266 new password 1st try, 2266 new password 2nd try, 2267 new power control algorithm, 2267 next execution time, 2268 night intervention, 2268 noOfBlocksForAccessGrant, 2268 noOfMultiframesBetweenPaging, 2269 notAllowedAccessClasses, 2269 notification number
alarmRecord, 2269 mdScanReportRecord, 2269 observationFileReadyRecord, 2269 stateChangeRecord, 2269 traceFileReadyRecord, 2269 traceLogRecord, 2269

notification type, 2270 number of records, 2270 numberOfEnabledHDLCPorts, iem, 2270 numberOfPwciSamples, 2271 numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans, 2271 numberOfTCHFreeBeforeCongestion, 2273 numberOfTCHFreeToEndCongestion, 2273 numberOfTCHQueuedBeforeCongestion, 2274 numberOfTCHQueuedToEndCongestion, 2274

O
Object Filter List, 2276 objectClass
alarmRecord, 2275 mdScanReportRecord, 2275 observationFileReadyRecord, 2275 stateChangeRecord, 2275 traceFileReadyRecord, 2275 traceLogRecord, 2275

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Index of parameters

xix

objectInstance, 2275 objects, 2276 objects assigned, 2277 observation type


bscCounterList, 2277 report template, 2277

Observed counters, 2277 Observed object class, 2278 occupationState, 2278 offsetLoad, 2278 offsetPriority, 2279 OMC notification number, 2279 omuId, 2279 on error, 2279 operationalState
atmRm, 2280 bsc, 2280 bscMdInterface, 2281 bts, 2281 btsSiteManager, 2282 callPathTrace, 2282 cc, 2283 cem, 2283 cn, 2284 efd, 2284 g3BscEqp, 2284 g3Transcoder, 2285 iem, 2285 in, 2286 lapdLink, 2286 log, 2287 lsaRc, 2287 mdScanner, 2288 mms, 2288 omu, 2288 pcmCircuit, 2289 pcu, 2290 pcusn, 2290 signallingLink, 2291 sw8kRm, 2291 tmu, 2292 traceControl, 2292 transceiver, 2293 transceiverEquipment, 2293 transcoder, 2294 transcoderBoard, 2294 trm, 2295 xtp, 2295

BSS Parameter Dictionary

xx

Index of parameters

Nortel Networks Confidential

otherServicesPriority, 2296 output classes


terminal profile, 2296 user profile, 2297

owner, 2297

P
packetAckTime, 2298 pagingOnCell, 2298 pan, 2298 panDec, 2298 panInc, 2299 panMax, 2299 parameter(s), 2299 partialRecordCriteriaType, 2300 particular intervention, 2300 passive chain disk state, 24 passive chain Dmux state, 24 passive chain ECI board state, 25 passive chain REM link state, 25 passive chain Sic board state, 25 passive chain sic channels state, 25 passive chain sls board state, 25 passive chain state, 26 passive chain switching capacity, 26 passive chain tcu accessibility, 26 passive chain ute board state, 26 password
user profile Change password, 2300 user profile Create/Set, 2301

password duration, 2301 pcmCircuit


pcmCircuit (A interface), 2302 pcmCircuit (Abis, Ater, and Agprs interfaces), 2301

pcmCircuitBsc, 2303 pcmCircuitBtsSiteManager, 2304 pcmCircuitId


lapdLink, 2304 signallingLink, 2304 transcoder, 2305 xtp, 2305

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Index of parameters

xxi

pcmErrorCorrection, 2306 pcmNbr, 2306 pcmTimeSlotNumber, 2306 pcmType, 2307 pcu, 2307 pcuLapdEqptRefList, 2308 pcusn, 2308 pcuSNName, 2308 pcuSNReserved1, 2309 pcuSNReserved2, 2309 penaltyTime, 2309 perceived severity, 2310 periodCCCHLoadIndication, 2310 periodicity, 2310 plmnPermitted, 2310 PODType, 2311 pointCode
signallingLinkSet, 2311 signallingPoint, 2311

port0X25Status, 2312 port1X25Status, 2312 portChosen, 2313 portEthernetOperational, 2311 portEthernetStatus, 2312 portUsed, 2313 positionInShelf, iem, 2313 powerBudgetInterCell, 2314 powerClass, 2314 powerControl, powerControl, 2315 powerControlIndicator, 2315 powerDownlink, 2316 powerIncrStepSize, 2316 powerRedStepSize, 2316 powerUplink, 2317 preemptionAuthor, 2317 preSynchroTimingAdvance, adjacentCellHandOver, 2317 priority, 2318 privateMmsOmuRef, 2318 probable cause, 2318 processorLoadSupConf, 2320

BSS Parameter Dictionary

xxii

Index of parameters

Nortel Networks Confidential

R
rACHLoadAveragingSlots, 2322 radChanSelIntThreshold, 2322 radioAllocator, 2323 radioLinkTimeOut, 2324 radioSiteMask, 2325 radioSiteName, 2326 radResSupBusyTimer, 2326 radResSupervision, 2327 radResSupFreeTimer, 2327 reception time, 2327 Record reference, 2328 redundantPcmNumber, 2328 redundantPcmPresence, 2328 refPeriod
alarm criteria, 2329 mdWarning (excessiveAnomalyRate), 2329

relatedSoftwares, 2329 relay, 2330 remoteSsuState, 2330 repetition rate, 2330 Report range, 2331 report template, report template, 2331 reportObjLevel, 2331 reserved1
pcu, 2331 transceiver, 2332

reserved2
pcu, 2332 transceiver, 2332

reserved3
bts, 2333 pcu, 2333 transceiver, 2333

reserved4
bts, 2334 pcu, 2334 transceiver, 2334

reserved5
bts, 2335 pcu, 2335 transceiver, 2335

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Index of parameters

xxiii

resetCircuitRepeat, 2336 retransDuration, 2336 retry on error, 2336 rlf1, 2337 rlf2, 2337 rlf3, 2338 rmpConfState, 2338 rndAccTimAdvThreshold, 2339 routingArea, 2339 runCallClear, 2340 runHandOver, 2340 runPwrControl, 2340 rxLevAccessMin, 2341 rxLevDLIH, 2341 rxLevDLPBGT, 2342 rxLevHreqave, 2342 rxLevHreqaveBeg, 2343 rxLevHreqt, 2343 rxLevMinCell, 2344 rxLevULIH, 2344 rxLevWtsList, 2345

S
sapi, 2346 scannerId
Display xxx report, 2346 List observation messages, 2346

sequenceNumber, 2347 serial number, short message Display broadcast characteristics, 2347 , 2348 session context saving mode, 2348 shelfNumber, mms, 2348 short message, 2349 sicBoardsInt, 2349 signallingLink, 2350 signallingLinkResState, 2351 signallingLinkSet, 2351 signallingPoint, 2352 signallingPointType, 2352 signallingTerminalNumber, 2353

BSS Parameter Dictionary

xxiv

Index of parameters

Nortel Networks Confidential

sigPReserved1, 2353 sigPReserved2, 2354 siteGsmFctList, 2354 siteName, 2355 slc, 2356 small to large zone HO priority, 2356 smoke detector, 2356 smsCB, 2357 software, 2358 softwareLabel, 2359 source indicator, 2359 specific problems, 2359 speechMode
bts, 2360 signallingPoint, 2360

speechOnHoppingTs, 2361 speechVersionAsscomp, 2361 speechVersionHoperf, 2361 speechVersionHoreq, 2361 speechVersionHorqd, 2362 standard indicator AdjC
adjacentCellHandOver, 2362 adjacentCellReselection, 2362

standardIndicator, 2363 standbyStatus, iem, 2365 start date, 2365 start time
job, 2366 System session log, 2366

startAlarmFilter, 2367 startAlarmThreshold


mdWarning (excessiveAnomalyRate), 2368 mdWarning (outOfRangeCounter), 2368

startCounterThreshold, 2369 startTime


log, 2369 mdScanner, 2369

stopTime
log, 2370 mdScanner, 2370

subChanId, 2370 subject, 2371

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Index of parameters

xxv

Suffix, 2371 summary, 2371 supportingTransceiverEquipment, 2372 sw8kRmId, 2372 sWVersionBackUp, 2373 sWVersionFallBack, 2373 sWVersionNew, 2373 sWVersionRunning, 2374 synchronized, 2375 synchronizing PCM, 2376 syntheticFaultNumber, 2376 system state, 2376

T
t3101, 2377 t3103, 2377 t3107, 2378 t3109, 2378 t3111, 2379 t3122, 2379 T3172, 2379 target Bda, 2380 teiBtsSiteManager, 2380 teiLapdLink, 2381 teiTransceiverEqpt, 2381 teiTranscoder, 2382 temporaryOffset, 2382 terminal name, 2382 terminal profile, 2383 text
commandFile, 2383 short message, 2383 user message, 2383

TFH or RWM, 2383 thresholdCCCHLoadIndication, 2384 thresholdInterference, 2384 thresholdType, 2385 timeBetweenHOConfiguration, 2386 timerPeriodicUpdateMS, 2386 timeSlotNumber
lapdLink, 2386 signallingLink, 2387 xtp, 2387

BSS Parameter Dictionary

xxvi

Index of parameters

Nortel Networks Confidential

tmuId, 2388 traceConstraintList, 2388 traceControl, 2389 traceDayAccessed, 2389 traceFileName, 2389 traceInfoRequested, 2390 traceReference, 2390 traffic PCM allocation priority, 2390 transcdBReserved1, 2390 transcdBReserved2, 2391 transceiver, 2391
channel, 2391

transceiver equipment class


transceiverEquipment, 2392 transceiverZone, 2393

transceiver zone Ref, 2393 transceiverEquipment


software, 2394 transceiverEquipment, 2394

transceiverZone, 2395 transcoder


pcmCircuit, 2396 transcoder, 2397 transcoderBoard, 2397

transcoder2GEqptId, 2396 transcoder3GEqptId, 2396 transcoderAlarmList, 2398 transcoderAlarmMask, 2398 transcoderBoard, 2399
software, 2399

transcoderBoardIntState, 2399 transcoderId


signallingLink, 2400 xtp, 2400

transcoderIntPcmIntState, 2400 transcoderMatrix, 2401 transcvEReserved1, 2403 transcvEReserved2, 2403 trmId, 2403 tSCBNumber, 2404 tSCBUse, 2404 tsConfiguration, 2404

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Nortel Networks Confidential

Index of parameters

xxvii

txPowerMaxReduction, 2405 type


md Archive, 2406 md Restore, 2406 omc Archive, 2407 omc Restore, 2407 report template, 2408

Type of data to be purged, 2408 Type of display, 2408

U
unequippedCircuit, 2415 unknownNCellWarning, 2415 unmasked users alarms, 2416 upAckTime, 2416 upgradeStatus, omu, 2417 uplinkMappingChannelNumber, 2417 uplinkMappingFreq, 2417 uplinkMappingMeasurementMode, 2418 uplinkMappingProcessingMode, 2418 uplinkPowerControl, 2418 uRxLevDLP, 2419 uRxLevULP, 2419 uRxQualDLP, 2420 uRxQualULP, 2420 usageState
callPathTrace, 2421 xtp, 2421

use default list, 2421 user name, 2422 user profile, 2422 username
job, 2422 jobResult, 2422

V
version, 2423 voiceBroadcastService, 2423 voiceGroupCallService , 2423 VSWR meter, 2424

BSS Parameter Dictionary

xxviii

Index of parameters

Nortel Networks Confidential

W
workstation name, 2425

X
X25Port0Operational, 2426 X25Port1Operational, 2426 xSCBConfiguration, 2427 xSCBNumber, 2427 xSCBUse, 2427 xtp, 2428

Z
ZI bss
terminal profile, 2430 user profile, 2430

ZI omc
terminal profile, 2431 user profile, 2431

zone frequency hopping, 2431 zone frequency threshold, 2431 zone Tx power max reduction, 2432

PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124

Standard

13.04/EN

March 2002

GSM/BSS V13

Wireless Service Provider Solutions BSS Parameter Dictionary


Copyright 20002002 Nortel Networks, All Rights Reserved NORTEL NETWORKS CONFIDENTIAL: The information contained in this document is the property of Nortel Networks. Except as specifically authorized in writing by Nortel Networks, the holder of this document shall keep the information contained herein confidential and shall protect same in whole or in part from disclosure and dissemination to third parties and use for evaluation, operation and maintenance purposes only. You may not reproduce, represent, or download through any means, the information contained herein in any way or in any form without prior written consent of Nortel Networks. The following are trademarks of Nortel Networks: *NORTEL NETWORKS, the NORTEL NETWORKS corporate logo, the NORTEL Globemark, UNIFIED NETWORKS, DMS, DMSMSC, BSC6000, S2000, S4000, S8000. GSM is a trademark of France Telecom. Sun, Ultrastation are registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Sybase is a registered trademark of Sybase, Inc. Windows is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corp. All other brand and product names are trademarks or registred trademarks of their respective holders. Publication Reference PE/DCL/DD/0124 4119001124 13.04/EN March 2002 Printed in France

For more information, please contact: For all countries, except USA: Documentation Department 1, Place des Frres Montgolfier GUYANCOURT 78928 YVELINES CEDEX 9 FRANCE Email : umtsgsm.ntp@nortelnetworks.com Fax : (33) (1) 39445029 In the USA: 2221 Lakeside Boulevard Richardson TX 75082 USA Tel: 18004 NORTEL 18004667838 or (972) 6845935

Internet Address: http://www.nortelnetworks.com